SINAMICS DCM

Control Modules for

DC variable-speed drives

Operating Instructions
11/2009 Edition

SINAMICS drives
 Preface

Notes 1

Ordering information 2
SINAMICS
Description 3

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules Technical data 4

Transport, unpacking,
installation 5
Operating Instructions
Connecting 6
Additional system
components 7

Commissioning 8

Operation 9

Descriptions of functions 10

Maintenance 11

Applications 12

Appendix A

Appendix B B
Software version 1.1

11.2009
C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG Ordernumber: 6RX1800-0BD76 Copyright © Siemens AG 2009.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 12/2009 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Product name
The SINAMICS DCM documentation uses the following product names:
● SINAMICS DCM
● SINAMICS DC MASTER

Unit software version

As these Operating Instructions went to print, SINAMICS DCM Control Modules were being
supplied from the factory with software version 1.1 installed.
However, these Operating Instructions can, in principle, also apply to other software
versions.
● Older software versions:
It is possible that not all of the functions described here may be available.
● Newer software versions:
It is possible that SINAMICS DCM Control Modules may feature additional functions that
are not described in these Operating Instructions. Do not change any parameters that
you cannot find in the List Manual from their factory setting, and do not give parameters
any values that are not specified in the List Manual.
The software version of SINAMICS DCM Control Modules can be read from parameter
r50060, index 6 (DC MASTER version).
Example:
01010203 displayed on the BOP20 means 01.01.02.03 → Version 1.1, Service Pack 2,
Hotfix 3
Download the current software version:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/38157755/133100

SINAMICS DCM documentation available

SINAMICS DCM DC Converters Operating Instructions

Contains all information on
ordering, installation, connecting, commissioning, maintenance, description of
functions, and service
SINAMICS DCM Control Modules Operating Instructions
Contains all information on
ordering, installation, connecting, commissioning, maintenance, description of
functions, and service
SINAMICS DCM List Manual (for DC converters and control modules)
Contains
parameter list, function diagrams, list of faults and alarms

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 5
Preface

SINAMICS Free Function Blocks Manual

Contains all information on free function blocks
SINAMICS DCM DVD documentation
Includes
All the manuals listed above, in all available languages
Function diagrams in VISIO® format
Application notes
Spare parts list

Service
You can find information on our services and regional contacts at:
www.siemens.com/automation/csi_en/service

Technical support
Our technical support service can provide you with technical assistance for products,
systems, and solutions.
www.siemens.de/automation/support-request (German)
www.siemens.com/automation/support-request (English)

Central hotlines for SINAMICS DCM technical support

European and African time zone Phone: +49 180 5050 222 8:00 to 17:00 CET
Fax: +49 180 5050 223
0.14 €/min. from a German landline; costs of cell
phone calls may differ
mailto:[email protected]
America time zone 24-hour hotline: +1 (0) 800 333 7421
Phone: +1 423 262 2522 8:00 to 17:00
Fax: +1 423 262 2200 Eastern Standard Time
mailto:[email protected]
Asia/Australia time zone Phone: +86 1064 757575 7:30 to 17:30
Fax: +86 1064 747474 Beijing local time
mailto:[email protected]

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

6 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Preface

Spare parts
You can find information on spare parts
● in catalog DA 23
● on the SINAMICS DCM documentation DVD
(to reorder please quote order number 6RX1800-0AD64)
● in the internet http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/38157755/133100
● in the electronics spare parts catalog, Spares On Web, by entering the serial and order
number of your SINAMICS DCM.
To access it, go to http://workplace.automation.siemens.com/sparesonweb (registration
required).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 7
Table of contents

Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
1 Notes ....................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.1 Alarm messages ..........................................................................................................................17
1.2 ESD-sensitive components..........................................................................................................19
2 Ordering information ................................................................................................................................ 21
2.1 Unit order numbers ......................................................................................................................21
2.2 Rating plates, packaging label .....................................................................................................22
2.3 Ordering information for options and accessories .......................................................................24
3 Description............................................................................................................................................... 29
4 Technical data ......................................................................................................................................... 33
4.1 Environmental conditions.............................................................................................................34
4.2 Unit data.......................................................................................................................................35
5 Transport, unpacking, installation ............................................................................................................ 37
5.1 Transportation, unpacking ...........................................................................................................37
5.2 Installation ....................................................................................................................................38
5.2.1 Dimension drawings.....................................................................................................................39
5.2.2 Dividing the unit ...........................................................................................................................41
5.2.3 Removal/Installation and division of modules..............................................................................43
5.2.3.1 Removing modules ......................................................................................................................43
5.2.3.2 Firing pulse transformers C98043-A7043....................................................................................45
5.2.3.3 Fuse monitoring equipment C98043-A7118 and voltage measurement equipment
C98043-A7117 .............................................................................................................................48
5.2.4 Mounting of options......................................................................................................................50
5.2.4.1 Installing a second CUD ..............................................................................................................50
6 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 53
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation.........................................................................54
6.1.1 Basic information about EMC ......................................................................................................54
6.1.2 EMC-compliant drive installation (installation instructions)..........................................................57
6.1.3 Arranging components for converter units...................................................................................62
6.1.4 Information on line-side harmonics produced by converter units in a fully-controlled two-
pulse bridge circuit configuration (B6C and (B6)A(B6)C) ............................................................62
6.2 Block diagram with connection suggestion..................................................................................65
6.3 Connecting the external power unit .............................................................................................68
6.4 Division options ............................................................................................................................75
6.5 Measurement of the armature current .........................................................................................86
6.5.1 General information .....................................................................................................................86
6.5.2 Current measurement with two current transformers on the line side .........................................87
6.5.3 Current measurement via terminal block XB-1 to XB-4 with external measuring circuit .............89

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 9
Table of contents

6.5.3.1 External current transformers in V-circuit with +1 V at rated armature DC current .................... 89
6.5.3.2 External current transformers in V-circuit with +10 V at rated armature DC current .................. 90
6.5.3.3 Differential input for +/-10 V at rated armature DC current......................................................... 90
6.5.3.4 Input for +/-1 V at rated armature DC current ............................................................................. 91
6.5.4 External current measurement via X21A or X_I_IST .................................................................. 92
6.5.5 Offset correction via XN1 ............................................................................................................ 92
6.5.6 Information on the differential input, control limits, and grounding ............................................. 93
6.6 Connecting the firing pulse transformers .................................................................................... 94
6.6.1 General information..................................................................................................................... 94
6.6.2 Normal use (individual) ............................................................................................................... 94
6.6.3 Parallel connection of firing pulses ............................................................................................. 95
6.6.4 External amplification of firing pulses.......................................................................................... 95
6.7 Connecting voltage measurement equipment ............................................................................ 96
6.8 Connecting fuse monitoring equipment ...................................................................................... 97
6.9 Parallel connection of power units .............................................................................................. 98
6.10 Field supply ............................................................................................................................... 100
6.11 Line reactors ............................................................................................................................. 102
6.12 Fuses......................................................................................................................................... 103
6.13 Arrangement of printed circuit boards....................................................................................... 104
6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston mounting tabs) ............. 105
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)................................ 111
6.15.1 Exciter circuit............................................................................................................................. 112
6.15.2 Electronic power supply ............................................................................................................ 112
6.15.3 Open-loop and closed-loop control section............................................................................... 112
6.15.4 Voltage measurement equipment ............................................................................................. 121
6.15.5 Fuse monitoring equipment....................................................................................................... 123
6.15.6 Firing pulse transformers .......................................................................................................... 124
6.15.7 Firing pulse................................................................................................................................ 127
6.15.8 Ribbon cables ........................................................................................................................... 130
7 Additional system components .............................................................................................................. 135
7.1 Option Board: Communication Board CBE20........................................................................... 136
7.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 136
7.1.2 Safety instructions..................................................................................................................... 136
7.1.3 Interface description.................................................................................................................. 137
7.1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 137
7.1.3.2 X1400 Ethernet interface .......................................................................................................... 137
7.1.3.3 Meanings of the LEDs on the Communication Board Ethernet CBE20.................................... 138
7.1.4 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 140
7.1.5 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 140
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 ................................................................................ 141
7.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 141
7.2.2 Safety instructions..................................................................................................................... 141
7.2.3 Interface description.................................................................................................................. 143
7.2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 143
7.2.3.2 Connection examples................................................................................................................ 144
7.2.3.3 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500...................................................................................................... 146
7.2.3.4 X520 encoder system interface ................................................................................................ 146
7.2.3.5 X521/X531 alternative encoder system interface ..................................................................... 147

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

10 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Table of contents

7.2.3.6 X524 electronic power supply ....................................................................................................148

7.2.3.7 Meanings of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (SMC30) .....................................148
7.2.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................150
7.2.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................................151
7.2.6 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................152
7.2.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................153
7.3 Terminal Module TM15 ..............................................................................................................157
7.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................157
7.3.2 Safety Information......................................................................................................................157
7.3.3 Interface description...................................................................................................................158
7.3.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................158
7.3.3.2 Connection example ..................................................................................................................160
7.3.3.3 X500 and X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interface......................................................................................161
7.3.3.4 X524 electronic power supply ....................................................................................................161
7.3.3.5 X520 digital inputs/outputs.........................................................................................................162
7.3.3.6 X521 digital inputs/outputs.........................................................................................................162
7.3.3.7 X522 digital inputs/outputs.........................................................................................................163
7.3.3.8 Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM15 ..............................................................163
7.3.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................164
7.3.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................................165
7.3.6 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................166
7.3.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................168
7.4 Terminal Module TM31 ..............................................................................................................170
7.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................170
7.4.2 Safety Information......................................................................................................................170
7.4.3 Interface description...................................................................................................................171
7.4.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................171
7.4.3.2 Connection example ..................................................................................................................173
7.4.3.3 X500 and X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interface......................................................................................174
7.4.3.4 X524 electronic power supply ....................................................................................................174
7.4.3.5 X520, X530 digital inputs ...........................................................................................................175
7.4.3.6 X540 auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs ...............................................................................176
7.4.3.7 X521 analog inputs ....................................................................................................................176
7.4.3.8 Analog inputs current/voltage switch .........................................................................................177
7.4.3.9 X522 analog outputs/temperature sensor..................................................................................177
7.4.3.10 X541 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs ....................................................................................178
7.4.3.11 X542 relay outputs .....................................................................................................................178
7.4.3.12 Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM31 ..............................................................179
7.4.3.13 Cause and rectification of faults.................................................................................................179
7.4.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................180
7.4.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................................181
7.4.6 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................................182
7.4.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................184
8 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................................... 185
8.1 Switching on...............................................................................................................................187
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel.....................................................................188
8.2.1 Preconditions .............................................................................................................................188
8.2.2 Commissioning steps.................................................................................................................188
8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel.....................................................................199
8.3.1 First commissioning ...................................................................................................................199
8.3.1.1 First power-up ............................................................................................................................199
8.3.1.2 Full drive commissioning............................................................................................................200

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 11
Table of contents

8.3.2 Status after commissioning ....................................................................................................... 204

8.3.3 Resetting parameters to factory settings .................................................................................. 204
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool .......................................................... 205
8.4.1 STARTER commissioning tool.................................................................................................. 205
8.4.1.1 Installing the STARTER commissioning tool ............................................................................ 205
8.4.1.2 Layout of the STARTER user interface..................................................................................... 206
8.4.2 Procedure for commissioning with STARTER .......................................................................... 206
8.4.2.1 Creating the project................................................................................................................... 207
8.4.2.2 Configuring a drive unit ............................................................................................................. 214
8.4.2.3 Starting the drive project ........................................................................................................... 227
8.4.2.4 Connection through a serial interface ....................................................................................... 229
8.5 Activating function modules ...................................................................................................... 232
8.5.1 Activating offline with STARTER............................................................................................... 232
8.5.2 Activating online through parameters ....................................................................................... 233
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules............................................................................. 235
8.6.1 Terminal Modules (TM31, TM15).............................................................................................. 235
8.6.1.1 Commissioning with STARTER ................................................................................................ 235
8.6.1.2 Commissioning via parameter assignment ............................................................................... 237
8.6.2 Encoder evaluation (SMC30) .................................................................................................... 237
8.6.2.1 Commissioning with STARTER ................................................................................................ 238
8.6.2.2 Commissioning via parameter assignment ............................................................................... 239
8.6.3 PROFINET module (CBE20) .................................................................................................... 240
8.6.3.1 Adding online into the drive....................................................................................................... 240
8.6.3.2 Adding offline in STARTER....................................................................................................... 241
8.6.3.3 Deleting from the drive online ................................................................................................... 241
8.6.3.4 Deleting offline with STARTER ................................................................................................. 241
8.7 Manual optimization (where required)....................................................................................... 242
8.7.1 Setting the armature-circuit resistance (p50110) and armature-circuit inductance
(p50111) .................................................................................................................................... 242
8.7.2 Setting the field-circuit resistance (p50112).............................................................................. 243
9 Operation............................................................................................................................................... 245
9.1 Basic information....................................................................................................................... 245
9.1.1 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 245
9.1.2 Drive objects ............................................................................................................................. 247
9.1.3 Functions of the CompactFlash Card ....................................................................................... 249
9.1.4 Data sets ................................................................................................................................... 252
9.1.4.1 Integration ................................................................................................................................. 252
9.1.4.2 Using data sets ......................................................................................................................... 254
9.1.5 BICO technology: Interconnecting signals ................................................................................ 255
9.1.5.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 255
9.1.5.2 Binectors, connectors................................................................................................................ 255
9.1.5.3 Interconnecting signals using BICO technology ....................................................................... 256
9.1.5.4 Internal encoding of the binector/connector output parameters ............................................... 258
9.1.5.5 Example: Interconnecting digital signals................................................................................... 258
9.1.5.6 Information on BICO technology............................................................................................... 259
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)................................................... 260
9.2.1 General information about the BOP20...................................................................................... 260
9.2.2 Displays and using the BOP20 ................................................................................................. 263
9.2.3 Displaying faults and alarms ..................................................................................................... 268
9.2.4 Controlling the drive using the BOP20...................................................................................... 269
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel ................................................................................ 270

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

12 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Table of contents

9.3.1 Overview and menu structure ....................................................................................................271

9.3.2 Menu: Operation screen ............................................................................................................273
9.3.3 Parameterization menu..............................................................................................................273
9.3.4 Menu: Fault/alarm memory ........................................................................................................275
9.3.5 Menu: Commissioning/Service ..................................................................................................276
9.3.5.1 Drive commissioning..................................................................................................................276
9.3.5.2 Device commissioning ...............................................................................................................276
9.3.5.3 AOP settings ..............................................................................................................................276
9.3.5.4 Lists of signals for the operation screen ....................................................................................277
9.3.5.5 AOP30 diagnostics ....................................................................................................................280
9.3.6 Sprachauswahl/Language selection ..........................................................................................281
9.3.7 Operation via the operator panel (LOCAL mode) ......................................................................282
9.3.7.1 LOCAL/REMOTE key ................................................................................................................282
9.3.7.2 ON key/OFF key ........................................................................................................................283
9.3.7.3 CCW/CW changeover................................................................................................................283
9.3.7.4 Jogging.......................................................................................................................................283
9.3.7.5 Increase setpoint/Decrease setpoint .........................................................................................284
9.3.7.6 AOP setpoint ..............................................................................................................................284
9.3.7.7 Inhibiting AOP LOCAL mode .....................................................................................................285
9.3.7.8 Acknowledging errors via the AOP ............................................................................................285
9.3.7.9 Timeout monitoring ....................................................................................................................285
9.3.7.10 Operator inhibit lock/Parameters disable...................................................................................285
9.3.8 Faults and alarms ......................................................................................................................287
9.3.9 Saving the parameters permanently..........................................................................................288
9.3.10 Parameterization errors .............................................................................................................289
9.3.11 Assigning parameters to make AOP30 time-of-day master ......................................................289
10 Descriptions of functions........................................................................................................................ 291
10.1 Inputs/Outputs............................................................................................................................291
10.1.1 Overview of inputs/outputs.........................................................................................................291
10.1.2 Digital inputs/outputs..................................................................................................................291
10.1.3 Analog inputs .............................................................................................................................292
10.1.4 Analog outputs ...........................................................................................................................293
10.2 PROFIBUS.................................................................................................................................294
10.2.1 PROFIBUS connection ..............................................................................................................294
10.2.2 Control via PROFIBUS ..............................................................................................................296
10.2.3 Monitoring: Telegram failure ......................................................................................................296
10.2.4 Telegrams and process data .....................................................................................................297
10.2.5 Description of control words and setpoints ................................................................................298
10.2.6 Description of status words and actual values...........................................................................300
10.3 PROFINET IO ............................................................................................................................304
10.3.1 Activating online mode: STARTER via PROFINET IO ..............................................................304
10.3.2 General information about PROFINET IO .................................................................................310
10.3.2.1 General information about PROFINET IO for SINAMICS .........................................................310
10.3.2.2 Real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time (IRT) communication ..............................................311
10.3.2.3 Addresses ..................................................................................................................................312
10.3.2.4 Data transmission ......................................................................................................................313
10.3.3 Hardware configuration (configuring SINAMICS drives with PROFINET).................................314
10.3.4 RT classes for PROFINET IO ....................................................................................................316
10.3.5 Selection of the PROFINET variant ...........................................................................................322
10.4 Serial interface with USS protocol .............................................................................................324
10.5 Switch on, switch off, enable......................................................................................................326
10.5.1 Switch on/Switch off (ON/OFF1) - control word bit 0 .................................................................326

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 13
Table of contents

10.5.2 OFF2 (disconnection) - control word bit 1................................................................................. 328

10.5.3 OFF3 (quick stop) - control word bit 2....................................................................................... 328
10.5.4 Operation enable (enable) - control word bit 3.......................................................................... 330
10.6 Safety shutdown (E-STOP)....................................................................................................... 331
10.7 Setpoint channel ....................................................................................................................... 332
10.7.1 Ramp-function generator .......................................................................................................... 332
10.7.2 Jog............................................................................................................................................. 337
10.7.3 Creep......................................................................................................................................... 337
10.7.4 Fixed setpoint............................................................................................................................ 338
10.8 Encoder evaluation ................................................................................................................... 340
10.8.1 Actual speed values .................................................................................................................. 340
10.8.1.1 Encoder 1 actual position value 1 (G1_XIST1) ......................................................................... 341
10.8.1.2 Encoder 1 actual position value 2 (G1_XIST2) ......................................................................... 341
10.8.1.3 Encoder 2 actual position value 1 (G2_XIST1) ......................................................................... 343
10.8.1.4 Encoder 2 actual position value 2 (G2_XIST2) ......................................................................... 343
10.8.2 Control and status words for encoders ..................................................................................... 343
10.8.2.1 Encoder n control word (Gn_STW, n = 1, 2)............................................................................. 344
10.8.2.2 Encoder n status word (Gn_ZSW, n = 1, 2) .............................................................................. 346
10.9 Switch-on command for holding or operational brake .............................................................. 348
10.10 Switching on auxiliary circuits ................................................................................................... 351
10.11 Thermal overload protection for the DC motor (I2t monitoring of the motor)............................ 352
10.12 Speed-dependent current limitation .......................................................................................... 355
10.13 Automatic restart ....................................................................................................................... 358
10.14 Connecting the units in parallel................................................................................................. 359
10.14.1 Connection scheme .................................................................................................................. 360
10.14.2 Parameter assignment .............................................................................................................. 361
10.14.2.1 Standard mode.......................................................................................................................... 361
10.14.2.2 n+m mode ................................................................................................................................. 361
10.15 Serial interface with peer-to-peer protocol ................................................................................ 364
10.16 Expanding the SINAMICS DCM to include a second CUD ...................................................... 369
10.17 Runtime (operating hours counter) ........................................................................................... 371
10.18 Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 372
10.18.1 Diagnostic memory ................................................................................................................... 372
10.18.2 Trend recorder function............................................................................................................. 372
10.18.3 Description of the LEDs on the CUD ........................................................................................ 373
10.18.4 Faults and alarms...................................................................................................................... 376
10.18.4.1 General information................................................................................................................... 376
10.18.4.2 Buffer for faults and alarms ....................................................................................................... 377
10.18.4.3 Configuring messages .............................................................................................................. 380
10.18.4.4 Parameters and function diagrams for faults and alarms ......................................................... 382
10.18.4.5 Forwarding of faults................................................................................................................... 382
10.19 CPU time load with SINAMICS DCM........................................................................................ 384
10.19.1 Maximum configuration ............................................................................................................. 385
10.19.2 Computation examples ............................................................................................................. 386
10.20 Free function blocks .................................................................................................................. 387
10.21 Drive Control Chart (DCC) ........................................................................................................ 389
10.21.1 Loading the DCC in the drive unit memory ............................................................................... 389

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

14 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Table of contents

10.21.2 CPU time load through DCC......................................................................................................391

10.21.3 Memory load through DCC ........................................................................................................392
10.21.4 Backing up the DCC diagrams...................................................................................................393
11 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 395
11.1 Software update procedure........................................................................................................396
12 Applications ........................................................................................................................................... 397
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 399
A.1 Certifications and standards ......................................................................................................399
A.2 List of abbreviations ...................................................................................................................401
A.3 Environmental compatibility .......................................................................................................409
A.4 Servicing ....................................................................................................................................410
B Appendix B ............................................................................................................................................ 411
B.1 CPU time-optimized blocks on the SINAMICS DCM .................................................................411
B.2 BOP20 status display during power-up .....................................................................................416
B.3 Feedback ...................................................................................................................................417
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 419

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 15
Notes 1
1.1 Alarm messages

Note
In the interests of clarity, these Operating Instructions do not contain full details of all
information for all product types and cannot take into account every possible aspect of
installation, operation, or maintenance.
If you require further information, or particular problems arise which these Operating
Instructions do not cover in enough detail, please contact your local Siemens office.
We also draw your attention to the fact that the contents of these Operating Instructions are
not part of and do not modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment, or legal
relationship. Any obligations on the part of Siemens arise from the respective contract of
sale, which also contains the solely valid warranty conditions in full. Any statements
contained in these Operating Instructions neither expand nor restrict the scope of these
contractual warranty conditions.

WARNING
This unit is subject to hazardous voltage levels and contains dangerous rotating machine
parts (fans). Failure to comply with these Operating Instructions can lead to death, serious
physical injury, and material damage.
Only qualified personnel who are familiar with all the safety instructions provided in these
Operating Instructions, as well as the assembly, operating, and maintenance instructions,
should carry out work on this unit.

WARNING
Only safety extra-low voltages (DVC A) that comply with EN 60204-1 may be connected to
all connections and terminals between 0 and 48 V.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 17
Notes
1.1 Alarm messages

DANGER
When this unit is operated, it is inevitable that certain components will be subject to
dangerous electrical voltage levels. Touching these components may lead to serious
physical injury or even death. The following precautions should be taken in order to reduce
the risk to life and limb:
1. Only qualified personnel who are familiar with this unit and the information supplied with
it should be charged with work on the unit involving installation, operation,
troubleshooting and fault correction, or repair.
2. The unit must be installed in accordance with safety regulations (e.g. DIN or VDE) as
well as all other applicable national or local regulations. Grounding, conductor
dimensioning, and the relevant short-circuit protection work must be carried out correctly
in order to ensure operational safety.
3. The unit must be operated with all covers supplied.
4. Before carrying out visual inspections and maintenance work, ensure that the unit is
disconnected from the supply voltage and disabled. Before they are shut down, both the
converter unit and the motor are subject to dangerous voltage levels; these may be
present even when the converter unit's line contactor is open.
5. If measurements need to be taken while the power supply is switched on, do not under
any circumstances touch the electrical connection points. Remove all jewelry from wrists
and fingers. Make sure that the measuring and test equipment is in good condition and
is safe to operate.
6. When working on a unit that is switched on and on an insulated surface, make sure that
no grounding has been put in place.
7. Follow these Operating Instructions faithfully and observe all information concerning
hazards, warnings, or areas where caution is required.
8. This list is not exhaustive and as such cannot outline all the measures required in order
to operate the unit safely. Should you require further information or encounter specific
problems which have not been handled in enough detail for the purposes of the buyer,
please contact your local Siemens office.

CAUTION
Operating mobile radio equipment with a transmitter power of > 1 W and ≤ 5 W in the
immediate vicinity (< 1.5 m) of the unit of may cause the unit to malfunction.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

18 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Notes
1.2 ESD-sensitive components

1.2 ESD-sensitive components

CAUTION
The electronic boards contain electrostatic sensitive devices. These can be easily
destroyed if not handled properly. If you have to work with electronic modules, please note:
• You should only touch electronic modules if absolutely necessary.
• If you do have to touch modules, your body must be electrically discharged first.
• Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials (such as plastic
parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers).
• Modules must only be set down on conductive surfaces.
• Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging
(such as metalized plastic boxes or metal containers).
• If the packaging material is not conductive, the modules must be wrapped with a
conductive packaging material (such as conductive foam rubber or household aluminum
foil).

The necessary ESD protection measures are elucidated once again in the following
illustration:

Seated Standing Seated/standing

a conductive floor
b ESD Table
c ESD footwear
" ESD smock
d
"
e ESD wrist strap
f cubicle ground
connection

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 19
Ordering information 2
2.1 Unit order numbers

Without option: 6RA8000 - 0MV62 - 0AA0

With options: 6RA8000 - 0MV62 - 0AA0 - Z

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 21
Ordering information
2.2 Rating plates, packaging label

2.2 Rating plates, packaging label

① Bar code for order number

 (MLFB)
 ② For options: "Z" after order
 number

③ Order codes for options
 (according to ordering
information for options and
accessories) (order-
specific)
④ Serial number bar code
(order-specific)
⑤ Product version

Rating plate on front cover






Rating plate in unit

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

22 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Ordering information
2.2 Rating plates, packaging label

① For options: "Z" after order number, followed by order codes (according to ordering information for
options and accessories)
Figure 2-1 Packaging label

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 23
Ordering information
2.3 Ordering information for options and accessories

2.3 Ordering information for options and accessories

Ordering information for options with order codes

Order number of SINAMICS DCM Control

5$09$$=
Module with Z designation and order codes
  (multiple order codes together) and/or plain
text, if necessary

Table 2- 1 Control Unit CUD options

Option Order codes

Advanced CUD in left slot G00
Standard CUD in right slot (possible with option G00) G10
Advanced CUD in right slot (possible with option G00) G11
CBE20 PROFINET left (possible with option G00) G20
CBE20 PROFINET right (possible with option G11) G21
CompactFlash Card, left S01
CompactFlash Card, right (possible with option G11) S02
Note: Standard equipment = Standard CUD left

Table 2- 2 Additional options

Option Order codes

Painted modules M08
Field power unit 2Q L11
Without field power unit L10
Nickel-plated copper bars (in the field power unit) M10

Ordering information for accessories

Table 2- 3 Order numbers for documentation

Item Order number

Set of manuals, German 6RX1800-0JD00
SINAMICS DCM Control Module Operating Instructions, German 6RX1800-0BD00
SINAMICS DCM List Manual, German 6RX1800-0ED00
Free Function Blocks Manual, German 6RX1800-0FD00

Set of manuals, English 6RX1800-0JD76

SINAMICS DCM Control Module Operating Instructions, English 6RX1800-0BD76
SINAMICS DCM List Manual, English 6RX1800-0ED76

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

24 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Ordering information
2.3 Ordering information for options and accessories

Item Order number

Free Function Blocks Manual, English 6RX1800-0FD76

Set of manuals, French (includes the Free Function Blocks Manual in English) 6RX1800-0JD77
SINAMICS DCM Control Module Operating Instructions, French 6RX1800-0BD77
SINAMICS DCM List Manual, French 6RX1800-0ED77

Set of manuals, Italian (includes the Free Function Blocks Manual in English) 6RX1800-0JD72
SINAMICS DCM Control Module Operating Instructions, Italian 6RX1800-0BD72
SINAMICS DCM List Manual, Italian 6RX1800-0ED72

Set of manuals, Russian (includes the Free Function Blocks Manual in English) 6RX1800-0JD56
SINAMICS DCM Control Module Operating Instructions, Russian 6RX1800-0BD56
SINAMICS DCM List Manual, Russian 6RX1800-0ED56

Set of manuals, Spanish (includes the Free Function Blocks Manual in English) 6RX1800-0JD78
SINAMICS DCM Control Module Operating Instructions, Spanish 6RX1800-0BD78
SINAMICS DCM List Manual, Spanish 6RX1800-0ED78

All documentation in all of the above languages, on DVD 6RX1800-0AD64

Table 2- 4 Order numbers for accessories

Item Order number

Standard CUD retrofit kit 6RY1803-0AA00 +
Combination of the Standard CUD and connector board spare parts 6RY1803-0GA00
Standard CUD painted retrofit kit 6RY1803-0AA20 +
Combination of the Standard CUD and connector board spare parts, painted 6RY1803-0GA20
Advanced CUD retrofit kit 6RY1803-0AA05 +
Combination of the Advanced CUD and connector board spare parts 6RY1803-0GA00
Advanced CUD painted retrofit kit 6RY1803-0AA25 +
Combination of the Advanced CUD and connector board spare parts, painted 6RY1803-0GA20
CBE20 PROFINET 6SL3055-0AA00-2EB0
CompactFlash Card (equivalent to spare part for options S01 and S02) 6RX1800-0AS01
Terminal Module TM15 6SL3055-0AA00-3FA0
Terminal Module TM31 6SL3055-0AA00-3AA0
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2
Advanced Operator Panel AOP30 6SL3055-0AA00-4CA4
SICROWBAR overvoltage protection 1)

Fuses, reactors, filters 1)

RS485 connecting cable for connecting the AOP30 to one CUD; 3 m 6RY1807-0AP00
RS485 connecting cable for connecting the AOP30 to two CUDs; 3 m 6RY1807-0AP10
STARTER commissioning tool 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0
Drive Control Chart (DCC) for SINAMICS 6AU1810-1HA20-1XA0

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 25
Ordering information
2.3 Ordering information for options and accessories

Item Order number

Drive Control Chart (DCC) for SINAMICS and SIMOTION 6AU1810-1JA20-1XA0
1) Please contact your local Siemens office.

Ordering information for cable sets

The SINAMICS DCM Control Module is supplied with front and rear plates mounted one on
top of the other. The correct ribbon cables for this mounting type are already in place.
The cable sets listed below for connecting components (printed circuit boards or their parts)
in the case of other mounting types (see Chapter 6) are available on request.

Table 2- 5 Ordering information for cable sets

Product description Contents For connecting Order no.

Set of loose parts Rear enclosure part including 6RY1805-0CM00
accessories for mounting the
firing pulse transformer module
and/or fuse monitoring module
with a parallel connection
Set of loose parts Screws, stud bolts, and snap- 6RY1807-0CM00
on parts for the external
mounting of module parts
Prefabricated ribbon cable 2 x 26-pin ribbon cables, X21A, X22A on PCB -A7109- 6RY1807-0CM01
bridge set: for connecting the shielded (L = 3 m) to X21A, X22A on PCB -A7043-
two plates when mounted at a 1 x 10-pin ribbon cable, X23B on PCB -A7109- to X23B
distance from each other shielded (L = 3 m) on PCB -A7118-
1 x 20-pin ribbon cable, XF1 on PCB -A7109- to XF1 on
shielded (L = 3 m) PCB -A7116-
1 x RJ45 patch cable, shielded X45 on PCB -A7109- to X45 on
(L = 3 m) PCB -A7117-
Prefabricated ribbon cable 2 x 26-pin ribbon cables, X21A, X22A on PCB -A7109- 6RY1807-0CM02
bridge set: for connecting the shielded (L = 10 m) to X21A, X22A on PCB -A7043-
two plates when mounted at a 1 x 10-pin ribbon cable, X23B on PCB -A7109- to X23B
distance from each other shielded (L = 10 m) on PCB -A7118-
1 x 20-pin ribbon cable, XF1 on PCB -A7109- to XF1 on
shielded (L = 10 m) PCB -A7116-
1 x RJ45 patch cable, shielded X45 on PCB -A7109- to X45 on
(L = 10 m) PCB -A7117-
Prefabricated bridge set for 2 x 2-pin twisted cables (L = 2 XB on PCB -A7109- to current 6RY1707-0CM03
current transformer m) transformers
Prefabricated bridge set for 2 x 2-pin twisted cables (L = 10 XB on PCB -A7109- to current 6RY1707-0CM04
current transformer m) transformers
Prefabricated bridge set for 1 x 2-pin shielded cable (L = 10 XT5 or XT6 on PCB -A7109- to 6RY1807-0CM05
recording heat sink m) temperature sensors on the heat
temperature sink
Prefabricated bridge set for Bridge set for 12 x 2-pin XIMP11, XIMP12, XIMP13, 6RY1707-0CM06
firing pulse cables twisted cables (L = 3 m) XIMP14, XIMP15, XIMP16,
XIMP21, XIMP22, XIMP23,
XIMP24, XIMP25, XIMP26 to
thyristors

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

26 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Ordering information
2.3 Ordering information for options and accessories

Product description Contents For connecting Order no.

Prefabricated bridge set for 6 x 2-pin twisted cables (L = XS1_5, XS2_5, XS3_5, XS4_5, 6RY1807-0CM07
fuse monitoring 10 m) XS5_5, XS6_5, XS7_5, XS8_5,
XS9_5, XS10_5, XS11_5,
XS12_5
or XS1_4, XS2_4, XS3_4, XS4_4,
XS5_4, XS6_4, XS7_4, XS8_4,
XS9_4, XS10_4, XS11_4,
XS12_4
or XS1_3, XS2_3, XS3_3,
XS4__3, XS5_3, XS6_3, XS7_3,
XS8_3, XS9_3, XS10_3, XS11_3,
XS12_3
or XS1_2, XS2_2, XS3_2, XS4_2,
XS5_2, XS6_2, XS7_2, XS8_2,
XS9_2, XS10_2, XS11_2,
XS12_2
or XS1_1, XS2_1, XS3_1, XS4_1,
XS5_1, XS6_1, XS7_1, XS8_1,
XS9_1, XS10_1, XS11_1,
XS12_1
depending on the voltage (50 V,
125 V, 250 V, 575 V, or 1,000 V)
to fuses
Prefabricated bridge set for 1 x 3-pin twisted U-V-W cable XU6, XV6, XW6 6RY1807-0CM08
voltage measurement (L = 3 m) or XU5, XV5, XW5
or XU4, XV4, XW4
or XU3, XV3, XW3
or XU2, XV2, XW2
or XU1, XV1, XW1
depending on the voltage (5.6 V,
50 V, 125 V, 250 V, 575 V, or
1,000 V) to the supply
1 x 2-pin twisted C-D cable (L XC6, XD6 or XC5, XD5 or XC4,
= 3 m) XD4 or XC3, XD3 or XC2, XD2 or
XC1, XD1 depending on the
voltage (5.6 V, 50 V, 125 V,
250 V, 575 V, or 1,000 V) to the
supply
Prefabricated bridge set for 12 x 2-pin twisted cables (L = XIMP1, XIMP4 or XIMP2, XIMP5 6RY1707-0CM13
controlling firing pulse 1 m) or XIMP3, XIMP6 on PCB -
transformers A7043- (side sections) to firing
pulse transformer modules
(single boards) with terminals
X11, X12, X13, X14, X15, X16,
X21, X22, X23, X24, X25, X26

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 27
Ordering information
2.3 Ordering information for options and accessories

Product description Contents For connecting Order no.

Prefabricated bridge set for 2 x 12-pin shielded cables (L = XIMP1, XIMP4 and/or XIMP2, 6RY1707-0CM10
controlling firing pulse 10 m) XIMP5 and/or XIMP3, XIMP6 on
transformers PCB -A7043- to external firing
pulse transformers
Prefabricated bridge set for 2 x 26-pin ribbon cables, X21A, X22A on PCB -A7109- 6RY1807-0CM11
mounting plates next to each shielded (L = 0.68 m) to X21A, X22A on PCB -A7043-
other 1 x 10-pin ribbon cable, X23B on PCB -A7109-
shielded (L = 0.5 m) to X23B on PCB -A7118-
1 x 20-pin ribbon cable, XF1 on PCB -A7109-
shielded (L = 0.76 m) to XF1 on PCB -A7116-
1 x RJ45 patch cable, shielded X45 on PCB -A7109-
(L = 1 m) to X45 on PCB -A7117-

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

28 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Description 3
Application
The SINAMICS DCM Control Module is mainly used for modifying and modernizing DC
drives in existing systems.
Many DC systems still use analog technology. When such systems are modified or
upgraded, the motor, mechanical parts, and power unit are retained, with just the closed-loop
control section being replaced by a SINAMICS DCM Control Module. This is a highly cost-
effective solution for those interested in a modern DC drive with the entire range of functions
associated with the fully digital units in the SINAMICS DCM range.
A simple process of parameter assignment is all that is required in terms of adapting the
product to the existing components' configuration.
The SINAMICS DCM Control Module contains a power unit for field supply with a rated
current of up to 40 A.

Structure
A striking feature of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module is its compact, space-saving
structure. Its compact design makes it easier to service, as the individual components are
readily accessible.
To make the most of the installation options existing systems have to offer, the SINAMICS
DCM Control Module can be divided into smaller parts (from the top down).
The printed circuit board for generating and distributing firing pulses can also be divided up
and, like the fuse monitoring and voltage measurement equipment, attached to the power
unit directly, either partly or completely outside the device, with a cable providing the
connection to the basic unit.
All connecting terminals can be accessed from the front.
The SINAMICS DCM Control Module has a Basic Operator Panel BOP20 in the front plate.
The BOP20 can be used
● To make all the settings that are required for commissioning
● To display all relevant measured values
● To display faults and alarms and acknowledge faults
● To switch the drive on and off
The electronics (CUD) are available in the following versions:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 29
Description

● Standard CUD
● Advanced CUD (option)
This CUD can be expanded to include a PROFINET module (CBE20) and features 2
DRIVE-CLiQ connections for connecting additional components from the SINAMICS drive
system, as well as a connector for expansion purposes (to include a second CUD).
● Additional (second) CUD (Standard or Advanced) (option)
This additional CUD can be fitted to the right of the first CUD and is used for system-
specific extension of the SINAMICS DCM functions.

Additional components
● Advanced Operator Panel AOP30
The optional Advanced Operator Panel AOP30 is mounted outside of the unit - in the
control cabinet door, for example - rather than inside it.
The AOP30
– Supports commissioning by means of a commissioning wizard
– Supports the display of measured values via a graphical operation screen
– Displays a user-friendly parameter list, including text
– Features several editors for user-friendly setting and changing of parameters
– Displays lists of faults and alarms that have occurred, as well as infotext concerning
the individual faults and alarms
– Enables "local" drive control (ON/OFF, setpoint setting, jog mode, direction reversal)
– Features 3 LEDs for displaying the drive state
● PROFINET interface (additional module CBE20)
The additional module CBE20 is inserted in the optional module slot of an Advanced
CUD. It enables the SINAMICS DC MASTER to participate in a PROFINET network as a
slave.
● Components from the SINAMICS drive system
The DRIVE-CLiQ interface enables components from the SINAMICS drive system to be
connected.
The following components are supported:
– TM15 (digital inputs/outputs)
– TM31 (digital inputs/outputs; analog inputs/outputs)
– SMC30 (incremental encoder evaluation for actual speed value acquisition)
An SMC30 and up to 3 TMx modules can be connected.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

30 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Description

● Free function blocks

In a wide variety of applications, a logic operation connecting several states (e.g. access
control, system status) to a control signal (e.g. ON command) is required to control the
drive system. In addition to logic operations, however, drive systems require
mathematical operations and latching elements.
These functions are available in the form of the "free function blocks" function module.
There is a range of elementary function blocks that are freely available for use:
– Logic function blocks (AND, OR, XOR, inverter)
– Calculation function blocks (adder, multiplier, divider, absolute-value generator)
– Time function blocks (pulse generator, pulse contracting block, ON delay, OFF delay,
pulse stretching)
– Memory function blocks (RS flip-flop, D flip-flop)
– Switch function blocks (binary selector switch, numerical selector switch)
– Control function blocks (limiter, smoothing element, integrator, differentiator)
– Complex function blocks (double-sided limit monitor with hysteresis)
Drive Control Chart (DCC)
DCC is available for applications requiring a more complex method of controlling the drive
system, which cannot be accomplished using the free function blocks. DCC makes it
possible to generate a graphical depiction of a function diagram consisting of interconnected
elementary function blocks and load it to the SINAMICS DC MASTER. The function diagram
may contain up to 750 function blocks. It is possible to configure the time slices in which the
individual parts of the function diagram are processed.
Note:
A DCC function diagram can be loaded not only to the CUD in the left-hand slot, but also to
an optional second CUD in the right-hand slot.
The automatic speed control processes are computed on the CUD in the left-hand slot,
which means that it only provides a small amount of computing capacity for a DCC function
diagram (in other words, either only a few function blocks can be computed, or computing
can only be carried out in a long time slice).
The CUD in the right-hand slot is primarily available (in addition to the operating system) for
one DCC function diagram only.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 31
Technical data 4
Note
You can find the technical data for the connectors and terminals in the section titled
"Connecting".

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 33
Technical data
4.1 Environmental conditions

4.1 Environmental conditions

Environmental classes according to EN 60721-3

Table 4- 1 Environmental classes

Use Environmental condition Environmental class Comment

Operation Mechanical stability 3M2 -
Climatic influences 3K3 No condensation, splash water, or icing
allowed. For air temperature, see
"Ambient temperature" below
Biological influences 3B1 -
Hazardous chemical substances 3C1 -
Mechanically hazardous materials 3S2 -
Transportation Mechanical stability 2M2 Tipping is not permitted.
Climatic influences 2K2 Air temperature of -40 °C to +70 °C is
permitted 1)
Biological influences 2B1 -
Hazardous chemical substances 2C1 -
Mechanically hazardous materials 2S1 -
Storage Mechanical stability 1M2 Tipping is not permitted.
Climatic influences 1K3 Air temperature of -40 °C to +70 °C is
permitted 1)
Biological influences 1B1 -
Hazardous chemical substances 1C1 -
Mechanically hazardous materials 1S1 -
1) Only applies when product is in its original packing

Ambient temperature

Application Tu [°C] Comment

Transport, -40 to +70 Only applies when product is in its original packing
storage
Operation 0 to +55 In order to ensure sufficient cooling for the electronics components, the supply air
temperature needs to be reduced by 3.5 K/500 m for altitudes more than 1,000 m
above sea level.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

34 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Technical data
4.2 Unit data

4.2 Unit data

Table 4- 2 Technical data for SINAMICS DC MASTER Control Module

Armature V 5.6/50/125/250/575/1,000
Measurable rated supply voltage
Electronic power supply V DC 18 to 30; In = 5 A
Rated supply voltage
Rated field supply voltage 1) V 2AC 400 (+15% / -20%)
2AC 460 (+15% / -20%)
Rated frequency Hz The units automatically adjust to the frequency of the applied
line voltage in a range from 45 to 65 Hz 3).
Rated field DC voltage 1) V Max. 325/375
Rated field DC current A 40
Closed-loop control constancy Δn = 0.006% of rated motor speed during operation with
incremental encoder and digital setpoint
Δn = 0.1% of rated motor speed during operation with analog
tachometer or analog setpoint 2)
DIN EN 60529 degree of protection IP00
Dimensions For dimension drawings, see Chapter 5.
Weight kg 12

1) The field supply voltage may be below the rated field voltage (setting for p50078.1,
input voltages of up to 85 V are permitted). The output voltage decreases
accordingly.
This output voltage can no longer be achieved at voltages below 95% of the rated
supply voltage.
2) Conditions:
The closed-loop control (closed-loop PI control) constancy is related to the rated
motor speed and applies when the SINAMICS DC MASTER is at the operating
temperature. This is subject to the following preconditions:
• Temperature changes of ±10 °C
• Changes to the line voltage of +10% / – 5% of the rated input voltage
• Temperature coefficient of tachometer generator with temperature compensation:
0.15‰ every 10 °C (with analog tachometer generator only)
• Constant setpoint (14-bit resolution)
3) The option of operating with an extended frequency range can be provided on
request.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 35
Transport, unpacking, installation 5
5.1 Transportation, unpacking
The SINAMICS DC MASTER is packaged at the manufacturer's site in accordance with the
order specification. A product packaging label is located on the carton.
Avoid heavy vibrations and severe shocks during transportation, e.g. when lowering the unit
into position.
Follow the instructions on the packaging concerning transportation, storage, and proper
handling.
The SINAMICS DC MASTER can be installed once it has been unpacked, and you have
checked that the delivery is complete and the unit is intact.
The packaging materials consist of the carton and corrugated cardboard, and can be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations for cardboard packaging.
If you discover any damage that has occurred in transit, please inform your shipping agent
immediately.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 37
Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

5.2 Installation

CAUTION
Failure to lift the unit properly can lead to physical injury or material damage.
The unit should only be lifted with suitable equipment (work gloves should be used) and by
appropriately qualified personnel.
The user assumes responsibility for installing the SINAMICS DCM Control Module, power
unit, motor, transformer, and other units in accordance with safety regulations (e.g. EN,
DIN, VDE) and all other relevant national or local regulations concerning conductor
dimensioning, protection, grounding, disconnectors, overcurrent protection, and so on.
The unit must be installed in accordance with safety regulations (e.g. EN, DIN, or VDE) as
well as all other applicable national or local regulations. Grounding, conductor
dimensioning, and the relevant short-circuit protection work must be carried out correctly in
order to ensure operational safety.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

38 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

5.2.1 Dimension drawings

All dimensions given in mm
Tolerance for external dimensions is +2 mm




 3LYRW






IRU0[




 


Figure 5-1 Unit components after assembly (on delivery)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 39
Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation














 


Figure 5-2 Unit components arranged alongside each other

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

40 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

5.2.2 Dividing the unit

1. Loosen the screws ①.

2. Pull the front cover towards you ② and then upwards to remove it ③.
3. Unplug the cable connections between the two plates.
4. Loosen the screws ④.
Figure 5-3 Dividing the unit (1)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 41
Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation




5. Pull the plate towards you ① and remove it ②.

Figure 5-4 Dividing the unit (2)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

42 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

5.2.3 Removal/Installation and division of modules

5.2.3.1 Removing modules

To remove firing pulse transformer module A7043, pull the cables out from it and loosen the screws ①.
To remove other modules, remove the shield ③ by pulling it towards you. You will need to unscrew the field terminal ④ and
then loosen the screws ② before doing this.
Figure 5-5 Removing modules (1)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 43
Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

To remove fuse monitoring equipment A7118, pull the cables out from the module and loosen the screws ①.
To remove voltage measurement equipment A7117, pull the cables out from the module and loosen the screws ②.
Figure 5-6 Removing modules (2)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

44 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

5.2.3.2 Firing pulse transformers C98043-A7043

Dividing the module

1. Use the edge of a table to separate the two terminal parts ①.

2. Use the edge of a table to separate the small control boards ②.
Figure 5-7 Dividing the A7043 firing pulse transformers

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 45
Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

Installing terminal strips

Leave the two crossbraces ① for supporting the side sections of the modules in the unit.
Figure 5-8 Installing the A7043 firing pulse transformers

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

46 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

External mounting of module parts

The parts required are not included in the scope of delivery, but are available as a "set of
loose parts" under order no. 6RY1807-0CM00.

The 3 snap-on parts ① for the DIN rail, which satisfies DIN EN 50022-35x7.5, are mounted on the terminal strip with spacer
rollers ② and M3x16 screws ③.
Figure 5-9 External mounting of the terminal strip

The 2 snap-on parts ① for the DIN rail, which satisfies DIN EN 50022-35x7.5, are mounted on the small control boards with
M3x8 screws ②.
Figure 5-10 External mounting of the small firing pulse transformer boards

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 47
Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

5.2.3.3 Fuse monitoring equipment C98043-A7118 and voltage measurement equipment

C98043-A7117

External mounting of fuse monitoring equipment C98043-A7118




1 1
0[


2


2


2
2
 

    ุ


Mount the module on the spacing bolts.

① Ferrous fixing elements (x2)
② Insulating fixing elements (x5)
Figure 5-11 External mounting of the fuse monitoring equipment

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

48 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

External mounting of voltage measurement equipment C98043-A7117




1 1

2 2


0[

2 2
 

ุ
   

Mount the module on the spacing bolts.

① Ferrous fixing elements (x2)
② Insulating fixing elements (x4)
Figure 5-12 External mounting of the voltage measurement equipment

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 49
Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

5.2.4 Mounting of options

5.2.4.1 Installing a second CUD

CAUTION
Please observe the information provided on "Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)" in
Chapter 1.

• Unlock and tilt up the BOP support ①.

Figure 5-13 Installing a second CUD (1)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

50 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Transport, unpacking, installation
5.2 Installation

• Mount the CUD and push it into the connectors for the left-hand CUD.
• Secure the CUD using 4 screws (screw and washer assembly, M3×6), tightening torque 1 Nm

Figure 5-14 Installing a second CUD (2)

• Lock the BOP support again.

CAUTION: Do not clamp the BOP cable
Figure 5-15 Installing a second CUD (3)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 51
Connecting 6
WARNING
The manufacturer can only provide an assurance that the SINAMICS DCM Control Module
will function properly and accept any liability for damage if the unit has been installed and
commissioned by experts and the contents of these Operating Instructions have been
correctly followed.
The units are operated with high voltages.
All connection work must be carried out while the cabinet is de-energized.
Only qualified personnel who are familiar with all the safety instructions in these Operating
Instructions, as well as the mounting, installation, operating, and maintenance instructions,
should carry out work on these units.
Failure to observe this warning information can result in death, serious physical injury, or
extensive material damage.
Connecting the unit incorrectly can lead to it being damaged or destroyed.
The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running.
The TSE capacitors may continue to carry dangerous voltage levels following
disconnection. For this reason, the unit should not be opened until an appropriate period of
time has elapsed.
When handling the unit while it is open, remember that live parts are exposed. The unit
must only be operated with the front covers provided by the factory fitted.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the motor, the SINAMICS DCM Control Module,
and other units are installed and connected in accordance with recognized engineering
practice in the country of installation and in compliance with applicable regional regulations.
Special attention should be paid to cable dimensioning, fuses, grounding, shutdown,
disconnection, and overcurrent protection.
The units listed here contain dangerous rotating machine parts (fans) and control rotating
mechanical parts (drives). Failure to follow these Operating Instructions may result in death,
serious physical injury, or extensive material damage.
Perfect, safe, and reliable operation of the units is conditional upon them having been
transported, stored, mounted, and installed correctly, as well as carefully operated and
serviced.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 53
Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

Note
These installation instructions do not claim to contain all details and versions of units, or to
take into account all conceivable operational cases and applications.
Should you require further information or encounter specific problems which have not been
dealt with in enough detail for your field of application, please contact your local Siemens
office.
The contents of these installation instructions neither form part of nor modify any prior or
existing contract, agreement, or legal relationship. The contract of sale in each case outlines
all the obligations of the I DT LD Variable-Speed Drives Division of SIEMENS AG. The
warranty conditions specified in the contract between the parties are the only warranty
conditions accepted by the I DT LD Variable-Speed Drives Division. Any statements
contained in these installation instructions neither create new warranty conditions nor modify
the existing warranty conditions.

6.1.1 Basic information about EMC

What is EMC?
EMC stands for "electromagnetic compatibility" and describes "the capability of a device to
function satisfactorily in an electromagnetic environment without itself causing interference
unacceptable for other devices in the environment". Therefore, the various units used should
not cause interference to one another.
Within the context of the EMC Directive, the SINAMICS DC MASTER units described in this
document are not "units" at all, but are instead "components" that are intended to be
installed in an overall system or overall plant. For reasons of clarity, however, the generic
term "units" is used in many cases.

Interference emissions and interference immunity

EMC is dependent upon two properties demonstrated by the units involved in the system:
interference emissions and interference immunity. Electrical units may be sources of
interference (senders) and/or potentially susceptible equipment (receivers).
Electromagnetic compatibility is ensured when the existing sources of interference do not
impair the function of potentially susceptible equipment.
A unit may even be a source of interference and potentially susceptible equipment at the
same time: For example, the power unit of a converter unit should be viewed as a source of
interference and the control unit as potentially susceptible equipment.

Product standard EN 61800-3

The EMC requirements for "Variable-speed drive systems" are described in the product
standard EN 61800-3. A variable-speed drive system (or Power Drive System PDS) consists
of the drive converter and the electric motor including cables. The driven machine is not part

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

54 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

of the drive system. EN 61800-3 defines different limits depending on the installation site of
the drive system, referred to as the first and second environments.
Residential buildings or locations at which the drive system is directly connected to a public
low-voltage network without an intermediate transformer are defined as the first environment.
The term second environment refers to all locations outside residential areas. These are
basically industrial areas which are powered from the medium-voltage network via their own
transformers.

0HGLXPYROWDJHQHWZRUN

'LVWULEXWLRQ
RIFRQGXFWHG
IDXOWV
3XEOLF ,QGXVWULDO
ORZYROWDJHQHWZRUN ORZYROWDJHQHWZRUN

0HDVXULQJSRLQWIRU
FRQGXFWHG
IDXOWV

)LUVW 6HFRQG
HQYLURQPHQW HQYLURQPHQW

/LPLWRIIDFLOLW\
P
(TXLSPHQW 'ULYH
DIIHFWHGE\ LQWHUIHUHQFH
IDXOWV 0HDVXULQJSRLQWIRUHPLWWHG VRXUFH
LQWHUIHUHQFH

Figure 6-1 Definition of the first and second environments

Four different categories are defined in EN 61800-3 Ed.2 depending on the installation site
and the power of the drive:

Category C1: Drive systems for rated voltages < 1,000 V for unlimited use in the first
environment
Category C2: Stationary drive systems for rated voltages < 1,000 V for use in the
second environment. Use in the first environment is possible if the drive
system is distributed and installed by qualified personnel. The warning
information and installation instructions supplied by the manufacturer must
be observed.
Category C3: Drive systems for rated voltages < 1,000 V for exclusive use in the second
environment
Category C4: Drive systems for rated voltages ≥ 1,000 V or for rated currents ≥ 400 A
for use in complex systems in the second environment
The figure below shows how the four categories are assigned to the first and second
environments:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 55
Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

&
)LUVW & 6HFRQG
HQYLURQPHQW HQYLURQPHQW
&
&
Figure 6-2 Definition of categories C1 to C4

SINAMICS DC MASTER units are nearly always used in the second environment
(Categories C3 and C4).
RFI suppression filters and line reactors are required whenever they are to be used in
Category C2.
SINAMICS DC MASTER units conform to the interference immunity requirements defined in
EN 61800-3 for the second environment, and thus also with the lower interference immunity
requirements in the first environment.

EN 55011
Some situations require compliance with EN 55011, which defines limit values for
interference emissions in industrial and residential environments. The values that are
measured are conducted interference at the line supply connection as interference voltage,
and electromagnetically radiated interference as radio interference, under standardized
conditions.
The standard defines limit values "A1" and "B1" which, for interference voltage, apply to the
150 kHz - 30 MHz range and, for radio interference, the 30 MHz - 2 GHz range. Since
SINAMICS DC MASTER converter units are used in industrial applications, they are subject
to the limit value "A1"; in order to achieve this value, the SINAMICS DC MASTER units must
be provided with external RFI suppression filters and line reactors.

SINAMICS DC MASTER: Industrial applications

Industrial applications demand that units demonstrate an extremely high level of interference
immunity, but by contrast place very low requirements on them in terms of interference
emission levels.
SINAMICS DC MASTER converter units are components of an electrical drive, such as
contactors and switches. Qualified personnel must install them into a drive system which, as
an absolute minimum, consists of the converter unit, motor cables, and motor. Line reactors
and fuses are also required in most cases. Therefore, whether or not a limit value is adhered
to is determined by the components being installed correctly. Limiting interference emission
levels in line with limit value "A1" requires not only the converter unit itself, but also the RFI
suppression filter allocated to it and the line reactor, at the very least; without an RFI
suppression filter, the interference emission level demonstrated by SINAMICS DC MASTER
converter units will exceed limit value "A1" as prescribed by EN 55011.
If the drive forms part of a system, it does not initially need to fulfill any interference emission
requirements, but the EMC Directive does require the system as a whole to be
electromagnetically compatible with its environment.
If all the control components in the system (such as PLCs) demonstrate a level of
interference immunity that is suitable for industrial applications, then it is not necessary for
every drive to adhere to limit value "A1".

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

56 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

Non-grounded networks
Non-grounded networks (IT systems) are used in some branches of industry in order to
increase the availability of the plant. In the event of a ground fault, no fault current flows and
the plant can continue with production. If RFI suppression filters are brought into the
equation, however, a fault current does flow in the event of a ground fault, which may cause
the drives to shut down or the RFI suppression filter to potentially be destroyed. For this
reason, the product standard does not define any limit values for these networks. From an
economical perspective, any necessary EMC conformance measures should be taken on the
grounded primary side of the supply transformer.

EMC planning
If two units are not electromagnetically compatible, you can reduce the interference emission
level of the source of interference or increase the interference immunity of the potentially
susceptible equipment. Sources of interference are generally power electronics units with
high power consumption; reducing their interference emission levels requires complex filters.
Potentially susceptible equipment usually refers to controlgear and sensors, including their
evaluation circuit. There is less work involved in increasing the interference immunity of
inefficient units, meaning that - economically speaking - increasing interference immunity is
generally a more favorable option for industrial applications than reducing the interference
emission level.
In industrial applications, EMC between units should be based on a carefully-balanced
combination of the interference emission and interference immunity levels.
The most cost-effective measure that can be put in place to achieve EMC conformance is to
physically separate sources of interference and potentially susceptible equipment - provided
that you have taken this option into account during the planning stage of your machine/plant.
In the first instance, it is necessary to determine whether each unit used is a potential source
of interference or potentially susceptible equipment. Within this context, converter units and
contactors, for example, can be counted as sources of interference, while examples of
potentially susceptible equipment are PLCs, encoders, and sensors.
The components in the control cabinet (sources of interference and potentially susceptible
equipment) must be physically separated, by means of partition plates if necessary, or by
installing them in metal enclosures.

6.1.2 EMC-compliant drive installation (installation instructions)

General information
Not only are drives operated in a wide variety of environments, but the electrical components
used (controllers, switch mode power supplies, and so on) can also differ widely with respect
to interference immunity and interference emission levels, meaning that all installation
guidelines of any kind can offer is a practical compromise. For this reason, EMC rules do not
need to be implemented to the letter in all cases, provided that measures are tested on a
case-by-case basis.
In order to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in your control cabinets in rugged
electrical environments and adhere to the standards required by the relevant legislating
body, the EMC rules listed below should be followed during the construction and design
stages.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 57
Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

Rules 1 to 10 apply on a general level. Rules 11 to 15 must be followed in order to fulfill

interference emission standards.

Rules for EMC-compliant installation

1 Connect all metallic parts of the control cabinet to one another over a flat area with
good conductivity (not paint against paint!). Use contact or scratch washers if
necessary. The cabinet door must be connected to the cabinet using the shortest
possible ground strips (at the top, center, and bottom).
2 Contactors, relays, solenoid valves, electromechanical operating hours counters, etc.,
in the cabinet and - where applicable - in neighboring cabinets - must be provided
with quenching combinations such as RC elements, varistors, and diodes. These
must be connected directly at the appropriate coil.
3 Whenever possible, guide signal cables 1) into the cabinet at one level only.
4 Unshielded cables in the same circuit (outgoing/incoming conductors) must be twisted
where possible, or the area between them minimized, to prevent unnecessary frame
antennae.
5 Connect spare wires to the cabinet ground 2) at both ends. This achieves an additional
shielding effect.
6 Avoid unnecessary cable lengths. in order to keep coupling capacities and
inductances low.
7 Crosstalk is generally reduced if the cables are laid close to the control cabinet
ground. Do not, therefore, route cables freely around the cabinet, but lay them as
close as possible to the cabinet enclosure/mounting plates. This also applies to spare
cables.
8 Signal and power cables must be physically separated (to prevent coupling paths).
Minimum clearance: You should aim for a minimum of 20 cm.
If it is not possible to physically separate the encoder and motor cables, the encoder
cable must be decoupled either using a partition or by laying it in a metal conduit. The
partition or metal conduit must be grounded at several points.
9 Ground the shields of digital signal cables at both ends (source and destination),
ensuring maximum contact area and good conductivity. In the event of poor
equipotential bonding between the shield connections, run an additional equalizing
conductor with a cross-section of at least 10 mm² parallel to the shield for the purpose
of reducing the shield current. Generally speaking, the shields may also be connected
to the cabinet enclosure (ground) 2) at several points, and connected at several points
outside the control cabinet.
Foil shields should be avoided as they are are at least 5 times less effective than
braided shields.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

58 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

10 Shields for analog signal cables may be connected to ground at both ends if
equipotential bonding is good (this must be done over a large area with good
conductivity). It can be assumed that equipotential bonding is good if all metal parts
are well interconnected and the electronics components are supplied from a single
source.
Connecting shields at one end prevents low-frequency, capacitive interference
injections (e.g. 50 Hz humming). In this case, the shield should be connected in the
control cabinet; a sheath wire may also be used for this purpose.
The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor (X177:53 to 55) must be shielded
and connected to ground at both ends.
11 Ensure that the RFI suppression filter is always located close to the suspected source
of interference. The filter must be attached to the cabinet enclosure, mounting plate,
etc., over a flat area. Incoming and outgoing cables must be physically separated.
12 RFI suppression filters must be used in order to conform to limit value class A1.
Additional loads must be connected upstream of the filter (on the line side).
The controller used and the manner in which the rest of the control cabinet is wired
will determine whether an additional line filter needs to be installed.
13 A line reactor must be included in the field circuit for controlled field power supplies.
14 A line reactor must be included in the armature circuit of the converter.
15 The motor cables do not have to be shielded. There must be a clearance of at least
20 cm between the power supply and the motor cables (field, armature). Use a
partition if necessary.
Footnotes
1) Signal cables are defined as:
Digital signal cables: e.g. cables for incremental encoders
Analog signal cables: e.g. ±10 V setpoint cable
Serial interfaces: e.g. PROFIBUS DP
2) Generally speaking, "ground" refers to all metallic conductive parts that can be
connected to a protective conductor, such as the cabinet enclosure, motor enclosure,
or foundation ground.

Cabinet configuration and shielding

'RQRWXVHVKLHOGLQJEXVDVFDEOH
&DEOHFKDQQHO
JULS
!&DEOHSURSSLQJEDU

&RQQHFWWRFDELQHWHQFORVXUH
DWERWKHQGVHQVXULQJJRRG 6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRIROORZLQJ
FRQGXFWLYLW\DQGPD[LPXP YHUVLRQVDQG
FRQWDFWDUHD

3URYLGHOLQHVLGHVKLHOGLQJHJRQWKHLQFUHPHQWDOHQFRGHUDVZHOO &DEOHSURSSLQJEDU

Figure 6-3 Shielding at control cabinet inlet

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 59
Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

'DWDFDEOH 'DWDFDEOH $QDORJ

HJ352),%86'3 HJLQFUHPHQWDOHQFRGHU VLJQDOFDEOH

7HUPLQDOV

&RQQHFWWRFDELQHWHQFORVXUHDWERWKHQGV
HQVXULQJJRRGFRQGXFWLYLW\DQGPD[LPXP
3URYLGHOLQHVLGHVKLHOGLQJHJRQWKHLQFUHPHQWDOHQFRGHUDVZHOO FRQWDFWDUHD

Figure 6-4 Shielding in control cabinet

Connecting shields on the SINAMICS DC MASTER

Figure 6-5 Connecting shields

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

60 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

6HSDUDWHXQILOWHUHGDQG
ILOWHUHGOLQH

/ / /
/ / /
1(7=/,1( /$67/2$'
0DLQVFRQQHFWLRQ (OHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\DQG
PDLQVFRQQHFWLRQH[FLWHUFLUFXLW

&RQQHFWWKHSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU &RQQHFWRYHUZLGHDUHDZLWKWKHFDELQHWKRXVLQJ

Figure 6-6 RFI suppression filter

Shield connection

   

① Connecting terminal on copper bar, max. cable diameter 15 mm

Notice! Risk of pinching cable if screws tightened too much
② Bus-mounting terminal on copper bar, max. cable diameter 10 mm
Notice! Risk of pinching cable if screws tightened too much
③ Ferrous tube or cable tie on bare ferrous comb-type/toothed bar
④ Clamp with ferrous backing plate on cable support rail
Figure 6-7 Shield connection

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 61
Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

6.1.3 Arranging components for converter units

Arranging components for converter units

9 /LQHYROWDJH

 

'&9

 


;39 8 : 8 9 :

)LHOG $UPDWXUH
6,1$0,&6'&0
&RQWURO0RGXOH
& ' & '

① The line reactor in the field circuit is dimensioned for the rated current of the motor field.
② The line reactor in the armature circuit is dimensioned for the rated motor current in the
armature. The line current equals 0.82 times the DC current.
③ The RFI suppression filter for the armature circuit is dimensioned for the rated motor current in
the armature. The line current equals 0.82 times the DC current.
④ The RFI suppression filter for the field circuit is dimensioned for the motor field's rated current.
Figure 6-8 Arrangement of reactors and RFI suppression filters

CAUTION
When RFI suppression filters are being used, line reactors must always be used at the unit
input to decouple the TSE circuit.
The components must be wired in the following order:
Supply – RFI suppression filter – line reactor – power unit.
Arranging them in the wrong order could result in blown fuses.

Catalog LV60 is used for selecting line reactors.

6.1.4 Information on line-side harmonics produced by converter units in a fully-controlled

two-pulse bridge circuit configuration (B6C and (B6)A(B6)C)
The majority of converter units for medium-power applications have a fully-controlled two-
pulse bridge circuit configuration. Below is an example of the harmonics that can be found in
a typical system configuration for two firing angles (α = 20° and α = 60°).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

62 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

The values have been taken from a previous publication, "Oberschwingungen im

netzseitigen Strom sechspulsiger netzgeführter Stromrichter (Harmonics in the Line-Side
Current of Six-Pulse, Line-Commutated Converters)" by H. Arremann and G. Möltgen,
Siemens Research and Development Division, Volume 7 (1978) No. 2, Springer-Verlag
1978.
In addition, the example specifies formulae which, depending on the actual operating data in
use [line voltage (no-load voltage Uv0), line frequency fN, and DC current Id], can be used to
calculate the short-circuit power SK and armature inductance La for the motor to which the
specified harmonics spectrum applies. If the actual line short-circuit power and/or actual
armature inductance deviate from the values calculated in this way, then they will need to be
calculated on a case-by-case basis.
The harmonics spectrum listed below is produced if the values for the short-circuit power SK
at the unit terminal and the armature inductance La of the motor, calculated using the
formulae below, match the actual values found in the system. If the values do not match, a
separate calculation procedure will need to be carried out for the harmonics.

a) α = 20° b) α = 60°
Fundamental factor g = 0.962 Fundamental factor g = 0.953
ν Iν/I1 ν Iν/I1 ν Iν/I1 ν Iν/I1
5 0.235 29 0.018 5 0.283 29 0.026
7 0.100 31 0.016 7 0.050 31 0.019
11 0.083 35 0.011 11 0.089 35 0.020
13 0.056 37 0.010 13 0.038 37 0.016
17 0.046 41 0.006 17 0.050 41 0.016
19 0.035 43 0.006 19 0.029 43 0.013
23 0.028 47 0.003 23 0.034 47 0.013
25 0.024 49 0.003 25 0.023 49 0.011
The fundamental component of current I1 as a reference variable is calculated using the
following formula:
I1 = g × 0.817 × Id
where Id is the DC current of the operating point under investigation
and where g is the fundamental factor (see above)
The harmonics currents calculated on the basis of the tables above only apply to

I.) Short-circuit power SK at the converter unit terminal

SK = U2v0/XN (VA)
where
XN = XK - XD = 0.03526 × Uv0 / Id - 2πfN × LD (Ω)
and
Uv0 is the no-load voltage at the converter unit terminal in V,
Id is the DC current of the operating point under investigation in A,
fN is the line frequency in Hz,
LD is the inductance of the line reactor used in H,
XD is the line reactor impedance,
XN is the network impedance, and
XK is the impedance at the unit terminals

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 63
Connecting
6.1 Instructions for EMC-compliant drive installation

II.) Armature inductance La

La = 0.0488 × Uv0 / (fN × Id) (H)
If the actual values for the short-circuit power SK and/or armature inductance La deviate from
the values calculated using the formulae above, a separate calculation procedure will need
to be carried out.

Example:
Let us take a drive with the following data:
Uv0 = 400 V
Id = 150 A
fN = 50 Hz
LD = 0.169 mH (4EU2421-7AA10 with ILn = 125 A)
Where
XN = 0.03536 × 400 / 150 - 2π × 50 × 0.169 × 10-3 = 0.0412 Ω,
the network short-circuit power at the converter unit terminal is as follows:
SK = 4002 / 0.0412 = 3.88 MVA
and the armature inductance of the motor is as follows:
La = 0.0488 × 400 / (50 × 150) = 2.60 mH
The harmonic currents Iν (where I1 = g × 0.817 × Id for firing angles α = 20° and α = 60°) that
can be taken from the tables only apply for the values SK and La calculated using this
method. If the actual values deviate from these, a separate calculation procedure will need to
be carried out.
For the purpose of dimensioning filters and compensation equipment with reactors, it is only
possible to draw on the information provided by the harmonics values calculated in this way
if the values calculated for SK and La match the actual drive values. In all other cases, a
separate calculation procedure needs to be carried out (this particularly applies when using
machines with compensation, as they demonstrate a very low armature inductance level).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

64 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.2 Block diagram with connection suggestion

6.2 Block diagram with connection suggestion

;
 8

FRQQHFWRUERDUG&$
&RQWURO8QLW&$DQG
 
$QDORJLQSXWV

$OORFDWLRQERDUG
8

&$
 
 8
 
 8
 

 3B6P$PD[
'LJLWDOLQSXWV

 0


! 

7R

3RZHU,QWHUIDFH
LQSXWVRXWSXWV


'LJLWDO



 &RPSDFW)ODVK
&DUG
3 %23

RSHUDWRUSDQHO
'LJLWDORXWSXWV

;


!
 2SWLRQPRGXOHLQWHUIDFH
20,VORW಻

 3 ; 3DUDOOHO
 0GLJLWDO FRQQHFWLRQ
 LQWHUIDFH[
8
 9,  ;
$QDORJLQSXWV

 ; $23RSHUDWRUSDQHO
8
352),%86 RSWLRQ
 9, 
 8 ;
  ! '5,9(&/L4

 3sP$ ;
 ! '5,9(&/L4
1sP$
0DLQVHWSRLQW

 0DQDORJ
;
56 %$
 0GLJLWDO RU 866
6HULDOSHHUWR

 LQWHUIDFH
LQWHUIDFH

 56 ;
SHHU

7; RU 866
7;  LQWHUIDFH
5; 
 %$ ' 
5; $  $QDORJRXWSXWV
 3 ' 
6XSSO\ $ 
 P$PD[
,QFUHPHQWDO

0 0DQDORJ

HQFRGHU

7UDFN 

 6HQVH 0RWRU
7UDFN 
 WHPSHUDWXUH
P$ 
 
=HURPDUN  0DQDORJ
;
%$ (OHFWURQLFDOO\VZLWFKDEOHEXVWHUPLQDWRU
! .O; 2)) !7RQG&8' 9, (OHFWURQLFDOO\VZLWFKDEOHYROWDJHFXUUHQWLQSXW
.O; (QDEOH RSWLRQ !2QO\RQ$GYDQFHG&8'&$/

Figure 6-9 Open-loop/closed-loop control section block diagram

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 65
Connecting
6.2 Block diagram with connection suggestion

 (6723 '&9 $&+]9

;6
;7





00 

9
;0 ;39

0
(63


 .
$QDORJ
WDFKRPHWHU ;5

(6723

3RZHU21
0 1 3  .
(OHFWUSRZHUVXSSO\
)DQ21 ;/

)XVH2. 7RIXVHPRQLWRULQJ
HTXLSPHQW
;$;%
$UPDWXUHOLQHYROWDJH 7RYROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW
$UPDWXUHYROWDJH HTXLSPHQW
;

$UPDWXUHILULQJSXOVHV ;$ 7R
ILULQJSXOVH
WUDQVIRUPHUV
;$
;B,B,67
([WHUQDODFWXDO
FXUUHQWYDOXH
;%
&8'DQDORJLQSXW
;%
0 ;%
$UPDWXUHFXUUHQW ;% UGFXUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHU

;%
;%
;%
/RDGV ;% &XUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHU
D
7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU
E
)DQPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW
 F
7HPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW ;7 

7HPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW ;7 
;

7R
DOORFDWLRQ 
)DQ2.
ERDUG&8' 

([WHUQDOIDXOW ([WHUQDO
 IDXOW
;/
)LHOGOLQHYROWDJH
)LHOGILULQJSXOVHV
7RILHOGVXSSO\
$FWXDOILHOGFXUUHQWYDOXH

;)
3RZHULQWHUIDFH&$

Figure 6-10 Block diagram for power interface

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

66 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.2 Block diagram with connection suggestion

$&+]9

$&+]
9

N

8 : N

:

:
8
9

8
9
)XVHV
9 9 9 9 9
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
7R      
SRZHU      
LQWHUIDFH      
;% ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 

)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW&$

$UPDWXUH
OLQHYROWDJH 9 9 9 9 9 9
98 a
a ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 8
; ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 9
9: a
a ;: ;: ;: ;: ;: ;: :
7R
;& ;& ;& ;& ;& ;& &
SRZHU ([WHUQDO
;' ;' ;' ;' ;' ;' '
LQWHUIDFH $UPDWXUH ! SRZHUXQLW
YROWDJH 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWHTXLSPHQW
&$
ˡ 0
a
&$ &$
;B:
;B8
;,03B ;,03 ;B9 )DQ
7R ;B& PRQLWRULQJ
SRZHU HTXLSPHQW
LQWHUIDFH
;$
;
;
;$ ;,03B
7R
SRZHU
7R D
LQWHUIDFH ;,03 ;B'
;3$5 ;3$5 SRZHU
LQWHU E
IDFH
F
! 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWVIURPPRGXOH&$ILULQJSXOVH
WUDQVIRUPHUVRUGLUHFWIURPWKHSRZHUXQLW
& '
' &

)LHOGILULQJSXOVHV
0
$QDORJ
7R  8 )LHOGOLQHYROWDJH WDFKRPHWHU 7HUPLQDOV
SRZHU *
LQWHUIDFH  ;7
&
 6KXQW 
8 $FWXDOILHOGFXUUHQWYDOXH ' ,QFUHPHQWDO
 HQFRGHU
&$ )LHOGPRGXOH 7HUPLQDOV
 ;WR

Figure 6-11 Block diagram for fuse monitoring/voltage measurement equipment, firing pulse transformers, power unit

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 67
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the external power unit

6.3 Connecting the external power unit

The following 5 figures show all the required connections to the power unit.
● Figure: "Connection of a 4-quadrant power unit (1)":
– 4-quadrant drive (parameters assigned for a 4-quadrant drive as delivered - p51825 =
4)
– Line voltage and armature voltage measured via Faston terminals on the firing pulse
transformer module (as delivered)
● Figure: "Connection of a 4-quadrant power unit (2)":
– 4-quadrant drive (parameters assigned for a 4-quadrant drive as delivered - p51825 =
4)
– Line voltage and armature voltage measured via additional cables to be fed directly
from the power unit
● Figure: "Connection of a 2-quadrant power unit (1)":
– 2-quadrant drive (parameter assignment: parameter p51825 = 2)
– Line voltage and armature voltage measured via Faston terminals on the firing pulse
transformer module (as delivered). The armature current can only be measured if a
connection is made to 1D1 on the power unit.
● Figure: "Connection of a 2-quadrant power unit (2)":
– 2-quadrant drive (parameter assignment: parameter p51825 = 2)
– Line voltage and armature voltage measured via additional cables to be fed directly
from the power unit
● Figure: "Connections to the power interface":
– Connection of fan contactor, fan monitoring equipment, temperature sensors on the
heat sink, external monitoring equipment

WARNING
If additional cables are being fed from the voltage measurement equipment to the power
unit for the purpose of measuring the line voltage and armature voltage, the existing Spec
44 cables (white) which are no longer required must be completely removed.

Please refer to the next section for options on how to position the two plates and how the
unit can be divided.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

68 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.3 Connecting the external power unit

WARNING
The following electrical connections between the power unit (line voltage) and the
electronics must have short-circuit protection:
• Secondary sides of the firing pulse transformers
• Voltage measurement equipment
• Fuse monitoring equipment
Short-circuit protection measures must be implemented when laying these cables (which
carry a line voltage). The rms currents in the cables referred to are lower than 0.5 A.
• Method 1:
Short-circuit proof cables which burn from the inside when overloaded without bursting
their insulation
• Method 2:
Cables protected as close to the power unit as possible with fuses. Fuses must have the
required cut-off capacity!

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 69
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the external power unit

)LULQJSXOVHRXWSXWV&$
* *
'
. +.
;
* *

+.

+.

+.

+.

+.

+.
*

*

*

*

*

*
. +.
; :
;
* *
. +.
;
* * 9 9 9 9 9 9
. +. 9 9 9 Current transformer
; 8 ! ! 7
; / . 8
* *
. +. O N
; & 9
; / .
* * :
. +. ! ! ! O N
; 9 9 9 9 7
;
* 9 9 9 9 9 9
*
. +.
;
* *

+.

+.

+.
+.

+.

+.
+.

*

*

*
.

*

*

*
;
* *
. +.
; &
* *
. +. O O N N
;
* * To the power interface
. +.
; ' ,WLVDEVROXWHO\HVVHQWLDOWKDWWKH
;
* * DUUDQJHPHQW
. +. RI./WRNO
;
DQG./WRNO
9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWHTXLSPHQW&$ VKRZQKHUHLVREVHUYHGDVIDUDV
9 9 9 9 9 9 WKHOLQHVXSSO\LVFRQFHUQHGWR
;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 8 HQVXUHDFWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXHVDUH
PHDVXUHGFRUUHFWO\
;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 9

;: ;: ;: ;: ;: ;: :

;& ;& ;& ;& ;& ;& &

'
;' ;' ;' ;' ;' ;' '
&

9 9 9 9 9

;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH ! 7RRWKHUIXVHPRQLWRULQJLQSXWV
DQ\RUGHU
)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW&$

Figure 6-12 Connection of a 4-quadrant power unit (1)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

70 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.3 Connecting the external power unit

)LULQJSXOVHRXWSXWV&$
* * '
'
. +.
;
* *

+.

+.

+.

+.

+.

+.
*

*

*

*

*

*
. +.
;
;
* *
. +.
;
* * 9 9 9 9 9 9
. +. 9 9 9 Current transformer
; ! ! 7
; 8 / . 8
* *
. +. 9 O N
; 9
; : / .
* * :
. +. ! ! ! O N
; 9 9 9 7
;
* 9 9 9 9 9 9
*
. +.
;
* *

+.

+.

+.
+.

+.

+.
+.

*

*

*
.

*

*

*
;
* *
. +.
; &
&
* *
. +. O O N N
;
* * To the power interface
. +.
; ,WLVDEVROXWHO\HVVHQWLDOWKDWWKH
;
* * DUUDQJHPHQW
. +. RI./WRNO
;
DQG./WRNO
9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWHTXLSPHQW&$ VKRZQKHUHLVREVHUYHGDVIDUDV
9 9 9 9 9 9 WKHOLQHVXSSO\LVFRQFHUQHGWR
;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 8 HQVXUHDFWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXHVDUH
PHDVXUHGFRUUHFWO\
;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 9

;: ;: ;: ;: ;: ;: :

;& ;& ;& ;& ;& ;& &

'
;' ;' ;' ;' ;' ;' '
&

9 9 9 9 9

;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH ! 7RRWKHUIXVHPRQLWRULQJLQSXWV
DQ\RUGHU
)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW&$

Figure 6-13 Connection of a 4-quadrant power unit (2)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 71
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the external power unit

)LULQJSXOVHRXWSXWV&$
* * '
'
. +.
;
* *

+.
+.

+.
*

*

*
. +.
; :
;
* *
. +.
; 9 9 9
* *
. +. 9 9 9 Current transformer
; 8 ! ! 7
; / . 8
* *
. +. O N
; & 9
; / .
* * :
. +. ! ! ! O N
; 9 9 9 9 7
;
* 9 9 9
.
;
*

+.

+.

+.
.

*

*

*
;
*
.
; &
*
. O O N N
;
* To the power interface
.
; ,WLVDEVROXWHO\HVVHQWLDOWKDWWKH
; '
* DUUDQJHPHQW
. RI./WRNO
;
DQG./WRNO
9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWHTXLSPHQW&$ VKRZQKHUHLVREVHUYHGDVIDUDV
9 9 9 9 9 9 WKHOLQHVXSSO\LVFRQFHUQHGWR
;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 8 HQVXUHDFWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXHVDUH
PHDVXUHGFRUUHFWO\
;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 9

;: ;: ;: ;: ;: ;: :

;& ;& ;& ;& ;& ;& &

'
;' ;' ;' ;' ;' ;' '
&

9 9 9 9 9

;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH ! 7RRWKHUIXVHPRQLWRULQJLQSXWV
DQ\RUGHU
)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW&$

Figure 6-14 Connection of a 2-quadrant power unit (1)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

72 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.3 Connecting the external power unit

)LULQJSXOVHRXWSXWV&$
* * '
'
. +.
;
* *

+.
+.

+.
*

*

*
. +.
;
;
* *
. +.
; 9 9 9
* *
. +. 9 9 9 &XUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHU
; ! ! 7
; 8 / . 8
* *
. +. 9 O N
; 9
; : / .
* * :
. +. ! ! ! O N
; 9 9 9 7
;
* 9 9 9
.
;
*

+.

+.

+.
.

*

*

*
;
*
.
; &
&
*
. O O N N
;
* 7RWKHSRZHULQWHUIDFH
.
; ,WLVDEVROXWHO\HVVHQWLDOWKDWWKH
;
* DUUDQJHPHQW
. RI./WRNO
;
DQG./WRNO
9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWHTXLSPHQW&$ VKRZQKHUHLVREVHUYHGDVIDUDV
9 9 9 9 9 9 WKHOLQHVXSSO\LVFRQFHUQHGWR
;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 ;8 8 HQVXUHDFWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXHVDUH
PHDVXUHGFRUUHFWO\
;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 ;9 9

;: ;: ;: ;: ;: ;: :

;& ;& ;& ;& ;& ;& &

'
;' ;' ;' ;' ;' ;' '
&

9 9 9 9 9

;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B 
)XVH ! 7RRWKHUIXVHPRQLWRULQJLQSXWV
DQ\RUGHU
)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW&$

Figure 6-15 Connection of a 2-quadrant power unit (2)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 73
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the external power unit

3RZHULQWHUIDFH&$
,WLVDEVROXWHO\HVVHQWLDOWKDWWKHFRUUHFWDUUDQJHPHQWRI
;% N FRQQHFWLRQVNOODQGNWRWKHFXUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHUVLV
;% O REVHUYHGWRHQVXUHDFWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXHVDUHPHDVXUHG
$FWXDOYDOXH
$UPDWXUH ;% O FRUUHFWO\
7HPSHUDWXUHDWWKH FXUUHQW ;% N
U
SRZHUXQLW
VKHDWVLQN ;7
;7 17&N˖RU
) N˖DWr&
8 9 : FDQEHDGMXVWHGYLD
)DXOWLIWHPSHUDWXUH!WKUHVKROGS
˽ S

)DQ21
IURPWKHLQWHUQDOVHTXHQFHFRQWURO .

;/B

 0
9 a ,QVXODWHGWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU
S 'HYLFHIDQ RUKHDWVLQNJURXQGHG
)DQQRW2. ;/B


U 
 
)   )DQPRQLWRULQJ
$  
U 6

U
S
;/B

 
)  
([WIDXOW   ([WHUQDOIDXOW
WULJJHUHG  
U 6
U
;0

Figure 6-16 Connections to the power interface

WARNING
It is important to ensure there is adequate insulation for "safe electrical separation" when
using a temperature sensor on a heat sink connected to the line voltage.
The temperature sensor input has an exposed electronic potential and must be isolated
from the line voltage by using "double or enforced insulation". Failure to do so may allow a
disruptive charge on the temperature sensor's thin cable and could prove fatal or result in a
fire.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

74 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.4 Division options

6.4 Division options

The SINAMICS DCM Control Module consists of 2 plates.
Modules in the front plate:
● Power interface (C98043-A7109)
● Control Unit (CUD)
● BOP20 Operator Panel
● Second CUD (optional)
● Communication Board(s) CBE20 (optional)
Modules in the rear plate:
● Fuse monitoring equipment (C98043-A7118)
● Voltage measurement equipment (C98043-A7117)
● Firing pulse transformer module (C98043-A7043)
The two plates can be mounted at a distance from each other in the system, if required.
The firing pulse transformer module can be physically divided. This means parts of it can be
mounted outside the unit itself in the area around the power unit.

A few examples are given below:

Note
The SINAMICS DCM Control Module is supplied with front and rear plates mounted one on
top of the other. The correct cables (connectors X21A, X22A, XS20, XS21, and X102) for
this mounting type are already in place.
Refer to Chapter 2 for cable ordering information if plates are being mounted in accordance
with the examples below.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 75
Connecting
6.4 Division options

Example 1: Rear plate and front plate mounted one on top of the other or at a distance from each
other, module C98043-A7043 not divided

)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW
&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW
HTXLSPHQW )LULQJSXOVHV

)LULQJSXOVHWUDQVIRUPHUV
&$
)LHOG
; ; VXSSO\$ ([WHUQDO
&$ SRZHUXQLW
;,03B ;,03 ;,03 ;,03B
3RZHULQWHUIDFH ;)
; ;
&$
;,03B ;,03 ;,03 ;,03B
&8' ;7 ;6 ;5;/ ;/ ;7 ;3 ; ;

;8

;'
.
.
DOORFDWLRQ

;6B
;6B
.
.
.
.
.
.
;% ;,03B ;,03 ;,03 ;,03B ;%
ERDUG ; ; ; +HDWVLQN
;
WHPSHUDWXUH

PHDVXUHPHT
;3$5 ;,03 ;,03 ;3$5

&$
; &XUUHQW &XUUHQW
; ; )XVH

9ROWDJH
WUDQVIRU WUDQVIRU
;% ;,03 ;,03 PRQLWRULQJ PHU PHU
;B,B,67
;$ ; ; HTXLSPHQW
;$ ;$ ;$
;) ; &$
;0 ;,03 ;,03

&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P  &DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P

# ...short-circuit proof cable installation

Figure 6-17 Division options - Example 1

Table 6- 1 Cable

Connection Cable Length Notes

(Connectors/Terminals) max.

X21A (torque direction 1) Ribbon cable, 26-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.

X22A (torque direction 2) Ribbon cable, 26-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
X23B (fuse monitoring equipment) Ribbon cable, 10-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
X45 (voltage measurement CAT5 cable, 8-pin 15 m -
equipment)
XF1 (field) Ribbon cable, 20-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
Current transformer (XB1) Single wires (stranded wires), 10 m Shield if >2 m.
twisted-pair
Heat sink temperature (XT5, XT6) Single wires (stranded wires), twisted 10 m Shield if >1 m.
Firing pulses Single wires (short-circuit proof 3m Do not shield!
(X11 to X16, X21 to X26) cables), twisted-pair
Fuse monitoring equipment Single wires (short-circuit proof 10 m -
(XS1_1 to XS1_12, etc.) cables), installed in pairs (for each
fuse being monitored)
Voltage measurement equipment Single wires (short-circuit proof 3m Please also refer to the
(XU1, XV1, XW1, XC1, XD1, etc.) cables), section titled "Connecting the
U-V-W twisted, C-D twisted external power unit".

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

76 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.4 Division options

Example 2: Rear plate and front plate mounted one on top of the other or at a distance from each
other, module C98043-A7043 divided, firing pulse transformers mounted on the power unit
See Chapter 5 for details of mechanical modifications.

)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW
&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW
HTXLSPHQW
)LULQJSXOVHV
)LULQJSXOVHWUDQVIRUPHUV
&$
)LHOG
VXSSO\$ ; ; ([WHUQDO
&$ SRZHUXQLW
;,03B ;,03B ;,03 ;,03
3RZHULQWHUIDFH ;)
; ;
&$
;,03B ;,03B ;,03 ;,03
&8' ;7 ;6 ;5;/ ;/ ;7 ;3 ; ;

;8

;'
.
.
DOORFDWLRQ

;6B
;6B
.
.
.
.
.
.
;% ;,03B ;,03B ;% ;,03 ;,03
ERDUG ; ; ; +HDWVLQN
;
WHPSHUDWXUH

PHDVXUHPHT
;3$5 ;,03 ;,03

&$
; ;3$5 &XUUHQW
&XUUHQW
)XVH ; ;

9ROWDJH
WUDQVIRU WUDQVIRU
;B,B,67 ;% PRQLWRULQJ ;,03 ;,03 PHU PHU
;$ HTXLSPHQW ; ;
;$ ;$ ;$ &$
;) ;
;0 ;,03 ;,03

&DEOHVHHWDEOH )LULQJSXOVH
WUDQVIRUPHUV
&$

&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P  &DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P

# ...short-circuit proof cable installation

Figure 6-18 Division options - Example 2

Table 6- 2 Cable

Connection Cable Length Notes

(Connectors/Terminals) max.
X21A (torque direction 1) Ribbon cable, 26-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
X22A (torque direction 2) Ribbon cable, 26-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
X23B (fuse monitoring equipment) Ribbon cable, 10-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
X45 (voltage measurement CAT5 cable, 8-pin 15 m -
equipment)
XF1 (field) Ribbon cable, 20-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
Current transformer (XB1) Single wires (stranded wires), 10 m Shield if >2 m.
twisted-pair
Heat sink temperature (XT5, XT6) Single wires (stranded wires), twisted 10 m Shield if >1 m.
Firing pulse transformer control 2 x LiyCY 8 x 2 x 0.5 (or 1) mm2 10 m Both ends of the shield have
(XIMP_1 - XIMP11 to 16) to be connected.
(XIMP_6 - XIMP21 to 26) Or
Single wires (stranded wires), 3m Shield if >1 m.
twisted-pair

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 77
Connecting
6.4 Division options

Connection Cable Length Notes

(Connectors/Terminals) max.
Firing pulses Single wires (short-circuit proof 3m Do not shield!
(X11 to X16, X21 to X26) cables), twisted-pair
Fuse monitoring equipment Single wires (short-circuit proof 10 m -
(XS1_1 to XS1_12, etc.) cables), installed in pairs (for each
fuse being monitored)
Voltage measurement equipment Single wires (short-circuit proof 3m Please also refer to the
(XU1, XV1, XW1, XC1, XD1, etc.) cables), section titled "Connecting the
U-V-W twisted, C-D twisted external power unit".

Example 3: Rear plate and front plate mounted one on top of the other or at a distance from each
other, module C98043-A7043 divided, firing pulse transformers/voltage measurement equipment/fuse
monitoring equipment mounted on the power unit, field supply remains in the plate
See Chapter 5 for details of mechanical modifications.

)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW
&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWHTXLSPHQW
)LULQJSXOVHWUDQVIRUPHUV )LULQJSXOVHV
&$ F
; ; ([WHUQDO
F
;,03B ;,03B ;,03 ;,03 SRZHUXQLW
;8

;'
.
.

3RZHULQWHUIDFH
;6B
;6B
.
.
.
.
.
.

&$ ;% ; ;

;
;,03B ;,03B ;,03 ;,03
PHDVXUHPHT

F
&$

&8' ;7 ;6 ;5;/ ;/ ;7 ;3 ; ;

)XVH
9ROWDJH

DOORFDWLRQ ;% ;,03B ;,03 ;,03

;,03B
ERDUG PRQLWRULQJ
F

; ; ; +HDWVLQN

HTXLSPHQW
WHPSHUDWXUH
; ;3$5 ;3$5 &$ ;,03 ;,03
; ; &XUUHQW &XUUHQW
F WUDQVIRU WUDQVIRU
;B,B,67 ;% ;,03 ;,03 PHU PHU
;$ ; ;
;$ ;$ ;$
;) ;
;0 ;,03 ;,03

&DEOHVHHWDEOH )LULQJSXOVH
WUDQVIRUPHUV
&$

)LHOG
&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P
VXSSO\$
&$
;)

# ...short-circuit proof cable installation

Figure 6-19 Division options - Example 3

Table 6- 3 Cable

Connection Cable Length Notes

(Connectors/Terminals) max.
X21A (torque direction 1) Ribbon cable, 26-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
X22A (torque direction 2) Ribbon cable, 26-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
X23B (fuse monitoring equipment) Ribbon cable, 10-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

78 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.4 Division options

Connection Cable Length Notes

(Connectors/Terminals) max.
X45 (voltage measurement CAT5 cable, 8-pin 15 m -
equipment)
XF1 (field) Ribbon cable, 20-pin 10 m Shield if >1 m.
Current transformer (XB1) Single wires (stranded wires), 10 m Shield if >2 m.
twisted-pair
Heat sink temperature (XT5, XT6) Single wires (stranded wires), twisted 10 m Shield if >1 m.
Firing pulse transformer control 2 x LiyCY 8 x 2 x 0.5 (or 1) mm2 10 m Both ends of the shield have
(XIMP_1 - XIMP11 to 16) to be connected.
(XIMP_6 - XIMP21 to 26) Or
Single wires (stranded wires), 3m Shield if >1 m.
twisted-pair
Firing pulses Single wires (short-circuit proof 3m Do not shield!
(X11 to X16, X21 to X26) cables), twisted-pair
Fuse monitoring equipment Single wires (short-circuit proof 10 m -
(XS1_1 to XS1_12, etc.) cables), installed in pairs (for each
fuse being monitored)
Voltage measurement equipment Single wires (short-circuit proof 3m Please also refer to the
(XU1, XV1, XW1, XC1, XD1, etc.) cables), section titled "Connecting the
U-V-W twisted, C-D twisted external power unit".

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 79
Connecting
6.4 Division options

Example 4: Parallel connection of power units with a shared set of control electronics

&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P )XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW
)LULQJSXOVHV

; ; ([WHUQDO

;,03 ;,03 SRZHUXQLW

;6B
;6B
.
.
.
.
.
.
;% ; ;
;,03 ;,03
; ;
)XVH
;,03 ;,03
PRQLWRULQJ
; ; +HDWVLQN
HTXLSPHQW WHPSHUDWXUH
&$ ;,03 ;,03
; ;

;,03 ;,03
; ;
;,03 ;,03

)LULQJSXOVH
WUDQVIRUPHUV
&$

)XVHPRQLWRULQJHTXLSPHQW
&DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW
)LULQJSXOVHWUDQVIRUPHUV HTXLSPHQW
)LULQJSXOVHV
&$

; ; ([WHUQDO

;,03B ;,03B ;,03 ;,03 SRZHUXQLW
;8

;'
.
.

3RZHULQWHUIDFH
;6B
;6B
.
.
.
.
.
.

;% ; ;

&$ ;
;,03B ;,03B ;,03 ;,03
PHDVXUHPHT

;7
&$

&8' ; ;

;7 ;6 ;5;/ ;/ ;7 ;3
)XVH
9ROWDJH

DOORFDWLRQ ;% ;,03B ;,03 ;,03

;,03B
ERDUG PRQLWRULQJ
; ; ; +HDWVLQN
HTXLSPHQW WHPSHUDWXUH
; ;3$5 ;3$5 &$ ;,03 ;,03
&XUUHQW &XUUHQW
; ;
WUDQVIRU WUDQVIRU
;B,B,67 ;$ ;,03 ;,03 PHU PHU
;$ ; ;
;$ ;$ ;$
;) ;
;0 ;,03 ;,03

)LULQJSXOVH
WUDQVIRUPHUV
&$

)LHOG &DEOHOHQJWKVPD[P
VXSSO\$
&$
;)
;$ &$
)XVHPRQLWRULQJGLVWULEXWRU
;&
;'
;%

;(
;)

# ...short-circuit proof cable installation

Figure 6-20 Division options - Example 4

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

80 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.4 Division options

Notes:
● Cables:
The corresponding information in Examples 1 to 3 of this section applies to the cable
types and permissible cable lengths.
● Please refer to the section titled "Connecting the firing pulse transformers" for information
on parallel connection.
● Please refer to the section titled "Connecting fuse monitoring equipment" for information
on fuse monitoring equipment.
● Please also note the information contained in the section titled "Parallel connection of
power units".

Example 5: Controlling a SITOR thyristor set 6QG12

Most of the information on cables, cable lengths, and module division provided in Example 3
also applies here.
The firing pulse transformer module C98043-A7043 is completely divided up. The small
individual boards containing the firing pulse transformers can be connected to the power unit
instead of the old-style small firing pulse transformer boards. The fuse monitoring and
voltage measurement equipment is mounted in the immediate vicinity of the SITOR set.

Connecting current transformers

① Current transformers

② Remove the connection between

the current transformers and
module A7 and connect the
current transformer cables directly
to the current transformers' screw
terminals.

Rear view

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 81
Connecting
6.4 Division options

Circuit (B6)A(B6)C (4-quadrant drive)

6,725WK\ULVWRUVHW4*
LQFLUFXLW%&

89: /LQHYROWDJH

)XVHV

3RZHULQWHUIDFH
&$ ) ) )
) ) )
! ! ! ! ! !
&8' ;7;6;5;/;/ ;7 ;3
DOORFDWLRQ $ $ $ $ $ $
ERDUG ;% ! ! ! ! ! !
;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03
; ;
! ! ! ! ! !

;6%
;B,B,67
;$ ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03
;) ;$ ;
;0
; ; !

)LHOGVXSSO\
;$ ;$ ;3$5
$ ;3$5 ;,03B ;,03B ;,03B
;,03B ;,03B ;,03B
&$

)LULQJSXOVHWUDQVIRUPHUV &$ !$UPDWXUHYROWDJH

;)

;6B 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW ;8

)XVH ;9

;
 HTXLSPHQW ;:
PRQLWRULQJ  &$ ;&
&DEOHOHQJWKV ;'
;%

HTXLSPHQW 
PPD[
&$


;6B

+HDWVLQNWHPSHUDWXUH
&XUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHU

# Short-circuit proof cable installation

<1> Firing pulse transformers C98043-A7043 inserted into the plastic holders available (following the order of the
terminal names shown in the figure).
Cables routed to the firing pulse transformers run from terminal strips XIMP_1 and XIMP_6 to XIMP11 (IMP11,
P24) - XIMP26 (IMP26, P24).
Firing cables X11 (K, G) to X26 (K, G) routed to the thyristors not shown
(X11 to X16 each routed to thyristor V01 in the thyristor double block, X21 to X26 routed to thyristor V02)
<2> Connection of the fuse monitoring equipment to the Faston tabs on the fuse holders.
The equipment for measuring the line voltage can be connected to the fuses in the thyristor blocks A1 (= AK1 =
U), A3 (= AK3 = V), and A5 (= AK5 = W) (see circuit diagram below).
<3> Do not connect X1, X2
<4> Measurement of armature voltage: connection of KW (AW) - C and AW (KW) - D
Figure 6-21 Circuit (B6)A(B6)C (4-quadrant drive)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

82 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.4 Division options

For information: Circuit diagram, SITOR set (4Q) before being equipped with SINAMICS
DCM Control Module

SITOR sets 6QG12 in an anti-parallel connection of two three-phase current bridge circuits [(B6)A(B6)C] with a transformer
module for measuring actual current values (if SITOR sets 6QG12 are being used without a transformer module for
measuring actual current values, there is no need for an A7 module)
Figure 6-22 SITOR 4Q before modification

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 83
Connecting
6.4 Division options

Circuit B6C (2-quadrant drive)

6,725WK\ULVWRUVHW4*
LQFLUFXLW%&

89: /LQHYROWDJH

)XVHV

3RZHULQWHUIDFH
&$ ) ) ) ) ) )
! ! ! ! ! !
&8' ;7;6;5;/;/ ;7 ;3
DOORFDWLRQ $ $ $ $ $ $
ERDUG ;%

; ;
! ! ! ! ! !

;6%
;B,B,67
;$ ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03 ;,03
;) ;$ ;
;0
; !

)LHOGVXSSO\
;$ ;$ ;3$5
$ ;3$5 ;,03B ;,03B ;,03B
;,03B ;,03B ;,03B
&$
)LULQJSXOVHWUDQVIRUPHUV &$ !$UPDWXUHYROWDJH

;)
&DEOHOHQJWK
PPD[ ;6B 9ROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW ;8
)XVH ;9

;
 HTXLSPHQW ;:
&DEOHOHQJWKV PRQLWRULQJ  &$ ;&
;'
;%

PPD[ HTXLSPHQW 
&$


;6B

+HDWVLQNWHPSHUDWXUH
&XUUHQWWUDQVIRUPHU

# Short-circuit proof cable installation

<1> Firing pulse transformers C98043-A7043 inserted into the plastic holders available (following the order of the
terminal names shown in the figure).
Cables routed to the firing pulse transformers run from terminal strips XIMP_1 to XIMP11 (IMP11, P24) - IMP16
(IMP16, P24).
Firing cables X11 (K, G) to X16 (K, G) routed to the thyristors not shown
(X11 to X16 each routed to thyristor V01 in the thyristor double block, X21 to X26 routed to thyristor V02)
<2> Connection of the fuse monitoring equipment to the Faston tabs on the fuse holders.
The equipment for measuring the line voltage can be connected to the fuses in the thyristor blocks A1 (= AK1 = U),
A3 (= AK3 = V), and A5 (= AK5 = W) (see circuit diagram below).
<3> Do not connect X1
<4> Measurement of armature voltage: Connection of KW - C and AW - D (see the circuit diagram below for details of
how to connect to Faston tabs on the thyristor blocks)
Figure 6-23 Circuit B6C (2-quadrant drive)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

84 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.4 Division options

For information: Circuit diagram, SITOR set (2Q) before being equipped with SINAMICS
DCM Control Module

SITOR sets 6QG12 in a three-phase current bridge circuit [B6C] with a transformer module for measuring actual current
values (if SITOR sets 6QG12 are being used without a transformer module for measuring actual current values, there is no
need for an A7 module)
Figure 6-24 SITOR 2Q before modification

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 85
Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

6.5 Measurement of the armature current

6.5.1 General information

Measuring circuit at power interface C98043-A7109:

;%
; 6
5
˖  7R&8'
;   %8(5'(B
;% N N


;% ;


5  N
˖   ;1
; N N
;%
7R&8'
%8(5'(B ˖ N
,B,B,67
;B,B,67 0B,B,67
;B,B,67
;%
;%
;% ;
N
5
˖
; N  0B%8(5'(
;%

Figure 6-25 Current measurement

Arrangement at power interface C98043-A7109:

Arrangement of X_I_IST

Arrangement of terminals XB
Note:
The disconnecting links for switch S700 must be soldered into the hooks to ensure the connection is secure.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

86 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

Dimensioning current transformers, load resistors

The digital-to-analog converter circuit on the CUD can process voltages of up to ±3 V (peak
value). When dimensioning the current transformers and load resistors, it is important to
ensure the voltage at signals BUERDE_1 and BUERDE_2 (see "Current measurement"
figure) never exceeds this value, even at the highest expected overcurrent in the power unit.
On delivery, actual current value measurement on the SINAMICS DCM Control Module is
configured in such a way as to ensure an actual current value signal of 1 V at the rated
device current. The difference amplifier in the "Current measurement" figure can also be
used (with amplification of 0.1) to adjust the input voltage of existing measuring equipment
with different scaling.
It is better to dimension the current transformers and load resistors in such a way as to
ensure an average load voltage of no more than 1 V at the armature's rated DC current.
If an external load resistor is being used, ensure the wires between this resistor and
terminals XB-1 to XB-8 are twisted and kept as short as possible. To prevent measuring
errors, the external load resistor itself should be connected in accordance with the 4-wire
method (potential tap) and have as little inductance as possible.
With the 4-wire method, the current to be measured is routed through the resistor. The
resulting voltage (load voltage) is tapped at the connections at a distance specified by the
manufacturer. This ensures measurements are as accurate as possible.
Only load resistors with a maximum power loss of at least 0.5 W can be soldered in at the
soldering terminals parallel to the 10 Ω load resistors already installed. If 5 A current
transformers are already present, 5 A/ 0.1 A matching transformers should be used. In such
cases, the standard R701 and R708 load resistors can be used with 10 Ω each.
The maximum permissible current at input terminals XB1 to XB4, XB7, and XB8 is 1 A.
If two current transformers are already present in a V-circuit, these can be connected directly
to terminals XB-1 to XB-4 in order to reduce the wait time for current reversal (greater
dynamic response to torque changes). Please see above for information on calculating load
resistances.
Interposing current transformers may only be connected directly downstream of a current
transformer and not downstream of a V-circuit!

6.5.2 Current measurement with two current transformers on the line side
(on delivery)
Configuration as described in the section titled "Connecting the external power unit"

Current transformers

XB-1 k1 Current transformer T1 signal K line side

XB-2 l1 Ground reference L modular side
XB-3 l2 Ground reference
XB-4 k2 Current transformer T2 signal
The current transformers must have no external connection to ground. Only terminals XB-2
and XB-3 may be used for this purpose.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 87
Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

Table 6- 4 Recommended current transformers

Armature current Ratio Order number Primary side

Up to 600 A 6,000:1 C98130-A1023-C771 Hole 31 × 5.5 mm
Up to 850 A 8,500:1 C98130-A1023-C850 Hole ∅ 22 mm
Up to 1,200 A 12,000:1 C98130-A1023-C772 Hole 61 × 10.5 mm
Up to 1,600 A 16,000:1 C98130-A7023-C062 Hole ∅ 11 mm
Up to 2,400 A 24,000:1 C98130-A1023-C773 Cu cylinder piece
Height 45 mm, hole ∅ 12.2 mm
Up to 3,000 A 30,000:1 C98130-A1023-C740 Hole ∅ 12.2 mm

S700 switch positions:

2 – 3 connected
5 – 6 connected
8 – 9 connected

The position of the S700 means that the difference amplifier at power interface C98043-
A7109 (see "Measuring circuit" figure) is not active. The load voltages from X3 are
connected directly to the control electronics.

Load resistances

8%
5% 
¾[,G
RB = Load resistance
UB = Load voltage (= mean value over 1 current crest, not the rms value or mean value over the
entire period); recommended value = 1 V
ü= Transformation ratio of the current transformer (I2/I1) (in general, ü = 1/number of turns)
Id = Rated armature DC current
The values determined for the load resistances can be set by soldering additional resistors
onto the soldering lugs parallel to R701 and R704 and, if necessary, by pulling out R701 and
R704.
The influence of the magnetizing current can be taken into account in order to determine the
load resistances accurately. If the magnetizing current is not taken into account, an excess
current equivalent to "magnetizing current x number of turns" will flow through the cables
over and above the specified value.
The magnetizing current is determined as follows:
The secondary current of the current transformer must flow through its ohmic resistor (at
maximum operating temperature), load resistor, and any rectifier diodes connected in series.
This results in a calculable voltage drop at the rated current (sine-wave). This voltage (50 Hz
sine-wave) is then applied on the secondary side and the magnetizing current measured.
This value is then used to calculate RB.
It is also important to ensure that current transformers do not experience excessive
saturation in the event of an overcurrent, as the magnetizing current will increase

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

88 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

dramatically. It is also important to take temperature rise into account when operating at
permanent load.
Load resistance taking the magnetizing current into account:

8%
5 % 
,P
¾[,G
¾
Im = Magnetizing current

Parameter settings

p51822 = Rated armature DC current

p51823 = Load voltage at rated armature current
(on delivery = 1,000.0 mV)
p51824 = 1: Current transformers in phases U and V
2: Current transformers in phases U and W (on delivery)
3: Current transformers in phases V and W
4: Current transformers externally interconnected in a V-circuit
5: Actual current value signal, bipolar (external shunt)
p51852 = 0: Internal measurement of armature current actual value
1: Measurement of armature current actual value via X177.1/2
2: Measurement of armature current actual value via X177.3/4
3: Measurement of armature current actual value via X177.5/6
4: Measurement of armature current actual value via X177.7/8

6.5.3 Current measurement via terminal block XB-1 to XB-4 with external measuring
circuit

6.5.3.1 External current transformers in V-circuit with +1 V at rated armature DC current

Connection
The output signal of the V-circuit is connected to terminals XB-1 (+) and XB-2 (-).
Terminals XB-3 and XB-4 are not used.

S700 switch positions:

2 – 3 connected
5 – 6 connected
8 – 9 connected

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 89
Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

Remove R701! The difference amplifier is not used.

Parameter settings

p51822 = Rated armature DC current

p51823 = Input voltage at rated armature current
p51824 = 4

Load
The load resistor for the V-circuit should be located externally, but must not be grounded
externally. Grounding is via terminal XB-2. R701 should be removed.

6.5.3.2 External current transformers in V-circuit with +10 V at rated armature DC current

Connection
The output signal of the V-circuit is connected to terminals XB-1 (+) and XB-2 (-), terminals
XB-3 and XB-4 must be shorted.

S700 switch positions:

1 – 3 connected
4 – 6 connected
7 – 9 connected

Remove R701. The difference amplifier at the power interface is active. The input signal is
reduced to a tenth of its value (10 V to 1 V at rated DC current).

Parameter settings

p51822 = Rated armature DC current

p51823 = Input voltage at rated armature current/10
p51824 = 4

Load
The load resistor for the V-circuit should be located externally, but must not be grounded
externally. Grounding is via terminal XB-2. R701 should be removed.

6.5.3.3 Differential input for +/-10 V at rated armature DC current

This connection option is intended for operation with an LEM transformer or shunt amplifier.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

90 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

It should be remembered that many products are limited in terms of what they can control.
Where this is the case, connection should be based on a 1 V input.

Connection
XB-1 positive (not inverted), XB-4 negative (inverted). External grounding at XB-4 is
recommended. The signal has both polarities (switches pole during torque changes).

S700 switch positions:

1 – 3 connected
4 – 6 connected
7 – 9 connected

Remove R701 and R704. The difference amplifier has an attenuating effect (10:1).

Parameter settings

p51822 = Rated armature DC current

p51823 = Input voltage at rated armature current/10
p51824 = 5 (bipolar)

Load
The load resistor for the LEM transformer should be located externally and grounded with
the power supply. Since shunt amplifiers generally have a ±10 V voltage output, they do not
require a load.

6.5.3.4 Input for +/-1 V at rated armature DC current

This connection option is intended for operation with an LEM transformer.

Connection
XB-1 positive (not inverted), XB-4 negative (inverted). External grounding at XB-4 is
recommended. The signal has both polarities (switches pole during torque changes).

S700 switch positions:

2 – 3 connected
5 – 6 connected
8 – 9 connected

Remove R701.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 91
Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

Parameter settings

p51822 = Rated armature DC current

p51823 = Input voltage at rated armature current
p51824 = 5 (bipolar)

Load
The load resistor should be located externally and grounded with the LEM transformer's
power supply. The value should be dimensioned to produce a 1 V voltage at the rated
current.

6.5.4 External current measurement via X21A or X_I_IST

X21A-23 and X_I_IST-1 = I_IST, negative actual current value
X21A-24 and X_I_IST-2 = M_I_IST, reference potential

S700 switch positions

1 – 3 connected
5 – 6 connected
8 – 9 connected

The difference amplifier is active. The input signal is inverted and reduced to a tenth of its
value (-10 V to 1 V at rated DC current or -30 V to 3 V at the control limit).

Parameter settings

p51822 = Rated armature DC current

p51823 = Input voltage at rated armature current/10
p51824 = 4 for unipolar (negative) actual current value signal
5 for bipolar actual current value signal

6.5.5 Offset correction via XN1

For Sitor sets 6QGXX with shunt current measurement and both V/f and f/V conversion, the
potentiometer (R202 on module 6QM400 for SITOR thyristor set 6QG22) on the secondary
side should be calibrated to exactly match the zero point of the output voltage when the unit
is de-energized. Please refer to Chapter 6 for 6QG22, "Improving interference immunity and
drift problems of the analog actual current value for SITOR electronics." If this potentiometer
is not set correctly, not only will an offset error occur, but current measurement will be
subject to a scaling error. In order to make additional adjustments to the offset for a precise
zero current message, connector XN1 at power interface A7109 must be connected to an
analog output (±10 V) on the control electronics A7100. The offset can be minimized by

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

92 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.5 Measurement of the armature current

assigning output voltage parameters manually. This will not, however, rectify the scaling
error referred to above.

6.5.6 Information on the differential input, control limits, and grounding

If the difference amplifier is used with an amplification of 0.1, a differential input voltage of up
to ±30 V can be processed as a single-ended output voltage (up to ±3 V). The value ±3 V
represents the control limits of the analog digital converter on the CUD.
If the output signal from external armature current measurement is scaled to ±10 V at rated
current, it will not be possible to measure overcurrent. For example, if the output signal from
armature current measurement is scaled to ±5 V at rated current, a current of 2 × IRATED can
be measured.
It is vital for users of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module to realize that they need to check
whether the method used for current measurement is really able to map the desired
overcurrents and the expected peak values within the tolerance required. It is important to
check the current measurement circuit to ensure that current mapping remains linear right
through to the desired overcurrent capacity. If this is not the case, the capping of the actual
value will result in current overshooting and, ultimately, in blown fuses.
The most common risk is overloading of the last operational amplifier in the measuring
circuit. This problem can be avoided by scaling external current measurement to a
sufficiently low value. For example, R642 needs to be shorted in 6QG22. Similarly, R71
needs to be jumpered with an additional 100 kΩ in 6QG35. This ensures there is
controllability at anything up to 2 x rated current (±10 V).
The SINAMICS DCM Control Module is able to process load signals up to a peak value of
±3 V (= 3 × rated current). This means processing is possible up to a peak value of ±30 V
when the differential input is being used.
If the V-circuit is being used with a load resistor and there is no downstream amplifier, it is
advisable to dimension the load resistor for 1 V at rated current. The R701 or R704 internal
10 Ω resistor should be removed to minimize the influence of the supply line and terminal
resistance. Please take care when performing calculations if the resistor is still in place!
Existing load resistors for 10 V at rated current can have their previous value and power loss
reduced to a tenth. Terminals XB-1 and XB-2 are used for the connection, with XB-2 acting
as the ground connection. EMC requirements mean there should be no other connection
between the V-circuit and ground.
If a V-circuit for 10 V at rated current is to be connected without any changes, either
terminals XB-1 and XB-4 (with the difference amplifier at 0.1) or terminals X_I_IST are used.
In such cases, one end of the load resistor should be grounded for EMC reasons.
If an external measuring circuit (LEM transformer) is connected, its electronic ground should
be grounded for EMC reasons.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 93
Connecting
6.6 Connecting the firing pulse transformers

6.6 Connecting the firing pulse transformers

6.6.1 General information

The 12 firing pulse drivers for the firing pulse transformers are located on module A7109.
The firing pulses for the first torque direction can be accessed via connector X21A and those
for the second torque direction via connector X22A. Each firing pulse driver has an open
drain output with a parallel diode downstream of the electronic ground. A further diode
discharges shutdown overvoltages internally downstream of P44 (+44 V). The 12 firing pulse
transformers (containing 33 Ω series resistors) are located on module A7043. Each is
connected between P24 and the firing-circuit cable. Each of the 12 firing pulse drivers can
control up to 3 firing pulse transformers (containing 33 Ω series resistors) in parallel. There is
no short-circuit protection! The user is responsible for ensuring the outputs are not
overloaded. The maximum power pulse current at each of these outputs is 2.5 A. The circuit
as a whole is dimensioned for long pulses.

6.6.2 Normal use (individual)

Connectors X21A and X22A are connected with the connectors of the same name on
module A7043 via two 26-pin ribbon cables. The firing pulse transformers on the module with
the same name are then connected. It is only necessary to use the ribbon cable for X21A for
operation with just one current direction. If module A7043 has not been divided (broken up),
each firing pulse transformer must be connected with the terminal strip via two twisted
cables.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

94 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.6 Connecting the firing pulse transformers

6.6.3 Parallel connection of firing pulses

Up to three firing pulse transformers (containing 33 Ω series resistors) can be connected in
parallel. This involves connecting additional A7043 modules (firing pulse transformers)
(spare part order number 6RY1703-0CM01) via ribbon cables or using two twisted cables to
wire each individual firing pulse transformer in parallel with the terminal with the same name.
● Two or three firing pulse transformers can be connected in parallel to increase the firing
current of the thyristors. This involves connecting the secondary sides of the firing pulse
transformers in parallel for each firing pulse. The firing current actually achieved should
be checked with a current probe and an oscilloscope.
● For operation with just one current direction (torque direction), the second half of module
A7043 can be used for connecting a power unit in parallel or increasing the firing current.
This involves connecting connector X21PAR on module A7043 with connector X22PAR
via a 26-pin ribbon cable. Where this is the case, numbers X21 to X26 on the firing pulse
transformers are no longer really applicable.

CAUTION
Never connect more than three firing pulse transformers to any one firing pulse output!
There is a risk of the firing drivers on module A7109 (power interface) being damaged
due to overload.
The power interface (C98043-A7109) is protected by F400 fuses (1 A, time-lag).

6.6.4 External amplification of firing pulses

No more than 3 power units can be connected in parallel unless external firing pulse
amplifiers with their own 24 V supply are connected. The maximum possible load for the
internal firing pulse drivers (open drain) is 2.5 A per pulse.
The associated cables for the electronic ground are also brought out at connectors X21A
and X22A.
The P24 cables of connectors X21A and X22A must not be subjected to loads greater than
1 A (this is not normally connected either). The external firing pulse amplifiers must be
provided with 24 V (22 V to 30 V) via their own power supply. The supply lines for the
external firing pulse amplifiers must be sufficiently interference-proof to prevent thyristors
misfiring under the prevailing conditions.

Notes
● External firing pulse amplifiers usually have integrated pull-up resistors at their inputs. If
this is not the case or interference immunity needs to be increased, additional pull up
resistors can be connected. However, the power pulse current must not exceed 1 A for
each output.
● Where several firing pulse amplifiers with their own power supply are connected in
parallel on the input side (e.g. SITOR sets), the inputs will need to be decoupled by
isolation diodes. This is already the case with SITOR sets.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 95
Connecting
6.7 Connecting voltage measurement equipment

6.7 Connecting voltage measurement equipment

The following potentials from the power unit need to be connected to the voltage
measurement equipment (A7117):
● Line supply voltage 1U1, 1V1, and 1W1
● Output voltage 1C1 and 1D1
The mounting tabs are arranged in groups for the different line voltage ranges.

Table 6- 5 Connecting voltage measurement equipment, parameter settings

Rated line voltage Plug in at Parameter 1)

<6V 5.6 V p51821 = 6
6 V - 50 V 50 V p51821 = 50
51 V - 125 V 125 V p51821 = 125
126 V - 250 V 250 V p51821 = 250
251 V - 575 V 575 V p51821 = 575
576 V - 1,000 V 1,000 V p51821 = 1,000
1) Index [0] for line voltage, index [1] for armature voltage

Other parameters:
p50078[0] Actual rated input voltage, armature
p51820 Suitable rated supply voltage (rms value) for the power unit (thyristors'
proof voltage)
The voltage level selected must be the same on the printed circuit board and in the software
or the voltages measured will be highly inaccurate. External voltage transformers must be
used when operating at line voltages above 1,000 V.
Voltage measurement equipment does not generate any ground leakage current.

WARNING
The firing pulse transformers no longer comply with safety regulations at line voltages
above 1,000 V. Thus, it is highly advisable to use firing amplifiers with line isolation for
higher voltages.

WARNING
All connection work must be carried out while the cabinet is de-energized. Connecting the
measurement equipment incorrectly can lead to it being damaged or destroyed. Failure to
observe this warning information can result in death, serious physical injury, or extensive
material damage.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

96 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.8 Connecting fuse monitoring equipment

6.8 Connecting fuse monitoring equipment

One or more C98043-A7118 fuse monitoring units can be used to monitor the fuses of one
or more power units. Both the cables and the voltage measurement equipment need to be
plugged in. Each pair of neighboring mounting tabs forms a monitoring unit. Fuse monitoring
equipment does not generate any ground leakage current.
Up to 5 groups, each containing 6 fuse monitoring units, can be connected in parallel. The
fuse monitoring distributor module C98043-A7112 is used for this purpose, with plug
connector X23B on the individual fuse monitoring unit being plugged in on the distributor
module and X23A on the distributor module being plugged in at X23A on power interface
C98043-A7109. This supports isolated monitoring of up to 30 individual fuses or 60, if there
are 2 for each phase.
Parameter p51831[0 to 4] can be used to activate the individual fuse monitoring modules by
entering "1".
Modules C98043-A7112 and C98043-A7118 can be ordered as spare parts. Please refer to
the preface for information on spare parts.

WARNING
All connection work must be carried out while the cabinet is de-energized. Connecting the
monitoring equipment incorrectly can lead to it being damaged or destroyed. Failure to
observe this warning information can result in death, serious physical injury, or extensive
material damage.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 97
Connecting
6.9 Parallel connection of power units

6.9 Parallel connection of power units

Current splitting/Symmetry
It is important to ensure the current is split correctly when connecting power units in parallel.
Even distribution must be ensured to prevent power unit overloads. Appropriate derating
measures should be implemented where necessary. In view of this, it is absolutely essential
that all parallel firing pulse transformers/firing pulse amplifiers are of the same type and
design. The split of current across the power units connected in parallel should be checked
during commissioning and corrected, where necessary, by harmonizing source impedances
(line reactors, supply lines, and transformers). If unexpected problems are encountered
during this process, check whether the firing pulses at the thyristors are occurring
simultaneously. The execution times for the firing pulses must not differ by more than
200 ns. In view of this, it is advisable to compare the firing currents of the thyristors on an
oscilloscope using two small current probes. With electrical connections, the power unit
should be safely disconnected to prevent accidents.

Comments on voltage measurement/Synchronization

The best method is to connect voltage measurement equipment 1U1, 1V1, and 1W1 at the
branching points of the line supply. The connection of motor voltages 1C1 and 1D1 is
relatively unimportant.

Comments on fuse monitoring

If possible, all the fuses of the units connected in parallel should be monitored. It is
particularly important to monitor the fuses at branches not measured by a current
transformer. The SINAMICS DCM Control Module is unable to measure whether the current
has been split evenly at these points.

Note
The currents (current splits) measured by the SINAMICS DCM Control Module itself are
wholly dependent on the values determined by the current transformers. The unit itself is not
able to measure current splitting in the phase that runs through the current transformers
(mainly 1V1).
Where only one set of SINAMICS DCM control electronics is being used, with firing pulses
connected in parallel accordingly, it is not easy to determine how the current is split between
the power units. One method is to measure the current at one unit and work out the other
currents, and thereby the total current, on the basis of the known current split. The other
method involves using separate control electronics for each power unit capable of
determining the allocated direct current. These currents can then be added together and the
resulting values used elsewhere.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

98 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.9 Parallel connection of power units

WARNING
All connection work must be carried out while the cabinet is de-energized. Failure to
connect correctly can lead to damage or destruction.
The unit must be installed in accordance with safety regulations (e.g. DIN or VDE) as well
as all other applicable national or local regulations. Grounding, conductor dimensioning,
and the relevant short-circuit protection work must be carried out correctly in order to
ensure operational safety.
Failure to observe this warning information can result in death, serious physical injury, or
extensive material damage.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 99
Connecting
6.10 Field supply

6.10 Field supply

Power unit field supply

8 : 8 :

D D

* * * *
   
$. $.

$ 9 . $ 9 .
* *
 
$. $.

$ 9 . $ 9 .
'6 '6

6KXQW 6KXQW
'6 '6

&$/ &$/
D D D D

' & ' &

C98043-A7116-L1 = 1Q field
C98043-A7116-L2 = 2Q field (option)
Gate cables: Betatherm 145 0.5 mm2, UL
a = Betatherm 145 6 mm2, UL
Figure 6-26 Power unit field supply

Voltage measurement for the field power unit

Rated supply voltage Parameter

50 V (field extra-low voltage) p50078[1] = 50
400 V (on delivery) p50078[1] = 400

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

100 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.10 Field supply

Modification to field extra-low voltage (50 V)

As part of the modification process, the resistors on field module A98043-A7116 must be
replaced:

;) ;7

Figure 6-27 Field extra-low voltage (1)

R304, R306, R327 (220 kΩ): Replace with 5.6 kΩ

R308, R311, R314, R307, R310, R313, R328, R330, R333: Replace with 0 Ω or jumpers
Figure 6-28 Field extra-low voltage (2)

WARNING
All connection work must be carried out while the cabinet is de-energized. Failure to
connect correctly can lead to damage or destruction.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 101
Connecting
6.11 Line reactors

6.11 Line reactors

Line reactors should be dimensioned to produce a short-circuit voltage of between 4% and
10% (based on the rated field current and taking supply impedance into account).
Local regulations regarding line harmonic distortion need to observed when selecting line
reactors. Catalog LV60 contains ordering information and criteria for selecting line reactors.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

102 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.12 Fuses

6.12 Fuses

Exciter circuit

Table 6- 6 Suggested fuses for the exciter circuit

Max. excitation Siemens fuse Bussmann fuse

current FWP 700V ЯU
A Order number A Order number A
3 5SD420 16 FWP-5B 5
5 5SD420 16 FWP-5B 5
10 5SD420 16 FWP-15B 15
15 5SD440 25 FWP-20B 20
25 5SD440 25 FWP-30B 30
30 5SD480 30 FWP-35B 35
40 3NE1802-0 40 FWP-50B 50

Power interface
F 6.3 A/250 V 5 × 20 mm (fast-acting fuse)
e.g. Wickmann 193, Littelfuse 217P series

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 103
Connecting
6.13 Arrangement of printed circuit boards

6.13 Arrangement of printed circuit boards

 

① CUD C98043-A7100 (Advanced CUD and CUD on the right are options)
② Power interface C98043-A7109
③ Firing pulse transformers C98043-A7043
④ Field module C98043-A7116
⑤ Fuse monitoring equipment C98043-A7118
⑥ Voltage measurement equipment C98043-A7117
Figure 6-29 Arrangement of printed circuit boards

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

104 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston mounting tabs)

6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston

mounting tabs)

Module C98043-A7100 - Control Unit (CUD)

C98043-A7100-L1 = Standard CUD
C98043-A7100-L2 = Advanced CUD
(shown with connector board C98043-A7125 installed)

; ;

;

; ;

;

&$/ &$/

&$ &$
; ;
; ;

; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;

; ;

Figure 6-30 A7100 terminal/connector arrangement

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 105
Connecting
6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston mounting tabs)

Module C98043-A7109 - power interface

;7 ;6 ;5 ;/ ;/ ;9 ;9 ;9 ;7 ;39

    
   
 

;9 ;7
  )

6 6
7$9
6

;1
; ;


;%
;%
;

;%
;
;%
;


;
;%
;%
;% ;
;%
;





;%
 
 

 

;$  ;$ 
;B,B,67

 
 
 

;0
 

;$  )

;) ;
7$9 
 

Figure 6-31 A7109 terminal/connector arrangement

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

106 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston mounting tabs)

Module C98043-A7117 - voltage measurement equipment

;(
;( ; 

;
;';';'
;&
99

99
;:;:
;&;&

;8;8
;9;9
999

999

;&;';:;9;8

;&;';:;9;8

;&;';:;9;8
;' 9

9
;&

;:
:
;'

;8
;&

;9
&

'

8
9

Figure 6-32 A7117 terminal/connector arrangement

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 107
 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
SINAMICS DCM Control Modules
6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston mounting tabs)

99999
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B

A7118 terminal/connector arrangement

Module C98043-A7118 - voltage measurement equipment

;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B




;%

;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B





;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B

;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B
;6B ;6B

Figure 6-33
;6B ;6B ;6B
;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B ;6B
99999
Connecting

108
 Connecting
6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston mounting tabs)

Module C98043-A7043 - firing pulse transformers

3
;B ,03
;;,03 3
,03
3 3 . * ,03 ,03
,03 3

;,03B
;,03B

3 ,03
,03 * 3
,03 . 3
3 ,03
,03 ;,03; 3
3 ,03
,03 ;B 3
3 ;;,03 ,03
,03 3
3 . * ,03
3 ,03
,03 3
3 ,03
,03 * . 3 3
,03

;,03B
;,03B

,03
3 ;,03; ;B 3
,03
3 ,03
;B 3
,03 ;;,03 ,03
3
,03 3 . * ,03 3
3 ,03
,03 3
3 ,03 * . 3 ,03
,03 3
3
;,03; ,03
,03 3

;,03B
;,03B

3 ,03
,03
;;,03 3
3 ,03
3 . * ,03
,03 3
3 ,03
,03 3
,03 * . 3 ,03
3
3
,03 ;,03;
;B
;;,03
3 . * ,03

,03 * . 3
;3$5 ;3$5
;,03;

;;,03
3 . * ,03

,03 * . 3
;$ ;,03; ;$
&$

The following parallel connections are made in each case:

- The terminals with the same names on terminal strips XIMP_1, XIMP_2, and XIMP_3.
- The terminals with the same names on terminal strips XIMP_4, XIMP_5, and XIMP_6.
- X21A and X21PAR, X22A and X22PAR
Figure 6-34 A7043 terminal/connector arrangement

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 109
Connecting
6.14 Arrangement of customer connections (connector terminals, Faston mounting tabs)

Module C98043-A7125 - connector board

;
C98043-A7125

Figure 6-35 A7125 terminal/connector arrangement

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

110 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon

cables)

WARNING
Connecting the unit incorrectly can lead to damage or destruction.
Power cables and busbars must be mechanically fastened in place outside of the unit.

CAUTION
The information regarding terminal connection options in the tables below is based on
values from the terminal data sheets. The connecting cables must be dimensioned for the
prevailing currents.

Overview

Table 6- 7 Terminals and connectors overview

3U1, 3W1, 3C, 3D Exciter circuit

XP24V Electronic power supply
X21A, X22A Firing module
X23A Fuse monitoring distributor
X23B Fuse monitoring - individual
X45 Voltage measurement
X100, X101 DRIVE-CLiQ
X126 PROFIBUS
X165, X166 Parallel-connection interface
X177 Analog inputs, digital inputs, digital outputs, setpoints, reference voltage (P10/N10), serial
interface (peer-to-peer), incremental encoder, analog outputs, temperature sensor
X178, X179 Interface to AOP30, USS interface
XF1 Field module
X_I_IST External actual current value
XB-1 to XB-8 Current transformers
XL1 Fan relay output 230 V
XL2 Fan monitoring
XM Ground
XR1 Relay output for line contactor
XS1 Safety shutdown E-STOP
XT1 Analog tachometer
XT5, XT6 Temperature sensors

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 111
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

6.15.1 Exciter circuit

Table 6- 8 Terminal type, connections for the exciter circuit

Type 20E/4DS terminal strip

Connection capacity Rigid/flexible (mm2/mm2): 6-16 / 6-10
Stripped length 8 mm

Table 6- 9 Assignment of connections for the exciter circuit

Terminal Function Technical data

XF1: Line supply connection 2AC 400 V (– 20%), 2AC 460 V (+10%)
3U1, 3W1
XF2-1: 3D Field winding connection 325 V/373 V rated DC voltage
XF2-2: 3C with 2-ph. 400/460 VAC line supply connection

6.15.2 Electronic power supply

Table 6- 10 Terminal type, electronic power supply

Type Wago 256 spring-loaded terminal

Connection capacity 0.08 - 2.5 mm2, AWG 18-12
Stripped length 5 - 6 mm

Table 6- 11 Assignment of terminals for the electronic power supply

Terminal Function Technical data

XP24V
+ 24 V infeed DC 18 V to 30 V; current consumption 1 A to 5 A
- Recommended conductor cross-section 1.5 mm2
Internal protection with F200 fuses (6.3 A, time-lag),
External protection 6 A to 16 A, C characteristic
Module C98043-A7109, power interface

6.15.3 Open-loop and closed-loop control section

Table 6- 12 Terminal type, open-loop and closed-loop control section

X177:
Type SPT 1.5 spring-loaded terminal
Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG): 0.2-1.5 / 0.2-1.5 / 24-16
Flexible with end sleeve without/with plastic sleeve:
0.25-1.5/0.25-0.75 mm2 (stripped length 8 mm)
Stripped length 10 mm

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

112 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

X178, X179:
Type FMC 1.5 plug-in terminal
Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG): 0.2-1.5 / 0.2-1.5 / 24-16
Flexible with end sleeve without/with plastic sleeve: 0.25-1.5/0.25-0.75 mm2
Stripped length 10 mm
XR1, XS1, XT1:
Type MSTB 2.5/CIF plug-in terminal
Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG): 0.2-2.5 / 0.2-2.5 / 24-12
Flexible with end sleeve without/with plastic sleeve: 0.25-2.5/0.25-2.5 mm2
Stripped length 7 mm
Tightening torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
X126:
Type Submin D, 9-pin
X100, X101:
Type Modular jack 8/4 (RJ45)
XB-1 to XB-8, X_I_IST, XM:
Type Wago 256 spring-loaded terminal
Connection capacity 0.08 - 2.5 mm2, AWG 18-12
Stripped length 5 - 6 mm

Terminals on connector board C98043-A7125

Also refer to "Inputs/Outputs" in the section titled "Descriptions of functions".

Table 6- 13 Terminal 177 assignment

Terminal Function Technical data

X177
Analog inputs (assignable inputs)
1 AI3 + Analog input 3 Input type (signal type):
2 AI3 - Differential input ±10 V; 150 kΩ
3 AI4 + Analog input 4 Resolution approx. 5.4 mV (±11 bits)
4 AI4 - Common-mode controllability: ±15 V

5 AI5 + Analog input 5

6 AI5 -
7 AI6 + Analog input 6
6 AI6 -
Digital inputs (assignable inputs)
9 24 V 24 V supply (output) 24 VDC, short-circuit proof
10 DC Max. load 200 mA (terminals 9 and 10 together),
internal supply related to internal ground terminal
11 DI0 Digital input 0 H signal: +15 to +30 V
12 DI1 Digital input 1 L signal: –30 to +5 V or terminal open
8.5 mA at 24 V
13 DI2 Digital input 2
14 DI3 Digital input 3

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 113
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Terminal Function Technical data

X177
Digital inputs/outputs (assignable inputs/outputs)
15 DI/ Digital input Type, input/output parameterizable
DO4 /output 4 Features of inputs:
16 DI/ Digital input H signal: +15 to +30 V
DO5 /output 5 L signal: 0 to +5 V or terminal open
8.5 mA at 24 V
17 DI/ Digital input
DO6 /output 6 Features of outputs:
H signal: +20 to +26 V
18 DI/ Digital input L signal: 0 to +2 V
DO7 /output 7 Short-circuit proof, 100 mA
Internal protective circuit (freewheeling diode)
If overload occurs: alarm A60018
19 DO0 Digital output 0 H signal: +20 to +26 V
20 DO1 Digital output 1 L signal: 0 to +2 V
Short-circuit proof, 100 mA
21 DO2 Digital output 2 Internal protective circuit (freewheeling diode)
22 DO3 Digital output 3 If overload occurs: alarm A60018
23, 24 M Ground, digital
Analog inputs, setpoint inputs (assignable inputs)
25 AI0 + Analog input 0 Input type (signal type), parameterizable:
26 AI0 - Main setpoint - Differential input ±10 V; 150 kΩ
27 AI1 + Analog input 1 - Current input 0 - 20 mA; 300 Ω or 4 - 20 mA; 300 Ω
28 AI1 - Resolution approx. 0.66 mV (±14 bits)
Common-mode controllability: ±15 V
29 AI2 + Analog input 2 Input type (signal type):
30 AI2 - - Differential input ±10 V; 150 kΩ
Resolution approx. 0.66 mV (±14 bits)
Common-mode controllability: ±15 V
Reference voltage
31 P10 Reference voltage ±10 V Tolerance ±1% at 25 °C
32 N10 (output) Stability 0.1% per 10 °K
33, 34 M Ground, analog 10 mA short-circuit proof

Serial interface, peer-to-peer RS485

35, 36 M Ground, digital
37 TX+ Send cable + 4-wire send cable, positive differential output
38 TX- Send cable - 4-wire send cable, negative differential output
39 RX+ Receive cable + 4-wire receive cable, positive differential output
40 RX- Receive cable - 4-wire receive cable, negative differential output
Incremental encoder input
41 Incremental encoder supply +13.7 to +15.2 V, 300 mA short-circuit proof (electronically protected)
42 Incremental encoder ground If overload occurs: alarm A60018
43 Track 1 positive connection Load: ≤ 5.25 mA at 15 V (without switching losses)
44 Track 1 negative connection Pulse duty factor: 1:1
45 Track 2 positive connection See below for data relating to cables, cable length, shield support,
input pulse levels, hysteresis, track displacement, and pulse
46 Track 2 negative connection frequency.
47 Zero mark positive connection

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

114 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Terminal Function Technical data

X177
48 Zero mark negative connection
Analog outputs (assignable outputs)
49 AO0 Analog output 0 ±10 V, max. 2 mA short-circuit proof, resolution ±15 bits
50 M Ground, analog
51 AO1 Analog output 1
52 M Ground, analog
Connections for temperature sensor (motor interface 1)
53 Temp 1 Sensor acc. to p50490 (refer to SINAMICS DCM List Manual
54 Temp 2 (sense cable) The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor must be shielded
and connected to ground at both ends.
55 Temp 3 The cables for the Temp 1 and Temp 3 connections to the
temperature sensor must be approximately the same length.
The sense cable (Temp 2) is used for compensating the cable
resistances. If you are not using a sense cable, terminals 54 and 55
must be connected.
Connection without/with sense cable:

VHQVH
;    ;   
7HPS7HPS7HPS7HPS7HPS7HPS

56 M Ground, analog
Module C98043-A7125 (connector board)

Characteristic values for the incremental encoder evaluation electronics

For supported encoder types, refer to the description of parameter p0400 and Appendix A.2
in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.

Note
Incremental encoder evaluation via terminals X177.41 to 48 does not support any SSI
encoders.
A Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 is required for evaluating SSI encoders (see the
section titled "Additional system components").

CAUTION
Selecting the encoder type with p0400 does not result in any changes to the supply voltage
for the incremental encoder (terminals X177.41 and 42).
Terminal X177.41 always supplies +15 V. An external power supply is required for
incremental encoders with other supply voltages (e.g. +5 V).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 115
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Input pulse levels:

Encoder signals (symmetrical/asymmetrical) up to a maximum of 27 V differential voltage
can be processed by the evaluation electronics.
The encoder type is selected using p0400. The evaluation electronics are adjusted
electronically to the encoder signal voltage:

Rated input voltage 5V 15 V

Encoder TTL HTL
Low signal level (differential voltage) < 0.8 V < 5.0 V
High signal level (differential voltage) > 2.0 V > 8.0 V
Hysteresis > 0.2 V > 1.0 V
Common-mode controllability ±10 V ±10 V
If the incremental encoder does not supply any symmetrical encoder signals, it must be
grounded with each signal cable twisted in pairs and connected to the negative connections
of track 1, track 2, and zero mark.
Switching frequency:
The maximum frequency of the encoder pulses is 300 kHz. To ensure the encoder pulses
are evaluated correctly, the minimum distance (Tmin) between two encoder signal edges
(track 1, track 2), as listed in the table, must be adhered to.

Rated input voltage 5V 15 V

Differential voltage 1) 2V > 2.5 V 8V 10 V > 14 V
Tmin 2) 630 ns 380 ns 630 ns 430 ns 380 ns
1) Differential voltage at the terminals of the evaluation electronics
2) The phase error LG (deviation from 90°) that may occur as a result of the encoder and
cable can be calculated on the basis of Tmin:
LG= ± (90° – fp × Tmin × 360°)
LG = Phase error
fp = Pulse frequency
Tmin = Minimum edge distance
This formula only applies if the pulse duty factor of the encoder signals is 1:1.
If the incremental encoder is incorrectly matched to the encoder cable, disturbing cable
reflections will occur at the receiving end. To ensure that encoder pulses of this type can be
evaluated without errors, these reflections need to be damped. The limit values listed in the
table below must be adhered to in order to prevent the resulting power losses in the
evaluation electronics adaptor from being exceeded.

fmax 50 kHz 100 kHz 150 kHz 200 kHz 300 kHz
Differential voltage 3) ≤ 27 V ≤ 22 V ≤ 18 V ≤ 16 V ≤ 14 V
3) Differential voltage of encoder pulses without load (= approximately the supply voltage of
the incremental encoder)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

116 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Cable, cable length, shield support:

The encoder cable capacitance must be recharged at each encoder edge change. The rms
value of this current is proportional to the cable length and pulse frequency, and must not
exceed the current permitted by the encoder manufacturer. A suitable cable that meets the
recommendations of the encoder manufacturer must be used, and the maximum cable
length must not be exceeded. Generally speaking, a twisted cable pair with a single pair
shield is sufficient for each track. This reduces crosstalk between the cables. Shielding all
the pairs provides protection against interference pulses. The shield should be connected to
the SINAMICS DC MASTER shield support over a large area.

Terminals at the power interface

Table 6- 14 Terminals XR1, XS1, XT1, XL1, XM, X_I_IST, XB

Terminal Function Technical data

Analog tachometer XT1
XT1-103 Tachometer connection ±270 V
8 to 270 V Input resistance 159 kΩ
XT1-104 Ground, analog M Resolution ±14 bits
Safety shutdown E-STOP XS1
XS1-105 Input (switch) Ie = 20 mA
XS1-106 Supply (output) 24 VDC, max. load 1 A, short-circuit proof
Floating relay outputs XR1, XL1
XR1-109 Relay for line contactor Current carrying capacity:
XR1-110 ≤ AC 250 V, 4 A; cosφ = 1
XL1-120 Relay for fan contactor ≤ AC 250 V, 2 A; cosφ = 0.4
XL1-121 ≤ DC 30 V, 2 A
Max. 4 A external protection, C characteristic recommended
Monitoring inputs XL2
XL2-122 + Fan monitoring Differential inputs
XL2-123 - (fault F60267) Max. input voltage ±50 V
Configuration with p51832 Common mode range -2 V to +50 V
L signal: <8 V, H signal: >11 V
XL2-124 + External monitoring Input resistor 30 kΩ
XL2-125 - (fault F60203) Switchable resistors 470 Ω:
Configuration with p51833
   

 ˖  ˖
6  6 
 

Electronic ground
XM-M Electronic ground
XM-M
Actual current value X_I_IST
I_I_IST Actual value of current Input for external actual current value
M_I_IST Ground reference for actual Analog 0 to -10 V
current value
Current transformer connections XB
XB1 Current transformer T1 - k1 Configuration of current transformers in accordance with p51824

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 117
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Terminal Function Technical data

XB2 Current transformer T1 - l1
XB3 Current transformer T2 - l2
XB4 Current transformer T2 - k2
XB5 Current transformer T3, output Configuration of current transformers in accordance with p51824
XB6
XB7 Current transformer T3 - l3
XB8 Current transformer T3 - k3
Module C98043-A7109, power interface

Serial interface to AOP30/USS interface

Table 6- 15 Terminal X178

Terminal Function Technical data

X178
1 Supply (output) 24 VDC short-circuit proof, maximum load 200 mA
Internal supply related to internal ground terminal
2 Ground, AOP M
3 RX+/TX+ Send and receive cable, RS485, two-wire
Positive differential input/output
4 RX-/TX- Send and receive cable, RS485, two-wire
Negative differential input/output
5 Ground, digital M
6 Ground, digital M
Module C98043-A7100-L1/L2, Standard/Advanced CUD

Table 6- 16 Terminal X179

Terminal Function Technical data

X179
1 Supply (output) 4.4 to 5.4 VDC short-circuit proof, maximum load 300 mA
Internal supply related to internal ground terminal
2 Ground, digital M
3 TXD1 Send cable, RS232 standard (V.24)
4 RXD1 Receive cable, RS232 standard (V.24)
5 TXD2 Send cable, RS232 standard (V.24)
6 RXD2 Receive cable, RS232 standard (V.24)
Module C98043-A7100-L1/L2, Standard/Advanced CUD
Note:
Only one of the two interfaces - RS485 (X178-3, 4) or RS232 (X179-3, 4) - may be used.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

118 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

&8'

1 2 3 4 5 6
;

1 2 3 4 5 6
;

Figure 6-36 Arrangement X178 and X179

PROFIBUS connection

Table 6- 17 PROFIBUS connector assignment

Connector Pin Signal name Technical data

X126
1 - Not assigned
2 - Not assigned
3 RxD/TxD-P RS485 receive/transmit data P (B)
4 CNTR-P Control signal (TTL)
5 DGND PROFIBUS data ground
6 VP Positive supply voltage (5 V +/-10%)
7 - Not assigned
8 RxD/TxD-N RS485 receive/transmit data N (A)
9 - Not assigned
Module C98043-A7100-L1/L2, Standard/Advanced CUD

DRIVE-CLiQ

Table 6- 18 DRIVE-CLiQ connector assignment

Connector Pin Signal name Technical data

X100, X101
1 TXP Transmit data +
 2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +

4 - Reserved, do not use
5 - Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 - Reserved, do not use
8 - Reserved, do not use
- Shield Permanently connected to ground
Module C98043-A7100-L2, Advanced CUD

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 119
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Connectors at the power interface

Table 6- 19 Connectors XT5, XT6

Terminal Function Technical data

Temperature sensor input (XT5)
XT5-1 Electronic ground GND Sensor in accordance with p51830[0 to 2]
XT5-2 Free
XT5-3 Heat sink temperature
Temperature sensor input (XT6)
XT6-1 Electronic ground GND Sensor in accordance with p51830[0 to 2]
XT6-2 Free
XT6-3 Heat sink temperature
Zero calibration of actual current value measurement (XN1)
XN1 Infeed point for zero calibration Please refer to the section titled "Measurement of the armature
current"
Ground (X600)
X600 Ground, e.g. for zero calibration
via XN1
Soldering lugs for load resistor R701 (X701, X702)
X701 Connection to XB-1
X702 Connection to XB-2
Soldering lugs for load resistor R704 (X703, X704)
X703 Connection to XB-3
X704 Connection to XB-4
Soldering lugs for load resistor R708 (X707, X708)
X707 Connection to XB-7
X708 Connection to XB-8
Module C98043-A7109, power interface

CompactFlash Card slot

Figure 6-37 Module C98043-A7100 CUD, slot for CompactFlash Card

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

120 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

CAUTION
The CompactFlash Card may only be inserted as shown in the figure above.
The CompactFlash Card must not be removed or inserted while data is being saved.
If you are returning a defective module (C98043-A7100 (CUD)), do not return the
CompactFlash Card along with it - instead, keep it so that you can use it in the replacement
module.

No CompactFlash Card is required to operate the CUD.

The CompactFlash Card is needed in the following applications:
● Saving parameters
Parameters are saved on the CompactFlash Card and can simply be copied onto a new
CUD if it needs to be replaced.
● Software update
A software update is easy to carry out using a CompactFlash Card.

6.15.4 Voltage measurement equipment

Connection type: Faston mounting tabs, 4.8 mm

Table 6- 20 Voltage measurement connections

Connection Function Technical data, comments

XU1 Measurement of line voltage Rated line voltage (armature) >575 V to 1,000 V
XV1 Phases U-V-W (p51821 = 1,000)
XW1 (1,000 V)
XC1 Measurement of armature Rated line voltage (armature) >575 V to 1,000 V
XD1 voltage (p51821 = 1,000)
(1,000 V)
XU2 Measurement of line voltage Rated line voltage (armature) >250 V to 575 V
XV2 Phases U-V-W (p51821 = 575)
XW2 (575 V)
XC2 Measurement of armature Rated line voltage (armature) >250 V to 575 V
XD2 voltage (p51821 = 575)
(575 V)
XU3 Measurement of line voltage Rated line voltage (armature) >125 V to 250 V
XV3 Phases U-V-W (p51821 = 250)
XW3 (250 V)
XC3 Measurement of armature Rated line voltage (armature) >125 V to 250 V
XD3 voltage (p51821 = 250)
(250 V)
XU4 Measurement of line voltage Rated line voltage (armature) >50 V to 125 V
XV4 Phases U-V-W (p51821 = 125)
XW4 (125 V)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 121
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Connection Function Technical data, comments

XC4 Measurement of armature Rated line voltage (armature) >50 V to 125 V
XD4 voltage (p51821 = 125)
(125 V)
XU5 Measurement of line voltage Rated line voltage (armature) >5.6 V to 50 V
XV5 Phases U-V-W (p51821 = 50)
XW5 (50 V)
XC5 Measurement of armature Rated line voltage (armature) >5.6 V to 50 V
XD5 voltage (p51821 = 50)
(50 V)
XU6 Measurement of line voltage Rated line voltage (armature) ≤5.6 V
XV6 Phases U-V-W (p51821 = 6)
XW6 (5.6 V)
XC6 Measurement of armature Rated line voltage (armature) ≤5.6 V
XD6 voltage (p51821 = 6)
(5.6 V)
Module C98043-A7117, voltage measurement equipment

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

122 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

6.15.5 Fuse monitoring equipment

Connection type: Faston mounting tabs, 4.8 mm

Table 6- 21 Connections for fuse monitoring equipment

Connection Function Technical data, comments

XS1_1 Fuse 1 Measurement cables for the fuses to be monitored at a rated line
XS2_1 (1,000 V) voltage >575 V to 1,000 V*)
XS3_1 Fuse 2 Measurement resistance between two associated connections: 388.4
XS4_1 (1,000 V) kΩ
XS5_1 Fuse 3
XS6_1 (1,000 V)
XS7_1 Fuse 4
XS8_1 (1,000 V)
XS9_1 Fuse 5
XS10_1 (1,000 V)
XS11_1 Fuse 6
XS12_1 (1,000 V)
XS1_2 Fuse 1 Measurement cables for the fuses to be monitored at a rated line
XS2_2 (575 V) voltage >250 V to 600 V*)
XS3_2 Fuse 2 Measurement resistance between two associated connections: 196.4
XS4_2 (575 V) kΩ
XS5_2 Fuse 3
XS6_2 (575 V)
XS7_2 Fuse 4
XS8_2 (575 V)
XS9_2 Fuse 5
XS10_2 (575 V)
XS11_2 Fuse 6
XS12_2 (575 V)
XS1_3 Fuse 1 Measurement cables for the fuses to be monitored at a rated line
XS2_3 (250 V) voltage >125 V to 250 V*)
XS3_3 Fuse 2 Measurement resistance between two associated connections: 100.4
XS4_3 (250 V) kΩ
XS5_3 Fuse 3
XS6_3 (250 V)
XS7_3 Fuse 4
XS8_3 (250 V)
XS9_3 Fuse 5
XS10_3 (250 V)
XS11_3 Fuse 6
XS12_3 (250 V)
XS1_4 Fuse 1 Measurement cables for the fuses to be monitored at a rated line
XS2_4 (125 V) voltage >50 V to 125 V*)
XS3_4 Fuse 2 Measurement resistance between two associated connections: 52.4
XS4_4 (125 V) kΩ
XS5_4 Fuse 3
XS6_4 (125 V)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 123
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Connection Function Technical data, comments

XS7_4 Fuse 4
XS8_4 (125 V)
XS9_4 Fuse 5
XS10_4 (125 V)
XS11_4 Fuse 6
XS12_4 (125 V)
XS1_5 Fuse 1 Measurement cables for the fuses to be monitored at a rated line
XS2_5 (50 V) voltage = 10 V to 50 V*)
XS3_5 Fuse 2 Measurement resistance between two associated connections: 18.8
XS4_5 (50 V) kΩ
XS5_5 Fuse 3
XS6_5 (50 V)
XS7_5 Fuse 4
XS8_5 (50 V)
XS9_5 Fuse 5
XS10_5 (50 V)
XS11_5 Fuse 6
XS12_5 (50 V)
*) The fuse monitoring equipment is generally connected to the armature current circuit, although it can also be used for
the field circuit, fan circuit, or the primary circuit of a heavy-current transformer. The connections used for fuse monitoring
depend on the voltage prevailing at a blown fuse.
Module C98043-A7118, fuse monitoring equipment
Switching fuse monitoring on/off via p51831 (0=OFF, 1=ON)

6.15.6 Firing pulse transformers

Table 6- 22 Terminal type, firing pulse module

XIMP_1 to XIMP_26, X11 to X26

Type Wago 256 spring-loaded terminal
Connection capacity 0.08 - 2.5 mm2, AWG 18-12
Stripped length 5 - 6 mm
X12_1, X14_1, X15_1, X16_1, X25_1
Type Faston mounting tabs, 6.3 mm
The P24 on the power interface (C98043-A7109) is protected by F400 fuses (1 A, time-lag).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

124 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Table 6- 23 Firing pulse module connections

Terminal, Function Technical data, comments

connection
XIMP_1 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP11 For thyristor V11 If the firing pulse transformer module is divided up (please refer to the
P24 section titled "Removal/Installation and division of modules"), the
IMP12 For thyristor V12 controls for the firing pulse transformers must be routed via these
P24 terminal connections.
IMP13 For thyristor V13 This involves making the following connections:
P24 XIMP_1 - IMP11 → XIMP11 - IMP11 (for thyristor V11)
IMP14 For thyristor V14 XIMP_1 - P24 → XIMP11 - P24 (for thyristor V11)
P24 XIMP_1 - IMP12 → XIMP12 - IMP12 (for thyristor V12)
IMP15 For thyristor V15 XIMP_1 - P24 → XIMP12 - P24 (for thyristor V12)
P24 etc.
IMP16 For thyristor V16
P24
XIMP_2
Same as XIMP_1
The terminals on terminal strip XIMP_2 are parallel to the terminals on terminal strip XIMP_1 with the same name.
XIMP_3
Same as XIMP_1
The terminals on terminal strip XIMP_3 are parallel to the terminals on terminal strip XIMP_1 with the same name.
XIMP_4 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP21 For thyristor V21 If the firing pulse transformer module is divided up (please refer to the
P24 section titled "Removal/Installation and division of modules"), the
IMP22 For thyristor V22 controls for the firing pulse transformers must be routed via these
P24 terminal connections.
IMP23 For thyristor V23 This involves making the following connections:
P24 XIMP_4 - IMP21 → XIMP21 - IMP21 (for thyristor V21)
IMP24 For thyristor V24 XIMP_4 - P24 → XIMP21 - P24 (for thyristor V11)
P24 XIMP_4 - IMP22 → XIMP22 - IMP22 (for thyristor V22)
IMP25 For thyristor V25 XIMP_4 - P24 → XIMP22 - P24 (for thyristor V12)
P24 etc.
IMP26 For thyristor V26
P24
XIMP_5
Same as XIMP_4
The terminals on terminal strip XIMP_5 are parallel to the terminals on terminal strip XIMP_4 with the same name.
XIMP_6
Same as XIMP_4
The terminals on terminal strip XIMP_6 are parallel to the terminals on terminal strip XIMP_4 with the same name.
XIMP11 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP11 For thyristor V11 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_1)
X11
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V11 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP12 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 125
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Terminal, Function Technical data, comments

connection
IMP12 For thyristor V12 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_1)
X12
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V12 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP13 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP13 For thyristor V13 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_1)
X13
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V13 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP14 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP14 For thyristor V14 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_1)
X14
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V14 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP15 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP15 For thyristor V15 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_1)
X15
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V15 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP16 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP16 For thyristor V16 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_1)
X16
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V16 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP21 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP21 For thyristor V21 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_4)
X21
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V21 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP22 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP22 For thyristor V22 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_4)
X22
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V22 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP23 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP23 For thyristor V23 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_4)
X23
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V23 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP24 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP24 For thyristor V24 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_4)
X24
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V24 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

126 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Terminal, Function Technical data, comments

connection
XIMP25 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP25 For thyristor V25 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_4)
X25
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V25 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
XIMP26 control for firing pulse transformers for the thyristors
IMP26 For thyristor V26 Only to be connected if the firing pulse transformer module is divided
P24 up (see terminal strip XIMP_4)
X26
G, K Firing cable, thyristor V26 Firing pulse (see below) gate (G) to auxiliary cathode (K)
Outputs for voltage measurement
X12_1 Armature line voltage W When the firing cables are connected to the thyristors in the power
X14_1 Armature line voltage U unit, the line and armature voltages are automatically present at the
firing pulse module (C98043-A7043).
X15_1 Armature voltage 1C1 These voltages can then be routed from here (connections X12_1,
X16_1 Armature line voltage V etc.) to the voltage measurement equipment (C98043-A7117), without
X25_1 Armature voltage 1D1 having to route any additional cables to the power unit.
Please also refer to the section titled "Connecting the external power
unit".
Module C98043-A7043, firing pulse module

6.15.7 Firing pulse

Time sequence
The time sequence for firing pulses is set via parameter p51826:

p51826[0] Length of first pulse (factory setting = 50 µs)

p51826[1] Length of other pulses (factory setting = 35 µs)
p51826[2] Length of pause (factory setting = 70 µs)

Notes
● If p51826[0] = 105 or p51826[1] = 105: Block pulse (without pulse scrambling)
● If p51826[0] ≤ p51826[1] is set, p51826[0] will be ignored and the first pulse will have the
same length as all the other pulses.
● p50079 is used for short pulse/long pulse selection.

p50079 = 0 Short pulses, pulse length 890 µs

p50079 = 1 Long pulses, pulse duration up to 0.1 ms before the next pulse

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 127
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

ุwV wV DSSUR[GHJUHHVDW+]

S>@ S>@

S>@

Figure 6-38 Firing pulse - time sequence

The pulse shape of the current depends on the length of the cable to the thyristor
(cathode/gate). Cable inductance causes the rising edge of the current pulse to become
slower as the cable length increases.
Relationship between firing current and output voltage (incl. tolerances):

8>9@ ① Normal working range of the thyristors is 1 to

 4.2 V

No-load voltage = 7.8 to 8.4 V

 Short-circuit current = 1.15 to 1.25 A






        ,>$@

Application
The firing condition for the thyristor used (minimum firing current) must be to the left of the
firing circuit characteristic. The firing current can be determined graphically by finding the
point at which the thyristor's input characteristic intersects with the firing circuit's output
characteristic. It is important to remember that the thyristor's gate/cathode voltage drop
increases as the temperature decreases.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

128 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Examples of oscillograms
Firing voltage = gate/cathode voltage with 1 m twisted cable from the firing current circuit to
the thyristor's gate connection

  


 

$ %

A Substitution load 20 Ω in parallel with 2 diodes

B Substitution load 20 Ω in parallel with 4 diodes
① Control signal
② Voltage at load (0.5 V/div)
③ Current through load (0.5 A/div)
Figure 6-39 Firing pulse - oscillograms

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 129
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

6.15.8 Ribbon cables

Firing pulse cable, torque direction 1, connectors X21A/X21PAR

Ribbon cable, 26-pin

Table 6- 24 Assignment X21A, X21PAR

Function Pin Signal name Connection

values/Comments
Free 1
Free 2
Free 3
Electronic ground 4 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 2 5 IMP_12 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 6 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 7 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 6 8 IMP_16 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 9 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 10 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 4 11 IMP_14 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 12 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 13 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 5 14 IMP_15 4 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 15 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 16 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 3 17 IMP_13 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 18 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 19 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 1 20 IMP_11 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 21 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 22 M
Actual current value 23 I_IST Analog ±10 V
Ground reference for actual current value 24 M_I_IST Analog ±10 V
Electronic ground 25 M
Free 26
Power interface C98043-A7109/Firing pulse module C98043-A7043
Connectors X21A and X21PAR are connected in parallel on module C98043-A7043
- apart from I_IST (pin 23) and M_I_IST (pin 24).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

130 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Firing pulse cable, torque direction 2, connectors X22A/X22PAR

Ribbon cable, 26-pin

Table 6- 25 Assignment X22A, X22PAR

Function Pin Signal name Connection

values/Comments
Free 1
Free 2
Free 3
Electronic ground 4 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 2 5 IMP_22 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 6 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 7 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 6 8 IMP_26 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 9 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 10 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 4 11 IMP_24 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 12 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 13 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 5 14 IMP_25 4 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 15 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 16 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 3 17 IMP_23 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 18 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 19 M
Thyristor firing pulse, armature 1 20 IMP_21 24 V/2 A pulse
24 V supply, firing 21 P24_Z 24 VDC/2 A
Electronic ground 22 M
Free 23
Free 24
Electronic ground 25 M
Free 26
Power interface C98043-A7109/Firing pulse module C98043-A7043
Connectors X22A and X22PAR are connected in parallel on module C98043-A7043.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 131
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Power interface connecting cable - fuse monitoring equipment

Ribbon cable, 10-pin

Table 6- 26 Assignment X23B

Function Pin Signal name Connection

values/Comments
24 V supply 1 P24 22 to 26 V
24 V supply 2 P24 22 to 26 V
Fuse monitoring 3 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 4 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 5 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 6 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 7 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 8 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Ground 9 M
Ground 10 M
Power interface C98043-A7109/
Fuse monitoring equipment C98043-A7118 or fuse monitoring distributor C98130-A7112

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

132 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Ribbon cable, 34-pin

Table 6- 27 Assignment X23A

Function Pin Signal name Connection

values/Comments
24 V supply 1 P24 22 to 26 V
24 V supply 2 P24 22 to 26 V
Fuse monitoring 3 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 4 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 5 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 6 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 7 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 8 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 9 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 10 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 11 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 12 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 13 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 14 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 15 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 16 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 17 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 18 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 19 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 20 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 21 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 22 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 23 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 24 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 25 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 26 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 27 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 28 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 29 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 30 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 31 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Fuse monitoring 32 SICHERUNG_OK 24 V logic
Ground 33 M
Ground 34 M
Power interface C98043-A7109/Fuse monitoring distributor C98130-A7112

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 133
Connecting
6.15 Connector assignment (terminals, Faston mounting tabs, ribbon cables)

Power interface connecting cable - voltage measurement equipment

CAT5 cable, 8-pin

Table 6- 28 Assignment X45

Function Pin Signal name Connection

values/Comments
RS485 signal data + 1 ANKER_RS485_SP
RS485 signal data - 2 ANKER_RS485_SN
3.3 V supply 3 P3V3 3.3 V
RS485 signal direction + 4 ANKER_RS485_DP
RS485 signal direction - 5 ANKER_RS485_DN
Ground 6 M
AC 16 V supply 7 HF16_1 ±16 V HF
AC 16 V supply 8 HF16_2 ±16 V HF
Power interface C98043-A7109/Voltage measurement equipment C98043-A7117

Power interface connecting cable - field supply

Ribbon cable, 20-pin

Table 6- 29 Assignment XF1

Function Pin Signal name Connection

values/Comments
Electronic ground 1 M
AC 16 V supply 2 HF16_1 ± 16 V HF
AC 16 V supply 3 HF16_2 ± 16 V HF
Electronic ground 4 M
Thyristor firing pulse, field 1 5 IMP_F1 CMOS 5 V
Electronic ground 6 M
Thyristor firing pulse, field 2 7 IMP_F2 CMOS 5 V
Electronic ground 8 M
RS485 signal data + 9 ANKER_RS485_SP
RS485 signal data - 10 ANKER_RS485_SN
3.3 V supply 11 P3V3 3.3 V
RS485 signal direction + 12 ANKER_RS485_DP
RS485 signal direction – 13 ANKER_RS485_DN
Electronic ground 14 M
+24 V firing supply 15 P24_ZV 22 to 26 V
+24 V firing supply 16 P24_ZV 22 to 26 V
Electronic ground 17 M
Heat sink temperature sensor 18 KK_TEMP_FELD Analog
Electronic ground 19 M
Electronic ground 20 M
Power interface C98043-A7109/Field supply C98043-A7116

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

134 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Additional system components 7
Note
The components described here are used in several units in the SINAMICS family. The next
section may, therefore, contain references to manuals for these units.

The SINAMICS DC MASTER supports the following components from the SINAMICS drive
system:

CBE20 Communication Board

SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
TM15 Terminal Module
TM31 Terminal Module

In order to operate the SINAMICS DC MASTER with these components, it must be equipped
with (an) Advanced CUD(s); see the list of options in Chapter 2.
The Communication Board CBE20 can be ordered as an option for the SINAMICS DC
MASTER and is installed directly in the unit (in the OMI (Option Module Interface) slot of the
CUD).
The SMC30, TM15, and TM31 modules are installed separately and connected to the
SINAMICS DC MASTER via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface.

DRIVE-CLiQ interface
On the SINAMICS DC MASTER, up to 3 terminal modules TM15 / TM31 can be connected
to the DRIVE-CLiQ in any desired combination and in addition 1 Sensor Module Cabinet-
Mounted SMC30 can be connected.
The CUD features 2 DRIVE-CLiQ ports (X100, X101). Any combination of the modules can
be connected in series or in parallel. An SMC30 only possesses one DRIVE-CLiQ interface
and is, therefore, always the last module on the bus.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 135
Additional system components
7.1 Option Board: Communication Board CBE20

7.1 Option Board: Communication Board CBE20

7.1.1 Description
The SINAMICS DC MASTER can be connected to PROFINET using the Communication
Board CBE20 interface module. The CBE20 permits PROFINET IO with IRT support and
PROFINET IO with RT support. Mixed operation is not permissible. PROFINET CBA is not
supported.

7.1.2 Safety instructions

CAUTION
The Option Board should only be inserted and removed when the Control Unit and Option
Board are disconnected from the power supply.

CAUTION
The CBE20 must only be operated by qualified personnel. The ESD information must be
observed.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

136 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.1 Option Board: Communication Board CBE20

7.1.3 Interface description

7.1.3.1 Overview

3RUW

3RUW

;LQWHUIDFH
(WKHUQHWLQWHUIDFH
3RUW

3RUW

6\QFJUHHQDQG)DXOWUHG/('V

Figure 7-1 Interface description CBE20

MAC address
The MAC address of the Ethernet interface is located on the upper side of the board.

7.1.3.2 X1400 Ethernet interface

Table 7- 1 X1400 Port 1-4

Pin Signal name Technical specifications

1 RX+ Receive data +
2 RX- Receive data -
3 TX+ Transmit data +
4 --- Reserved, do not use
5 --- Reserved, do not use
6 TX- Transmit data -
7 --- Reserved, do not use
8 --- Reserved, do not use
Screened M_EXT Screen, permanently connected
backshell

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 137
Additional system components
7.1 Option Board: Communication Board CBE20

PROFINET

Cable and connector types

Information on PROFINET cables and connectors can be found in the following catalog:
Catalog IKPI, edition 2005
Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives
Order No. E86060-K6710-A101-B4

7.1.3.3 Meanings of the LEDs on the Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

Table 7- 2 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 – description of the LEDs

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

Link port - OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green Continuous A different device is connected to port x and a physical –
connection exists.
Activity port - OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Yellow Continuous Data is being received or sent at port x. –
Fault – OFF If the Link Port LED is green: –
The CBE20 is operating normally, data is being
exchanged with the configured IO Controller
Red Flashing • The response monitoring interval has elapsed. –
• Communications is interrupted.
• The IP address is incorrect.
• Incorrect or no configuration.
• Incorrect parameter settings.
• Incorrect or missing device name.
• IO Controller not connected/switched off, although an
Ethernet connection has been established.
• Other CBE20 errors
Continuous CBE20 bus error –
• No physical connection to a subnet/switch.
• Incorrect transmission rate
• Full duplex transmission is not activated.
Sync – OFF If the Link Port LED is green: –
Control Unit task system is not synchronized with the IRT
clock. An internal substitute clock is generated.
Green Flashing The Control Unit task system has synchronized with the –
IRT clock cycle and data is being exchanged.
Continuous Task system and MC-PLL have synchronized with the IRT –
clock.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

138 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.1 Option Board: Communication Board CBE20

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

OPT on the – OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
Control Unit tolerance range.
Communication Board either defective or not inserted.
Green Continuous Communication Board is ready and cyclic communication –
is taking place.
Flashing The Communication Board is ready, but cyclic –
0.5 Hz communication is not yet taking place.
Possible causes:
• At least one fault is present.
• Communication is being established.
Red Continuous Cyclic communication via PROFINET has not yet been –
established. However, non-cyclic communications are
possible. SINAMICS waits for a
parameterizing/configuring telegram
Flashing The firmware has not been successfully downloaded to –
0.5 Hz the CBE20 (error).
Possible causes:
• The CBE20 is defective.
• The memory card for the Control Unit is defective.
In this state CBE20 cannot be used.
Flashing Communication between the Control Unit and CBE20 is Correctly insert the
2,5 Hz faulty. board, if required,
Possible causes: replace.
• Board was withdrawn after booting.
• The board is defective
Orange Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
2,5 Hz

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 139
Additional system components
7.1 Option Board: Communication Board CBE20

7.1.4 Installation

 
Push the CBE20 into the option
module interface ① on the CUD from
above, and tighten the screws ②.
Tool: Torx T10 screwdriver
Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm

&%( 

&8'

Installing the CBE20

7.1.5 Technical specifications

Table 7- 3 Technical specifications

Communication Board CBE20 Unit Value

6SL3055-0AA00-2EBx
Max. current requirements (at 24 V DC) ADC 0,1
Power loss W 3
Weight kg <0,1

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

140 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Supported types
The SINAMICS DC MASTER only supports the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
with order number (MLFB) 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2. Other types may not be used. You can
easily identify whether the version is supported by the width of the module:

Table 7- 4 SMC30 types

SMC30 order number Width Use with SINAMICS DC MASTER

6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2 30 mm Possible
6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 50 mm Not possible
6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 50 mm Not possible

Number of SMC30s connected

The SINAMICS DC MASTER supports the connection of one Sensor Module Cabinet-
Mounted SMC30.

7.2.1 Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 evaluates encoder signals and transmits the
speed, actual position value, and, if necessary, the motor temperature and reference point
via DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC30 is used to evaluate encoder signals from encoders with TTL, HTL, or SSI
interfaces.
A combination of a TTL/HTL signal and SSI absolute signal is possible at terminals
X521/X531 if both signals are derived from the same measured variable.

7.2.2 Safety instructions

WARNING
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed.

NOTICE
Only one encoder system may be connected per Sensor Module.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 141
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Note
There must be no electrical connection between the encoder system enclosure and the
encoder system electronics (this requirement is fulfilled for most encoder systems). If this is
not carefully observed, under certain circumstances the system will not be able to reach the
required interference immunity level (there is then a danger of equalization currents flowing
through the electronics ground).

CAUTION
When the encoder system is connected via terminals, make sure that the cable shield is
connected to the component.

CAUTION
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the ground potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature-sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

142 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.3 Interface description

7.2.3.1 Overview

;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH

;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHU
VXSSO\

/('V

;
HQFRGHUV\VWHPLQWHUIDFH
+7/77/ZLWK
WUDFNPRQLWRULQJ
66,

$OWHUQDWLYHHQFRGHUV\VWHP
LQWHUIDFH ;
+7/77/ZLWK
WUDFNPRQLWRULQJ ;
66,

6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
01P

Figure 7-2 SMC30 interface description

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 143
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.3.2 Connection examples

Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal

;
. 
7UDFN$
. 
7UDFN$
. 
7UDFN%
. 
7UDFN%
. 
. 5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
8E 
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
0 
&75/

*URXQG

;

(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9

*URXQGIRUHQFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 7-3 Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal

Signal cables must be twisted in pairs in order to improve resistance to induced interference.

Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal

;
. 
7UDFN$

7UDFN$
. 
7UDFN%
. 
8E 7UDFN%
0 
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5

5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5

&75/

*URXQG

;

(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9

*URXQGHQFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 7-4 Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal1)

1) Becausethe physical transmission properties are more robust, the bipolar connection
should always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type
does not output push-pull signals.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

144 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Figure 7-5 Photo of connection example 2

Note:
Diagram of the wire jumpers for connecting unipolar HTL encoders with reference signal

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 145
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.3.3 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Table 7- 5 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Pin Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B GND (0 V) Electronics ground

7.2.3.4 X520 encoder system interface

Table 7- 6 X520 encoder system interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 Reserved, do not use
+ Temp Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC
2 Clock SSI clock
3 Clock* Inverse SSI clock
4 P encoder 5 V/24 V Encoder power supply
5 P encoder 5 V/24 V
6 P sense Sense input encoder power supply
7 M encoder (M) Ground for encoder power supply
8 Reserved, do not use
- Temp Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC
9 M sense Ground sense input
10 R Reference signal R
11 R* Inverse reference signal R
12 B* Inverse incremental signal B
13 B Incremental signal B
14 A*/data* Inverted incremental signal A/inverted SSI data
15 A/data Incremental signal A/SSI data

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

146 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

CAUTION
The encoder power supply can be parameterized to 5 V or 24 V. The encoder may be
destroyed if you enter the wrong parameters.

7.2.3.5 X521/X531 alternative encoder system interface

Table 7- 7 X521/X531 alternative encoder system interface

Pin Designation Technical data

X521 1 A Incremental signal A
2 A* Inverse incremental signal A
3 B Incremental signal B
4 B* Inverse incremental signal B
5 R Reference signal R
6 R* Inverse reference signal R
7 CTRL Control signal
8 M Ground

X531 1 P_Encoder 5 V/24 V Encoder power supply

2 M_Encoder Ground for encoder power supply
3 - Temp Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC
4 + Temp Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC
5 Clock SSI clock
6 Clock* Inverse SSI clock
7 Data SSI data
8 Data* Inverse SSI data
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2
When using unipolar HTL encoders, at the terminal block A*, B*, R* must be connected to (jumper) M_Encoder (X531)1).
1) Because the physical transmission properties are more robust, the bipolar connection

should always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type
does not output push-pull signals.

CAUTION
When the encoder system is connected via terminals, make sure that the cable shield is
connected to the component. Refer to the section titled "Electrical connection".

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 147
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.3.6 X524 electronic power supply

Table 7- 8 X524 terminal strip

Terminal Function Technical data

+ Electronic power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 – 28.8 V)
+

+ Electronic power supply Power consumption: Max. 0.55 A

M Electronics ground Max. current across
M

M Electronics ground jumper in connector: 20 A at 55 °C

Terminal type: Spring-loaded terminal
Connectable conductor cross-section: Flexible, 0.08 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
Stripped length: 8 to 9 mm
Tool: 0.4 × 2.0 mm screwdriver

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.

7.2.3.7 Meanings of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (SMC30)

Table 7- 9 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30 – description of the LEDs

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

RDY - Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
READY tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
light CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
light
Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
light Note: acknowledge fault
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/re Flashing, Firmware is being downloaded. –
d 0.5 Hz
Green/re Flashing, 2 Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON. Carry out a POWER
d Hz ON
Green/or Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144). –
ange Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/oran recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
ge

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

148 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

OUT > 5 V - Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Power supply ≤ 5 V.
Orange Continuous Electronics power supply for encoder system available. –
light Power supply > 5 V.
Important:
Make sure that the connected encoder can be operated
with a 24 V power supply. If an encoder that is designed
for a 5 V supply is operated with a 24 V supply, this can
destroy the encoder electronics.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 149
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.4 Dimension drawing














Figure 7-6 Dimension drawing of the SMC30

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

150 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.5 Installation

Installation
1. Place the component on the DIN rail.
2. Snap the component onto the DIN rail. Make sure that the mounting slides at the rear
latch into place.
3. You can now move the component on the DIN rail to the left or to the right, into its final
position.

Removal

5RWDWHVFUHZGULYHUZLWKDZLGHEODGH
WRPPWKURXJKrLQWKHVORWRIWKH
DVVHPEO\PHFKDQLVPRUDOWHUQDWLYHO\
SXVKWKHOXJGRZQZDUGV

Figure 7-7 SMC30 removal

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 151
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.6 Electrical connection

Shield supports are only required if the system is connected to X521/X531.
Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the SMC30

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ :HLGP¾OOHU
01P 7\SH./%ž&2
2UGHUQR

Figure 7-8 Shield supports for the SMC30

Weidmüller: http://www.weidmueller.com
The bending radii of the cables must be adhered to (see MOTION-CONNECT description).

NOTICE
Only use screws with a permissible mounting depth of 4 - 6 mm.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

152 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

7.2.7 Technical data

Table 7- 10 Technical data

Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 Designation Unit Value

6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2
Electronic power supply
Voltage VDC V 24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC A ≤ 0.20
Current (with encoder system) ADC A ≤ 0.55
Power loss W W ≤ 10
Encoder system power supply
Voltage Vencoder V 5 VDC (with or without Remote
Sense) 1) or VDC - 1 V
Current Aencoder A 0.35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated fencoder kHz ≤ 300
SSI baud rate kHz 100 - 250
PE/ground connection On enclosure with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0.45
(Order number
6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2)
0.8
(Order number
6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0, 6SL3055-
0AA00-5CA1)
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB
1)A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense
cables - with the reference supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply
voltage for the encoder system at the output of the drive module until the required supply
voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply). Remote Sense only to X520.

Table 7- 11 Specification of encoder systems that can be connected

Parameter Designation Threshold Min. Max. Unit

High signal level UHdiff 2 5 V
(TTL bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
Low signal level ULdiff -5 -2 V
(TTL bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
High signal level UH High 17 VCC V
(HTL unipolar) Low 10 VCC V
Low signal level UL High 0 7 V
(HTL unipolar) Low 0 2 V
High signal level UHdiff 3 VCC V
(HTL bipolar)2)
Low signal level ULdiff -VCC -3 V
(HTL bipolar)2)
High signal level UHdiff 2 5 V
(SSI bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
Low signal level ULdiff -5 -2 V
(SSI bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 153
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Parameter Designation Threshold Min. Max. Unit

Signal frequency fS - 300 kHz
Edge clearance tmin 100 - ns
"Zero pulse inactive time" tLo 500 (tALo-BHi - tHi)/2 3) ns
(before and after A=B=high)
"Zero pulse active time" tHi 500 tALo-BHi - 2*tLo 3) ns
(while A=B=high and beyond)4)
1) Other signal levels according to the RS 422 standard
2)The absolute level of the individual signals varies between 0 V and VCC of the encoder
system.
3) tALo-BHi
is not a specified value, but is the time between the falling edge of track A and the
next but one rising edge of track B.
4) Further information on setting the "Zero pulse active time" can be found in the following:
References: /FH1/ SINAMICS S120, Function Manual, tolerant encoder monitoring for
SMC30

Table 7- 12 Connectable encoders

X520 X521 X531 Track Remote Sense2)

(D-Sub) (terminal) (terminal) monitoring
HTL bipolar 24 V No/yes Yes No/yes No
HTL unipolar 24 V1) No/yes Yes (however, a bipolar No No
connection is recommended)1)
TTL bipolar 24 V Yes Yes Yes No
TTL bipolar 5 V Yes Yes Yes To X520
SSI 24 V/5 V Yes Yes No No
TTL unipolar No
1)Because the physical transmission properties are more robust, the bipolar connection
should always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type
does not output push-pull signals.
2)A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense
cables - with the reference supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply
voltage for the encoder system at the output of the drive module until the required supply
voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply).

Table 7- 13 Maximum encoder cable length

Encoder type Maximum encoder cable length

TTL1) 100 m
HTL unipolar2) 100 m
HTL bipolar 300 m
SSI 100 m
1) For TTL encoders at X520 → Remote Sense → 100 m
2)Because the physical transmission properties are more robust, the bipolar connection
should always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type
does not output push-pull signals.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

154 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

For encoders with a 5 V supply at X521/X531, the cable lengths (for 0.5 mm2 cable cross-
sections) depend on the sensor current:










&DEOHOHQJWK>P@












        

(QFRGHUSRZHU

Figure 7-9 Max. cable length as a function of the encoder current drawn

For encoders without Remote Sense the permissible cable length is restricted to 100 m
(reason: The voltage drop depends on the cable length and the encoder current).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 155
Additional system components
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

$$

%%

W 0LQ W 0LQ

IV

Figure 7-10 Signal characteristic of track A and track B between two edges: Time between two edges
with incremental encoders

$ದ$

%ದ%

5ದ5

7ROHUDQFHUDQJH 7ROHUDQFHUDQJH
W /R IRUULVLQJ W +, IRUIDOOLQJ W /R
HGJHRIWKH HGJHRIWKH
]HURSXOVH W $/R%+L ]HURSXOVH

Figure 7-11 Position of the zero pulse to the track signals

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

156 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.1 Description
The Terminal Module TM15 is a terminal expansion module for snapping on to a DIN EN
60715 mounting rail. The TM15 can be used to increase the number of available digital
inputs/outputs within a drive system.

Table 7- 14 Interface overview of the TM15

Type Quantity
Digital inputs/outputs 24 (isolation in 3 groups each with 8 DI/O)

7.3.2 Safety Information

WARNING
The 50 mm cooling clearances above and below the components must be observed.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 157
Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.3 Interface description

7.3.3.1 Overview

;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFHV
;

;HOHFWURQLFSRZHUVXSSO\

/('

;

GLJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV
; RQHJUHHQVWDWXV/('IRUHDFKFKDQQHO

;

6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
01P

Figure 7-12 TM15 interface description

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

158 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

Terminal type

X520, X521, X522

Terminal type Spring-loaded terminal
Connectable conductor Rigid/flexible 0.14 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
cross-section Flexible, with end sleeve without plastic sleeve 0.25 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
AWG/kcmil 26 to 20
Stripped length 8 mm
Tool 0.4 × 2.0 mm screwdriver
X524
Terminal type Spring-loaded terminal
Connectable conductor Flexible 0.08 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
cross-section
Stripped length 8 to 9 mm
Tool 0.4 × 2.0 mm screwdriver

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 159
Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.3.2 Connection example

 
([W
9 0 0

; ;
;
;



 / /

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW
9

 ',2 0

0 ',2
0

0 ',2
0

',2
0 
',2 

',2

',2

',2

0

7HUPLQDO0RGXOH70 ;

/ /

',2 0

',2

',2

',2
0 
',2 

',2

',2

',2

0

;

/ /

',2 0

',2

',2

',2
0 
',2 

',2

',2

',2

0

&DQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HGLQGLYLGXDOO\DVLQSXWRURXWSXW

Figure 7-13 Example connection of TM15

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

160 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.3.3 X500 and X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 7- 15 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X500 and X501

Pin Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate on DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Yamaichi company, Order No.: Y-ConAS-13

7.3.3.4 X524 electronic power supply

Table 7- 16 Terminals for the electronic power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronic power supply Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 – 28.8 V)
+ Electronic power supply Power consumption: Max. 0.15 A
+

M Electronics ground
Max. current via bridge in connector:
M

M Electronics ground 20 A at 60 °C

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The power consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node. The digital
outputs are supplied via terminals X520, X521, and X522.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 161
Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.3.5 X520 digital inputs/outputs

Table 7- 17 Screw terminal X520

Terminal Designation1 Technical data

1 L1+ See the section titled
 "Technical data"
2 DI/O 0
3 DI/O 1
4 DI/O 2
5 DI/O 3
;

6 DI/O 4
7 DI/O 5
8 DI/O 6
9 DI/O 7
 10 M1 (GND)

1 L1+: A 24 VDC infeed for DI/O 0 to 7 (first potential group) must always be connected if at

least one DI/O of the potential group is used as an output.

M1: A ground reference for DI/O 0 to 7 (first potential group) must always be connected if at
least one DI/O of the potential group is used as either an input or an output.
DI/O: Digital input/output

7.3.3.6 X521 digital inputs/outputs

Table 7- 18 Screw terminal X521

Terminal Designation1 Technical data

1 L2+ See the section titled
 "Technical data"
2 DI/O 8
3 DI/O 9
4 DI/O 10
5 DI/O 11
;

6 DI/O 12
7 DI/O 13
8 DI/O 14
9 DI/O 15
 10 M2 (GND)

1 L2+: A 24 VDC infeed for DI/O 8 to 15 (second potential group) must always be connected
if at least one DI/O of the potential group is used as an output.
M2: A ground reference for DI/O 8 to 15 (second potential group) must always be connected
if at least one DI/O of the potential group is used as either an input or an output.
DI/O: Digital input/output

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

162 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.3.7 X522 digital inputs/outputs

Table 7- 19 Screw terminal X522

Terminal Designation1 Technical data

1 L3+ See the section titled
 "Technical data"
2 DI/O 16
3 DI/O 17
4 DI/O 18
5 DI/O 19
;

6 DI/O 20
7 DI/O 21
8 DI/O 22
9 DI/O 23
 10 M3 (GND)

1L3+: A 24 VDC infeed for DI/O 16 to 23 (third potential group) must always be connected if
at least one DI/O of the potential group is used as an output.
M3: A ground reference for DI/O 16 to 23 (third potential group) must always be connected if
at least one DI/O of the potential group is used as either an input or an output.
DI/O: Digital input/output

7.3.3.8 Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM15

Table 7- 20 Terminal Module TM15 - description of LEDs

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

READY - OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
Note: acknowledge fault
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/re Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
d 0.5 Hz
Flashing 2 Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON Carry out a POWER
Hz ON
Green/or Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154). –
ange Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/oran recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
ge

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 163
Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

Cause and rectification of faults

The following reference contains information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S, Commissioning Manual

7.3.4 Dimension drawing













Figure 7-14 Dimension drawing of the TM15

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

164 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.5 Installation

Installation
1. Place the component on the DIN rail.
2. Snap the component on to the DIN rail. Make sure that the mounting slides at the rear
latch into place.
3. You can now move the component on the DIN rail to the left or to the right to its final
position.

Removal

3XVKWKHPRGXOH
IRUZDUG

0RXQWLQJVOLGH

3XVKOXJGRZQ

Figure 7-15 Releasing the component from a DIN rail

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 165
Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.6 Electrical connection

It is always advisable to shield the digital I/O wiring.
The following figures show typical Weidmüller shield connection clamps for the shield
supports.

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ :HLGP¾OOHU
01P 7\SH./%ž&2
2UGHUQR

Figure 7-16 Shield support

Internet address of the company:

Weidmüller: http://www.weidmueller.com

DANGER
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.

NOTICE
Only use screws with a permissible mounting depth of 4 - 6 mm.

The TM15 enclosure is connected to the ground terminal of the module supply (terminal
X524). If the ground terminal is actually grounded, then the enclosure is also grounded. An
additional ground connection using the M4 screw is especially necessary if high equipotential
bonding currents can flow (e.g. through the cable shield).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

166 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

Connector encoding
Siemens supplies a series of coding keys ("coding sliders") with each Terminal Module
TM15. To encode a connector, you must insert at least one coding slider and cut off a coding
lug on the connector:

,QVHUWFRGLQJ
VOLGHU

&XWRIIWKHFRGLQJOXJ
RQWKHFRQQHFWRU

Figure 7-17 Procedure for encoding a connector

To prevent wiring errors, unique encoding schemes can be defined for the X520, X521, and
X522 connectors. Examples of possible schemes:
● 3 connectors on one component are encoded differently (i.e. X520, X521, and X522).
● Different component types are encoded differently.
● Identical components on the same machine are encoded differently (e.g. several TM15-
type components).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 167
Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

7.3.7 Technical data

Table 7- 21 Technical data

Terminal Module TM15 Unit Value

6SL3055-0AA00-3FAx
Electronic power supply
Voltage VDC 24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital outputs) ADC 0.15
Power loss W <3
Ambient temperature up to an altitude of 2,000 m °C 0 to 60
Storage temperature °C -40 to +85
Relative humidity 5% to 95%, no condensation
Peripherals
• Digital inputs/outputs Can be parameterized as either DI or DO
• Number of digital inputs/outputs 24
• Electrical isolation Yes, in groups of 8
• Max. cable length m 30
Digital inputs
• Voltage VDC -30 to +30
• Low level (an open digital input is interpreted as VDC -30 to +5
"low")
• High level VDC 15 to 30
• Input impedance kΩ 2.8
• Power consumption (at 24 VDC) mA 11
• Max. voltage in OFF state VDC 5
• Current in OFF state mA 0.0 to 1.0 (per channel)
• Typical input delay of the digital inputs μs L → H: 50
H → L: 100
Digital outputs (continuous short-circuit proof)
• Voltage VDC 24
• Max. load current per digital output ADC 0.5
• Output delay (resistive load)
• Typical μs L → H: 50
H → L: 150
• Maximum μs L → H: 100
H → L: 225
• Min. output pulse μs 125 (typ.)
350 (max.)
(100% amplitude, 0.5 A with resistive load)
• Max. switching frequency kHz 1 (typ.)
(100% amplitude, 50% / 50% duty cycle, with
0.5 A and a resistive load)
• Voltage drop in ON state VDC 0.75 (max.) for maximum load in all
circuits

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

168 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.3 Terminal Module TM15

Terminal Module TM15 Unit Value

6SL3055-0AA00-3FAx
• Leakage current in OFF state μA Max. 10 per channel
• Voltage drop, output VDC 0.5
(I/O power supply to the output)
• Max. total current of outputs (per group)
up to 60 °C
up to 50 °C ADC 2
up to 40 °C ADC 3
ADC 4
IEC enclosure specification IP20 protection
Protective conductor connection On enclosure with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Response time The response time for the digital inputs/outputs (TM15 DI/DO)
consists of the following elements:
• Response time on the component itself (approx. 1/2 DRIVE-CLiQ
cycle).
• Transmission time via the DRIVE-CLiQ connection (approx. 1
DRIVE-CLiQ cycle)
• Evaluation on the Control Unit (see function diagram)
References: SINAMICS DCM List Manual, "Function diagrams"
chapter
Weight kg 0.86
Approvals UL and cULus
http://www.ul.com
File: E164110, Vol. 2, Sec. 9

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 169
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4 Terminal Module TM31

Supported types
The SINAMICS DC MASTER only supports one version of the Terminal Module TM31:

Table 7- 22 TM31 types

TM31 order number Use with SINAMICS DC MASTER

6SL3055-0AA00-3AA0 Not possible
6SL3055-0AA00-3AA1 Possible

7.4.1 Description
The Terminal Module TM31 is a terminal expansion module for snapping on to a DIN EN
60715 mounting rail. Terminal Module TM31 can be used to increase the number of
available digital inputs/digital outputs and also the number of analog inputs/analog outputs
within a drive system.
The TM31 contains the following terminals:

Table 7- 23 Interface overview of the TM31

Type Quantity
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 2
Digital inputs 8
Digital inputs/outputs 4
Analog inputs 2
Analog outputs 2
Relay outputs 2
Temperature sensor input 1

7.4.2 Safety Information

WARNING
The 50 mm clearances above and below the components must be observed.

CAUTION
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the chassis potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

170 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3 Interface description

7.4.3.1 Overview

; '5,9(&/L4
,QWHUIDFHV
;
;
(OHFWURQLFV
SRZHU 6
VXSSO\ 9ROWDJHFXUUHQW
PHDVXUHPHQW

; /('V
$X[LOLDU\YROWDJH
IRU
'LJLWDOLQSXWV ;
$QDORJLQSXWV
;
'LJLWDO
LQSXWV
RXWSXWV
;
$QDORJRXWSXWV

;
'LJLWDO
LQSXWV ;
5HOD\RXWSXWV
;

6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
01P

Figure 7-18 Interface description TM31

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 171
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

Terminal type

X520, X521, X522, X530, X540, X541

Terminal type Spring-loaded terminal
Connectable conductor Rigid/flexible 0.14 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
cross-section Flexible, with end sleeve without plastic sleeve 0.25 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
AWG/kcmil 26 to 20
Stripped length 8 mm
Tool 0.4 × 2.0 mm screwdriver
X524
Terminal type Spring-loaded terminal
Connectable conductor Flexible 0.08 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
cross-section
Stripped length 8 to 9 mm
Tool 0.4 × 2.0 mm screwdriver
X542
Terminal type Spring-loaded terminal
Connectable conductor Rigid 0.2 mm2 to 1 mm2
cross-section Flexible 0.2 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
Flexible, with end sleeve without plastic sleeve 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
Flexible, with end sleeve with plastic sleeve 0.25 mm2 to 0.75 mm2
AWG/kcmil 24 to 16
Stripped length 8 mm
Tool 0.4 × 2.0 mm screwdriver

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

172 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3.2 Connection example

 
([W
9 0 0

; ;
; ;

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW 

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW 
 
 
9 $,
 
9 $,
0 
0 $,
0 
0 $,

3 


0
 
1
7HUPLQDO0RGXOH70
0 

;
 ', ;
 ', 0 
$29 9
 ', 
0 $2
 ', 
$2& 2
0 
 
$29 9
0
  0 
0 $2

$2& 2

 7HPS
;

  7HPS
9

9
 ;
9 
9 

9 
 ','2

9 
 ','2
 9 
 ','2

9 
 ','2

9 
0

; ;
 ', 

 ', 0 
'2
 ', 0 

 ', 
0
 
0 '2
 0
 
0

 )RUWKLVFLUFXLWH[DPSOHWKHMXPSHUV
PXVWEHLQVHUWHG 6KLHOGLQJUHTXLUHG

 
&DQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HGLQGLYLGXDOO\DVFXUUHQWVRXUFH
 &DQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HGLQGLYLGXDOO\DVRXWSXW

Figure 7-19 TM31 connection example

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 173
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3.3 X500 and X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 7- 24 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X500 and X501

Pin Signal name Technical specifications

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Blanking plate on DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Yamaichi company, Order No.: Y-ConAS-13

7.4.3.4 X524 electronic power supply

Table 7- 25 Terminals for the electronic power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronic power supply Voltage: 24 VDC (20.4 – 28.8 V)
+ Electronic power supply Power consumption: Max. 0.5 A
+

M Electronics ground
Max. current via bridge in connector:
M

M Electronics ground 20 A at 55 ℃

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The power consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node and digital
outputs.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

174 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3.5 X520, X530 digital inputs

Table 7- 26 Screw terminal X520

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 DI 0 Voltage: - 3 to +30 V
2 DI 1 Typical power consumption: 10 mA at 24 VDC
Input delay:
3 DI 2 - For "0" to "1": typ. 50 µs max. 100 µs
4 DI 3 - For "1" to "0": typ. 130 µs max. 150 µs
5 M1 Electrical isolation: Reference potential is
Terminal M1
6 M Level (incl. ripple)
High level: 15 to 30 V
Low level: -3 to +5 V

Table 7- 27 Screw terminal X530

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 DI 0 Voltage: - 3 to +30 V
2 DI 1 Typical power consumption: 10 mA at 24 VDC
Input delay:
3 DI 2 - For "0" to "1": typ. 50 µs max. 100 µs
4 DI 3 - For "1" to "0": typ. 130 µs max. 150 µs
5 M2 Electrical isolation: Reference potential is
Terminal M1
6 M Level (incl. ripple)
High level: 15 to 30 V
Low level: -3 to +5 V
1) DI: Digital input; M: Electronics ground; M1, M2: Ground reference

NOTICE
An open input is interpreted as "low".
To enable the digital inputs (DI) to function, terminal M1 must be connected.
This is carried out by:
1) Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs, or
2) Providing a jumper to terminal M1 or M2.
(Notice! This removes electrical isolation for these digital inputs).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 175
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3.6 X540 auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs

Table 7- 28 Screw terminal X540

Terminal Designation Technical data

8 +24 V Voltage: +24 VDC
7 +24 V Max. total load current of +24 V auxiliary voltage for
6 +24 V terminals X540 and X541 combined: 150 mA

5 +24 V
4 +24 V
3 +24 V
2 +24 V
1 +24 V

Note
This power supply is only used for powering the digital inputs.

7.4.3.7 X521 analog inputs

Table 7- 29 X521 terminal strip

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 AI 0+ The analog inputs can be toggled between current and
2 AI 0- voltage input using switches S5.0 and S5.1.
Voltage: -10 to 10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ
3 AI 1+ Resolution: 11 bits + sign
4 AI 1- Current: Ri = 250 Ω
Resolution: 10 bits + sign
5 P10 Auxiliary voltage:
6 M P10 = 10 V
N10 = -10 V
7 N10
Continuous short-circuit proof
8 M
1) AI: Analog inputs; P10/N10: Auxiliary voltage; M: Ground reference

CAUTION
If more than ±35 mA flows through the analog current input, then the component could be
destroyed.
Permissible input voltage ±30 V (destruction limit).
Permissible common-mode voltage ±10 V, increased faults if exceeded.
Permissible back-EMF at the auxiliary voltage outputs ±15 V.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

176 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3.8 Analog inputs current/voltage switch

Table 7- 30 Current/voltage selector switch S5

Switch Function
S5.0 Switchover of voltage (V)/current (I) Al0
S5.1 Switchover of voltage (V)/current (I) Al1

7.4.3.9 X522 analog outputs/temperature sensor

Table 7- 31 X522 terminal strip

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 AO 0V+ You can set the following output signals using parameters:
2 AO 0- Voltage: -10 to 10 V (max. 3 mA)

3 AO 0C+ Current 1: 4 to 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)

4 AO 1V+ Current 2: -20 to 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)
5 AO 1- Current 3: 0 to 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)
6 AO 1C+ Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Continuous short-circuit proof
7 + Temp Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC
8 - Temp
1) AO xV: Analog output voltage; AO xC: Analog output current

CAUTION
Permissible back-EMF at the outputs: ±15 V

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 177
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3.10 X541 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Table 7- 32 Terminals for bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

6 M Auxiliary voltage:
5 DI/DO 11 Voltage: +24 VDC
Max. total load current of +24 V auxiliary voltage for
4 DI/DO 10 terminals X540 and X541 combined: 150 mA
3 DI/DO 9 As input:
2 DI/DO 8 Voltage: -3 to 30 V
1 +24 V Typical power consumption: 10 mA at 24 VDC
Input delay:
- For "0" to "1": Typ. 50 μs
- For "1" to "0": Typ. 100 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 VDC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Max. total current of outputs (including currents in the
inputs): 100 mA/1 A (can be parameterized)
Continuous short-circuit proof
Output delay:
- For "0" to "1": Typ. 150 μs at 0.5 A resistive load (500
μs maximum)
- For "1" to "0": Typ. 50 μs at 0.5 A resistive load
1) DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output; M: Electronics ground

Note
An open input is interpreted as "low".

Note
If a the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, the digital outputs are deactivated during this time.

7.4.3.11 X542 relay outputs

Table 7- 33 X542 terminal strip

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 DO 0.NC Contact type: Two-way contact max. load current: 8 A
2 DO 0.COM Max. switching voltage: 250 VAC, 30 VDC
3 DO 0.NO Max. switching power at 250 VAC: 2,000 VA (cosϕ = 1)
4 DO 1.NC Max. switching power at 250 VAC: 750 VA (cosϕ = 0.4)
5 DO 1.COM Max. switching power at 30 VDC: 240 W (resistive load)
6 DO 1.NO Required minimum current: 100 mA
Overvoltage category: Class III to EN 60664-1
1) DO: Digital output; NO: Normally open contact; NC: Normally closed contact; COM: Mid-
position contact

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

178 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.3.12 Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM31

Table 7- 34 Terminal Module TM31 - description of LEDs

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

READY - OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
Red Continuous At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and
Note: acknowledge fault
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/re Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
d 0.5 Hz
Flashing 2 Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON Carry out a POWER
Hz ON
Green/or Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154). –
ange Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/oran recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
ge

7.4.3.13 Cause and rectification of faults

Cause and rectification of faults

The following reference contains information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S, Commissioning Manual

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 179
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.4 Dimension drawing















Figure 7-20 Dimension drawing of the TM31

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

180 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.5 Installation

Installation
1. Place the component on the DIN rail.
2. Snap the component on to the DIN rail. Make sure that the mounting slides at the rear
latch into place.
3. You can now move the component on the DIN rail to the left or to the right to its final
position.

Removal

3XVKWKHPRGXOH
IRUZDUG

0RXQWLQJVOLGH

3XVKOXJGRZQ

Figure 7-21 Releasing the component from a DIN rail

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 181
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.6 Electrical connection

It is always advisable to shield the digital input/output wiring.
The following figures show typical Weidmüller shield connection clamps for the shield
supports.

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ :HLGP¾OOHU
01P 7\SH./%ž&2
2UGHUQR

Figure 7-22 Shield supports

Internet address of the company:

Weidmüller: http://www.weidmueller.com

DANGER
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.

NOTICE
Only use screws with a permissible mounting depth of 4 - 6 mm.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

182 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

Connector encoding
To ensure that identical connectors are assigned correctly on the TM31, the connectors are
encoded as shown in the diagram below.

&RQQHFWRUHQFRGLQJ

Figure 7-23 TM31 connector encoding

The bending radii of the cables must be adhered to (see MOTION-CONNECT description).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 183
Additional system components
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

7.4.7 Technical data

Table 7- 35 Technical data

Unit Value
Electronic power supply
Voltage VDC 24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital ADC 0.5
outputs)
Power loss W < 10
PE/ground connection On enclosure with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Response time The response time for the digital inputs/outputs and the analog inputs/outputs
consists of the following elements:
• Response time on the component itself (approx. 1/2 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Transmission time via the DRIVE-CLiQ connection (approx. 1 DRIVE-CLiQ
cycle)
• Evaluation on the Control Unit (see function diagram)
References: SINAMICS DCM List Manual, "Function diagrams" chapter
Weight kg 1

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

184 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Commissioning 8
WARNING
The manufacturer can only provide an assurance that the SINAMICS DCM Control Module
will function properly and accept any liability for damage if the unit has been installed and
commissioned by experts and the contents of these Operating Instructions have been
correctly followed.

WARNING
The units carry dangerous electrical voltages and control rotating mechanical parts (drives).
Failure to comply with these Operating Instructions can lead to death, serious physical
injury, and material damage.
Dangerous voltage levels may be present at the signaling relays at the customer's site. The
units must not be connected to a supply with a ground-fault circuit interrupter (VDE 0610,
Section 6.5) since, in the event of a short-circuit to an exposed conductive part or a ground
fault, the fault current may contain a direct component that prevents or hinders the tripping
of a higher-level ground-fault circuit interrupter. In this case, all loads connected to this
ground-fault circuit interrupter will also be without protection.
Only qualified personnel who are familiar with all the safety instructions in this description,
as well as the installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, should carry out work
on this unit.
Perfect, safe, and reliable operation of this unit is conditional upon it having been
transported, stored, mounted, and installed correctly, as well as carefully operated and
serviced.
The unit is subject to dangerous voltage levels even when the converter unit's line
contactor is open. The control module (the printed circuit board at the bottom, mounted
directly on the housing) contains many electrical circuits carrying dangerous voltage levels.
Before commencing maintenance or servicing work, disconnect all current sources of the
converter infeed and disable them.
These instructions are not exhaustive and as such cannot outline all the measures required
in order to operate the unit safely. Where necessary, additional information or instructions
may be required for special applications. If you encounter specific problems which have not
been handled in enough detail for the purposes of the buyer, please contact your local
Siemens office.
The use of non-approved parts for carrying out repair work on the unit or handling of the
unit by inadequately qualified personnel will result in dangerous conditions with the risk of
death, serious physical injury, or extensive damage to equipment. All safety measures
listed in these Operating Instructions, as well as all warning signs attached to the unit, must
be followed.
Please take note of all the warnings contained in these Operating Instructions.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 185
Commissioning
7.4 Terminal Module TM31

CAUTION
Before coming into contact with modules (and in particular the CUDs), the operator must be
electrostatically discharged in order to protect electronic components against high voltages
that are produced by electrostatic charging. The easiest way to do this is to touch a
conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (for example, the bare metal part of a
control cabinet).
Modules must not come into contact with highly insulating materials (such as plastic sheets,
insulated desktops, or articles of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers).
Modules must only be placed on conductive surfaces.

NOTICE
During a saving process triggered by the user, the electronic power supply for the
SINAMICS DC MASTER must not be interrupted.
An active saving process is indicated by the following actions:
• The RDY LED flashes (see the "Description of functions" chapter, "Description of the
LEDs on the CUD" section)
• The BOP20 flashes
Interrupting the power supply while saving can lead to the loss of the current device
parameter assignments. Also refer to the "Operation" chapter, "CompactFlash Card
functions" section.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

186 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.1 Switching on

8.1 Switching on
After the device is turned on (POWER ON), the drive powers up. Power-up up to operating
state 7.0 in the SINAMICS DCM with the parameters saved (RAM to ROM was carried out)
takes approx. 45 s. Power-up without the saved parameters (first commissioning) takes
approx. 60 s.

Table 8- 1 SINAMICS DCM ramp-up times

BOP20 display CUD LED status Ramp-up time 1) Ramp-up time 2)

- RDY: Red POWER ON POWER ON
DP1: Red
- RDY: Orange 15 s 15 s
DP1: Red
Light on the BOP20 RDY: Orange 30 s 30 s
DP1: Red
Display "run up" RDY: Orange 35 s 35 s
DP1: Red
Operating state 12.4 RDY: Green 40 s 55 s
DP1: -
Operating state 7.0 RDY: Green 45 s 60 s
DP1: -
1) Power-up with saved parameters (RAM to ROM was carried out)
2) Power up during first commissioning (before the first RAM to ROM)
The status of the LEDs on the CUD (refer also to the "Description of functions" chapter,
"Description of the LEDs on the CUD" section) is only visible if the device cover is open. If
the enclosure front is closed, the first device reaction after POWER ON is visible only after
approx. 30 s.

Note
If options are being used (DCC, CBE20, SMC30, TM15, TM31, etc.) and in the case of
certain device configurations, the duration of the power-up increases.

Note
If an external CompactFlash Card with previously saved data is plugged into the drive during
power-up, the drive powers up based on the parameter assignments saved on the card
(refer also to the "Operation" chapter, "CompactFlash Card functions" section).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 187
Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

8.2.1 Preconditions

SINAMICS basics
If you are not yet familiar with SINAMICS basics (parameters, drive objects, BICO
technology, and so on), please read "Basics" in the section titled "Operation" before starting
commissioning.

BOP20 operator panel

If you are not yet familiar with the BOP20 operator panel, please read "Assigning parameters
using the BOP20" in the section titled "Operation" before starting commissioning.

Notation of the parameters

Expressed in full, a parameter consists of
the drive object + parameter number + index, with the following notation:

(oo)pxxxxx[ii] for indexed parameters

(oo)pxxxxx for non-indexed parameters
To make these easier to read, in this chapter the drive object specification has been omitted
from all parameters belonging to the "automatic speed control" drive object (= drive object 2).
For example, the specification p50076[1] refers to parameter (2)p50076[1] (= drive object 2,
parameter 50076, index 1).

8.2.2 Commissioning steps

Note:
Parameters with [D] are data-set dependent. Commissioning must be carried out for each
data set.

〈1〉Access authorization

Access level
(1)p0003 = 1 Standard
(1)p0003 = 2 Advanced
(1)p0003 = 3 Expert

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

188 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

〈2〉Define the external power unit

p51819[0] Transformation ratio for armature voltage transformer

p51819[1] Transformation ratio for field voltage transformer
p51820 Rated armature supply voltage
p51821[0] Connection of line measurement cables
p51821[1] Connection of armature measurement cables
p51822 Rated armature DC current
p51823 Load voltage at rated armature current
p51824 Current transformer configuration
p51825 Type of power unit
p51826[0] Length of first pulse
p51826[1] Length of other pulses
p51829 Heat sink temperature threshold
p51830 Sensor for heat sink temperature
p51831 Fuse monitoring
p51832 Monitoring of unit fan
p51833 External fault
p51834 Source of fan relay output
p51835[0] Monitoring of unit fan's ON delay
p51835[1] Fault involving unit fan's ON delay
p51835[2] Alarm involving unit fan's ON delay

〈3〉Adjust the rated unit currents

The rated armature DC current for the unit must be adjusted by making a setting at
p50076[0] (in %) or p50067 if:
Maximum armature current < 0.5 × rated armature DC current for the unit

The rated field DC current for the unit must be adjusted by making a setting at p50076[1]
(in %) if:
Maximum field current < 0.5 × rated field DC current for the unit

〈4〉Adjust to the actual unit supply voltage

p50078[0] Rated value for armature supply voltage (in volts)

p50078[1] Rated value for field supply voltage (in volts)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 189
Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

〈5〉Enter the motor data

The motor data, as specified on the motor rating plate, must be entered in the following
parameters (see also the sections titled "Thermal overload protection for the DC motor" and
"Speed-dependent current limitation"):

p50100[D] Rated armature current (in amperes)

p50101[D] Rated armature voltage (in volts)
p50102[D] Rated excitation current (in amperes)
p50104[D] Speed n1 (in rpm)
p50105[D] Armature current I1 (in amperes)
p50106[D] Speed n2 (in rpm)
p50107[D] Armature current I2 (in amperes)
p50108[D] Maximum operating speed n3 (in rpm)
p50109[D] 1 = Speed-dependent current limitation active
p50114[D] Motor thermal time constant (in seconds)

〈6〉Data for actual speed value acquisition

〈6.1〉Operation with analog tachometer

p50083[D] = 1 The actual speed value comes from the "Main actual value" (r52013)
channel
(terminals XT.103, XT.104).
p50741[D] Tachometer voltage at maximum speed (– 270.00 to +270.00 V)
Remark:
The value set here determines the 100% speed for the closed-loop speed
control.
p2000 Speed in rpm for tachometer voltage set on p50741[0]
Remark 1:
The value set here does not influence the closed-loop speed control. It only
influences the readout data at r020, r021, r060, and r063 (physical speed).
Remark 2:
Parameter p2000 and parameters r020, r021, r060, and r063 are not data-
set dependent. For that reason, the physical speed can only be displayed
correctly for one data set (DDS).

〈6.2〉Operation with incremental encoder

p50083[D] = 2 The actual speed value comes from an incremental encoder (r0061)
connected to terminal block X177.
p0400[0] Encoder type selection
p2000 Speed in rpm at 100% speed
Remark:
The value set here determines the 100% speed for the closed-loop speed
control.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

190 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

〈6.3〉Operation without tachometer (closed-loop EMF control)

p50083[D] = 3 The actual speed value comes from the "Actual EMF value" channel
(r52287),
but is evaluated with p50115.
p50115[D] EMF at 100% speed
(1.00 to 140.00% of unit rated supply voltage (p50078[0]))
Remark:
The value set here determines the 100% speed for the closed-loop speed
control.
p2000 Speed in rpm for EMF set on p50115[0]
Remark 1:
The value set here does not influence the closed-loop speed control. It only
influences the readout data at r020, r021, r060, and r063 (physical speed).
Remark 2:
Parameter p2000 and parameters r020, r021, r060, and r063 are not data-
set dependent. For that reason, the physical speed can only be displayed
correctly for one data set (DDS).

〈6.4〉Freely-wired actual value

p50083[D] = 4 The actual-value input is defined with p50609[C]
p50609[C] Number of the parameter that is switched to the actual speed controller
value
p2000 Speed in rpm at which the parameter selected on p50609[0] accepts the
value 100%
Remark 1:
The value set here does not influence the closed-loop speed control. It only
influences the readout data at r020, r021, r060, and r063 (physical speed).
Remark 2:
Parameter p2000 and parameters r020, r021, r060, and r063 are not data-
set dependent. For that reason, the physical speed can only be displayed
correctly for one data set (CDS).

〈6.5〉Operation with incremental encoder and SMC30

p50083[D] = 5 The actual speed value comes from an incremental encoder connected to
an SMC30 (r3770).
p0400[1] Encoder type selection
p2000 Speed in rpm at 100% speed
Remark:
The value set here determines the 100% speed for the closed-loop speed
control.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 191
Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

〈7〉Data for field

〈7.1〉Control of the field

p50082 = 0 Internal field is not used
(e.g. in the case of permanent-magnet motors)
p50082 = 1 The field is activated with the line contactor
(field pulses are activated or deactivated at the same time as the line
contactor)
p50082 = 2 Automatic switching-in of the standstill field set using p50257 after a time
that can be parameterized using p50258 has elapsed, once operating state
o7 or higher has been reached
p50082 = 3 Field current permanently switched on
p50082 = 4 Field with Auxiliaries ON signal activated

〈7.2〉Field weakening
p50081 = 0 No speed-dependent or EMF-dependent field weakening
p50081 = 1 Field-weakening operation by means of internal closed-loop EMF control,
so that in the field-weakening range, i.e. at speeds above the rated motor
speed (= "cut-in speed"), the motor EMF is constantly kept at setpoint
EMFset (r52289) = p50101 – p50100 * p50110

〈8〉Set basic technological functions

〈8.1〉Current limits
p50171[D] System current limit in torque direction I (as % of p50100)
p50172[D] System current limit in torque direction II (as % of p50100)

〈8.2〉Torque limits
p50180[D] Torque limit 1 in torque direction I
(as % of rated motor torque)
p50181[D] Torque limit 1 in torque direction II
(as % of rated motor torque)

〈8.3〉Ramp-function generator
p50303[D] Ramp-up time 1 (in seconds)
p50304[D] Ramp-down time 1 (in seconds)
p50305[D] Initial rounding 1 (in seconds)
p50306[D] Final rounding 1 (in seconds)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

192 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

〈9〉Complete quick commissioning

Set p3900 = 3.
This triggers the calculation of the motor data (Ra, La, Lf) as well as the calculation of the
controller parameters resulting from the data that was entered in the previous steps.
p3900 is then reset to 0 and quick commissioning is ended, i.e. p0010 is reset to 0.

〈10〉Execute optimization runs

〈10.1〉The drive must be in operating state o7.0 or o7.1 (enter SHUTDOWN).

〈10.2〉Select one of the following optimization runs using parameter p50051:

p50051 = 24 Optimization of closed-loop field-current control
p50051 = 25 Optimization of closed-loop armature-current control
p50051 = 26 Optimization of closed-loop speed control by means of step response
p50051 = 27 Optimization of closed-loop EMF control (incl. field characteristic curve
plotting)
p50051 = 28 Optimization of friction and inertia compensation (starting from SW 1.2)
p50051 = 29 Optimization of closed-loop speed control by means of Bode diagram
(starting from SW 1.2)

〈10.3〉 The SINAMICS DC MASTER enters operating state o7.4 for a few
seconds, then enters o7.0 or o7.1 and waits for SWITCH ON and
OPERATION ENABLE to be entered.
Enter commands SWITCH ON and OPERATION ENABLE.
If the switch-on command is not entered within 30 s, the unit stops waiting
and outputs fault F60052.

〈10.4〉 Execution of the optimization run starts once operating state <o1.0
(OPERATION) is reached.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 193
Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

p50051 = 24 Optimization of closed-loop field-current control

(duration of up to 1 min.)
This optimization run may also be executed without a mechanical load
connected.
The following parameters are set automatically:
p50112, field resistance (Rf)
p50116, field inductance (Lf)
p50255, P gain of field-current controller (Kp)
p50256, integral time of field-current controller (Tn)
p51597 field inductance reduction factor
p50051 = 25 Optimization of closed-loop armature-current control
(duration of up to 1 min.)
The current controller optimization run may also be executed without a
mechanical load connected; if necessary, the drive will need to be locked.
The following parameters are set automatically:
p50110, armature resistance (Ra)
p50111, armature inductance (La)
p51591, non-linearity factor of armature inductance (La_fak)
p50155 P gain of armature-current controller (Kp)
p50156, integral time of armature-current controller (Tn)

CAUTION
Motors with a permanent field, a very high level of retentivity, or a series field must be
locked during this optimization run.

WARNING
The current limits set are not active during the current controller optimization run. 75% of
the rated armature current for the motor flows for approximately 0.7 s. Individual current
crests with a peak value of approx. 120% of the motor's rated armature current are also
generated.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

194 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

p50051 = 26 Optimization of closed-loop speed control by means of step response

(duration at least 6 s.)
p50236 can be used to select the dynamic response level of the closed-
loop speed control circuit, where lower values have a smoother effect in
terms of closed-loop control. p50236 must be set before the speed
controller optimization run is executed and affects the setting of p50225,
p50226, p50228, and p50540.
Where possible, the final mechanical load should be connected to the
motor for the purpose of optimizing the speed controller, as the parameters
set depend on the measured moment of inertia.
The following parameters are set automatically:
p50225, P gain of speed controller (Kp)
p50226, integral time of speed controller (Tn)
p50228, speed setpoint smoothing time constant
p50540 speed controller acceleration time
Remark:
The speed controller optimization run only takes into account the filtering,
set using p50200, of the actual speed controller value and - if p50083 = 1 -
the filtering, set using p50745, of the main actual value.
If p50200 < 20 ms, P50225 (gain) is limited to 30.00.

WARNING
During the speed controller optimization run, the motor is accelerated at a maximum of 45%
of its rated armature current. The motor can reach speeds of up to approximately 20% of
the maximum speed.

p50051 = 27 Optimization of closed-loop EMF control (incl. field characteristic curve

plotting)
(duration approx. 1 min.)
This optimization run must be executed whenever field-weakening
operation has been selected (p50081 = 1), if closed-loop torque control
(p50170 = 1) or torque limiting (p50169 = 1) has been selected, or if a
variable field-current setpoint has been entered.
This optimization run may also be started without a mechanical load. The
following parameters are set automatically:
p50120 to Field characteristic (magnetization characteristic) of motor
p50139
p50275 P gain of EMF controller (Kp)
p50276 Integral time of EMF controller (Tn)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 195
Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

Remark:
In order to determine the magnetization characteristic, during this
optimization run the field-current setpoint is reduced to a minimum value of
8% (starting from 100% of the motor's rated excitation current as specified
in p50102). Setting p50103 to values < 50% of p50102 for the duration of
this optimization run limits the value entered for the field-current setpoint to
the minimum value specified in p50103. This may be necessary for
uncompensated motors with an extremely high armature reaction.
The magnetization characteristic approaches 0 along a linear path (starting
from the measuring point), with the minimum field-current setpoint.
To execute this optimization run, the minimum excitation current for the
motor (p50103) must be set to a lower value than 50% of the motor's rated
excitation current (p50102).

WARNING
During this optimization run, the drive ramps up to approximately 80% of the rated motor
speed (the armature voltage is a maximum of 80% of the rated armature voltage for the
motor (p50101)).

〈10.5〉When the optimization run is complete, the drive enters operating state o7.2.

NOTICE
To avoid triggering fault F60052 in the case of drives with a limited traversing distance, the
SHUTDOWN command should not be used to interrupt the optimization run for field
weakening (p50051 = 27) until the 1st field-weakening measuring point has been recorded,
or to interrupt the optimization run for friction and moment of inertia compensation (p50051
= 28) until the measuring point has been determined at 10% of the maximum speed. Once
the optimization run in question (p50051 = 27 or p50051 = 28) has been restarted, it will
resume at a more advanced point, meaning that it can be completed in several stages even
in cases where the traversing distance is limited.

In the following cases, each optimization run is worked through again completely after a
restart:
• If a fault occurs during the optimization run
• If the electronics supply is switched off prior to restarting the optimization run in question
• If a different drive data set from the previous one is selected
• If a different optimization run is started in the meantime
The parameters for the drive data set that has been selected in each case are optimized.
The drive data set selection must remain the same throughout the optimization runs to
avoid producing a fault.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

196 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

Note
The optimization runs should be performed in the order specified above. The parameters
determined are dependent on the motor temperature, but the values that are set
automatically while the motor is cold may serve as useful default values.
With highly dynamic drives, the optimization run p50051 = 25 should be repeated after the
drive has been operated under load (i.e. once the motor is at operating temperature).

〈11〉Checking and potential fine adjustment of maximum speed

Once the optimization runs have been executed, the maximum speed needs to be checked
and, if necessary, the setting for it corrected.
If the maximum speed has now shifted by more than around 10%, the control response of
the closed-loop speed control circuit will need to be checked; it may be necessary to repeat
the optimization run for the speed controller or carry out re-optimization manually.
The optimization runs for field weakening and for friction and moment of inertia
compensation must be repeated if there is any change to the maximum speed.

〈12〉Checking the drive settings

The optimization runs do not produce the best results for every application, so in all cases it
is necessary to check the controller settings using the appropriate tools (oscilloscope,
STARTER trace, and so on). Some cases may require manual re-optimization.

〈13〉Manual (re-)optimization (where required)

Precontrol and current controller for armature and field

Information on manually setting the parameters for precontrol is provided in the section
titled "Manual optimization".

Speed controller
p50200 Actual speed value filtering
p50225 Speed controller P gain
p50226 Speed controller integral time
p50227 Speed controller droop
p50228 Speed setpoint filtering

EMF controller
p50275 EMF controller P gain
p50276 EMF controller integral time
Empirical values should be set and optimization using setpoint boxes should be carried out
in accordance with generally applicable optimization guidelines.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 197
Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning using the BOP20 Operator Panel

〈14〉Saving non-volatile set values

Previously, all changes in the set values were made in the RAM (Random Access Memory).
If the device is switched off in this state, all settings made previously are lost. To
permanently store the settings in the ROM (non-volatile memory), a RAM to ROM must be
triggered by setting p0977 to 1 (p0977 is allocated to the DO 1). The saving process is
indicated by the flashing of BOP20 (and the RDY LED on the CUD) and takes approx. 45 s.
After the saving process has been completed, the settings are backed up in the ROM.
The drive can now be switched off (POWER OFF) without losing the settings that have been
made. Also refer to the "Operation" chapter, "CompactFlash Card functions" section.

〈15〉Documentation of set values

The following facilities are available so that the settings made can be recorded outside the
unit:
● External CompactFlash Card was inserted during the RAM to ROM (p0977=1). The
parameters were therefore also transferred to the external CompactFlash Card.
● Write the parameters to a CompactFlash Card (p0804).
● Document the parameters in a STARTER project (load to PG). Also refer to the
"Operation" chapter, "CompactFlash Card functions" section and "Commissioning with
the STARTER commissioning tool" chapter.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

198 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel

8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel

8.3.1 First commissioning

Note
To operate the AOP30, p2030=3 must be set.

8.3.1.1 First power-up

Start screen
When the system is switched on for the first time, the Control Unit (CUD) is initialized
automatically. The following screen is displayed:

Figure 8-1 Splash screen

While the system is powering up, the parameter descriptions are loaded to the operator
panel (remark: The CompactFlash Card does not have to be inserted)

127(
/RDGSDUDPHWHUGHVFULSWLRQ

0% 50% 100%
3/($6(:$,7

) ) ) ) )
Figure 8-2 Loading the parameter descriptions while powering up the system

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 199
Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel

Selecting the language

When the system is first powered up, a screen for selecting the language appears.

6SUDFKDXVZDKO/DQJXDJHVHOHFWLRQ You can select the language in the dialog

(QJOLVK screen.
'HXWVFK
)UDQ©DLV
(VSD³RO To change the language, choose <F2> or
,WDOLDQR <F3>.
&KLQHVH
To select the language, choose <F5>.

) ) ) ) )
Once the language has been selected, the powering-up process continues.
Once the system has successfully powered up, the drive has to be commissioned when the
system is switched on for the first time after it has been delivered. The converter can then be
switched on.
When the system is then powered up again, it can be operated immediately.

Navigation within the dialog screens

Within a dialog screen, the selection boxes can usually be selected using the <F2> and/or
<F3> keys. Selection boxes are generally texts surrounded by a frame. When they are
selected, they are highlighted by means of white text on a black background.
The current value of a highlighted selection box can usually be changed by pressing <F5>
"OK" and/or "Change". Another entry field then appears; the value you want can be entered
directly in this using the numerical keypad or can be selected from a list.
In the wizard, you can change from a dialog screen to the next or previous screen by
selecting the "Continue" or "Back" selection boxes and then confirming by pressing <F5>
"OK".
If a screen contains particularly important parameters, the selection box "Continue" only
appears at the bottom of the screen. This is because every single parameter in this dialog
screen has to be checked thoroughly and/or corrected before the next screen can be
accessed.

8.3.1.2 Full drive commissioning

Entering power unit data

p51819[0] Transformation ratio for armature voltage transformer

p51819[1] Transformation ratio for field voltage transformer
p51820 Rated armature supply voltage
p51821[0] Connection of line measurement cables
p51821[1] Connection of armature measurement cables
p51822 Rated armature DC current
p51823 Load voltage at rated armature current
p51824 Current transformer configuration

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

200 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel

p51825 Type of power unit

p51826[0] Length of first pulse
p51826[1] Length of other pulses
p51829 Heat sink temperature threshold
p51830 Sensor for heat sink temperature
p51831 Fuse monitoring
p51832 Monitoring of unit fan
p51833 External fault
p51834 Source of fan relay output
p51835[0] Monitoring of unit fan's ON delay
p51835[1] Fault involving unit fan's ON delay
p51835[2] Alarm involving unit fan's ON delay

Adjusting the unit/motor

p50076[0] Rated armature DC current reduction

p50076[1] Rated field DC current adjustment
p50078[0] Rated value for armature supply voltage (in volts)
p50078[1] Rated value for field supply voltage (in volts)

Acquiring the motor data

The motor data can be taken from the motor rating plate.

'&02725 **1*99=
1R1 92 (1
:¦UPHNO7+&/ + ,3 ,0% *HZ:7 W
9 $ PLQ N:
   
   
S S
)UHPGHUU6(3$5$7((;&,79$ S
)UHPGN¾KOXQJ6(3$5&22/,1*P  V /XIWULFKWXQJ
'LURI9HQWLODWLRQ
1'('(

%¾UVWHQ%586+(625'(5&2'(10$
%&a+=9
0$'(,1*(50$1<'18(51%(5*

Figure 8-3 Example of a rating plate

p50100[d] Rated armature current

p50101[d] Rated armature voltage

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 201
Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel

p50102[d] Rated excitation current

p50114[d] Thermal time constant for motor
See the section titled "Thermal overload protection for the DC motor (I2t
monitoring of the motor)"
When you have finished entering the motor data, choose "Continue" underneath the final
parameter value and activate with <F5> (OK).

Encoder selection

p50083[d] Actual speed controller value selection

Analog tachometer screen

p50741[d] Tachometer voltage at maximum speed

p2000 Reference speed

Pulse encoder screen

p0400[e] Encoder type selection

p0404[e] Encoder configuration active
p0405[e] Square-wave encoder A/B
p0408[e] Rotary encoder pulse no.
p2000 Reference speed

EMF controlled screen

p50115[d] EMF at maximum speed

p2000 Reference speed

Freely wired screen

p50609[c] Actual speed controller value signal source

p2000 Reference speed

DRIVE-CLiQ encoder screen

p0400[e] Encoder type selection

p0404[e] Encoder configuration active
p0405[e] Square-wave encoder A/B

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

202 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel

p0408[e] Rotary encoder pulse no.

p2000 Reference speed

Data on field

p50081 Field weakening

p50082 Field operating mode

Basic commissioning

p50171 Current limit, torque direction I

p50172 Current limit, torque direction II
p50180 Torque limit I
p50181 Torque limit II
p50303 Ramp-up time 1
p50304 Ramp-down time 1
p50305 Initial rounding 1
p50306 Final rounding 1

Final confirmation
Confirm the parameters you have entered to save them. Once you have selected "Continue"
and activated your entries with <F5>, the parameters you entered will be permanently saved
and the calculations required for closed-loop control carried out.

Optimization runs
Selecting optimization runs
To navigate through the selection boxes, choose <F2> or <F3>. To activate a selection,
choose <F5>. If an optimization run is not carried out, the motor controller uses the motor
characteristic values calculated from the rating plate data rather than the measured values.

DANGER
During optimization runs, the drive initiates motor movements that can reach the maximum
motor speed. The EMERGENCY OFF functions must be fully operational during
commissioning. To protect machines and personnel, the relevant safety regulations must
be observed.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 203
Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning using the AOP30 Operator Panel

8.3.2 Status after commissioning

LOCAL mode (control via operator panel)

● You switch to LOCAL mode by pressing the "LOCAL/REMOTE" key.
● Control (ON/OFF) is carried out via the "ON" and "OFF" keys.
● You can set the setpoint using the "Increase" and "Decrease" keys or by entering the
appropriate numbers on the operation screen using the numeric keypad.

8.3.3 Resetting parameters to factory settings

The factory settings represent the defined original status of the unit on delivery.
Resetting the parameters to the factory settings means that all the parameter settings made
since the system was delivered are reset.

Setting the parameter filter to "Parameter reset"

<MENU> <Commissioning/Service> <OK> <Device commissioning> <OK> <30: Parameter
Reset> <OK>

Restoring all parameters to their factory settings

All of the unit parameters are reset to their factory settings. The AOP30 is powered down
and back up again during this process.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

204 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

8.4.1 STARTER commissioning tool

Description
You can use the STARTER commissioning tool to configure and commission your
SINAMICS drives or drive systems. The drive configuration can be performed with the aid of
the STARTER wizard for drive configuration.

Note
This chapter described how to commission with STARTER. STARTER features
comprehensive online help, which provides detailed explanations of all the processes and
available system settings.
For this reason, this chapter is limited to the individual commissioning steps.

Prerequisites for installing STARTER

Hardware requirements:
● PG or PC
● Pentium II 400 MHz (Windows 2000)
● Pentium III 500 MHz (Windows XP Professional)
● Work memory 512 MB (1 GB recommended)
● 1024 x 768 pixel screen resolution
Software prerequisites for using STARTER without existing STEP7 installation:
● Microsoft Windows 2000 SP3, SP4
● Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1
● Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1, SP2
● Internet Explorer V5.0.1 or higher
● Adobe Reader from V5.0 is required to open the function diagrams in the online help.

Note
If STARTER is used in conjunction with other STEP7 components, the prerequisites for each
S7 component apply.

8.4.1.1 Installing the STARTER commissioning tool

STARTER is installed using the "setup" file on the CD supplied. When you double-click the
"Setup" file, the installation wizard guides you through the process of installing STARTER.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 205
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

8.4.1.2 Layout of the STARTER user interface

STARTER provides these 4 operating areas:

Figure 8-4 STARTER operating areas

Operating area Explanation

① Toolbars In this area, you can access frequently used functions by clicking icons.
② Project navigator The elements and objects contained in the project are displayed in this area.
③ Working area Changes to the drive units are made in this area.
④ Detail view This area displays detailed information, for instance about faults and alarms.

8.4.2 Procedure for commissioning with STARTER

Basic procedure when using STARTER

STARTER uses a series of interactive screens to enter the data required for the drive unit.

NOTICE
The interactive screens are pre-assigned defaults that you need to adapt to your application
and configuration under certain circumstances.
This is a deliberate procedure!
Target: By taking time to consider what configuration data you enter, you can prevent
inconsistencies between the project data and drive unit data (identifiable in online mode).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

206 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

8.4.2.1 Creating the project

Click the STARTER icon on the desktop or select the menu command Start > Simatic >
STEP 7 > STARTER in the Windows start menu to start the STARTER commissioning tool.
The following main screen with the interactive dialogs appears after starting for the first time:
● STARTER Getting Started Drive Commissioning
● STARTER Project Wizard
The commissioning steps are listed below as numbered step sequences.

Accessing the STARTER project wizard

Figure 8-5 Main screen of the STARTER parameter assignment and commissioning tool

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 207
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

⇒ Hide "STARTER Getting Started Drive Commissioning" with HTML Help > Close

Note
When you deactivate the Display wizard during start checkbox, the project wizard is no
longer displayed the next time you start STARTER.
You can call up the project Wizard by choosing Project > New with Wizard.
To deactivate the Getting Started online help, follow the information provided in help.
Online help can be restarted at any time via Help > Getting Started.
STARTER features a detailed online help function.

The STARTER project wizard

Figure 8-6 STARTER project wizard

⇒ Click Arrange drive units offline... in the STARTER project wizard

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

208 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Figure 8-7 Creating a new project

⇒ Enter a project name and, if necessary, the author, memory location and a comment.
⇒ Click Continue > to set up the PG/PC interface.

Figure 8-8 Interface setup

⇒ Click Change and test... and set up the interface in accordance with your device
configuration.
The Properties..., Copy... and Select... buttons are available.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 209
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Figure 8-9 Setting up the interface

Note
To parameterize the interface, you must install the appropriate interface card (e.g.: PC
Adapter (PROFIBUS)).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

210 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Figure 8-10 Setting up the interface - properties

NOTICE
PG/PC is only master on bus must be activated if no other masters (PC, S7 etc.) are
available on the bus.

Note
Even if no PROFIBUS interface is installed in the PC, projects can be generated and
PROFIBUS addresses for the drive objects can be assigned.
Only the bus addresses available in the project will be offered. That prevents double bus
address assignments.

⇒ After completion, click OK to confirm the setup and to return to the project wizard.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 211
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Figure 8-11 Setting up the interface

⇒ Click Continue > to set up a drive unit in the project wizard.

Figure 8-12 Inserting a drive unit

⇒ Select the following data from the list fields:

Device: Sinamics
Type: DCM Standard CUD /
DCM Advanced CUD, if you have purchased option G01
Version: 1.1
Bus address: The corresponding drive bus address (the default is 126)
Name: Any desired name can be entered in the name box

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

212 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Note
A second CUD for expanding the computing capacity is created in the STARTER as an
independent device, type "Sinamics DCM Standard (Advanced) CUD right".

⇒ Click Insert
The selected drive unit is displayed in the project wizard preview window.

Figure 8-13 Inserting a drive unit

⇒ Click Continue >

A summary of the project is displayed.

Figure 8-14 Summary

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 213
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

⇒ Click Complete to complete the creation of a new project for the drive unit.

8.4.2.2 Configuring a drive unit

In the project navigator, open the tree element that contains your drive unit.

Figure 8-15 Configuring the project navigator drive unit

⇒ In the project navigator, click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you want to configure.
The plus sign changes into a minus sign and the options for configuring the drive unit appear
as a directory tree under the drive unit.
⇒ Double click Configure drive unit

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

214 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Configuring a drive unit

Figure 8-16 Configuring a drive unit

⇒ If you have plugged in a Profinet CBE20 module (option G20), the module needs to be
activated here
⇒ Click Continue >
Under Drive properties, you can enter optional information about the drive/project.
⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 215
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Selecting the function modules

Figure 8-17 Selecting options

⇒ If you want to use the free function blocks, you can activate them here.
⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

216 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Selecting the unit

Figure 8-18 Selecting the unit

You can filter the MLFB list with the supply voltage and range selection (2Q/4Q) boxes. You
can locate the SINAMICS DCM Control Module by looking for the values 400 V/30 A and the
order no. 6RA8000-0MV62.
⇒ Select the unit.
⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 217
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Entering motor data

Figure 8-19 Motor data

⇒ Enter the motor rating data according to the motor rating plate here.

CAUTION
The data are very important to protect against overloading and must be entered correctly.

⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

218 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Entering additional power unit data

Figure 8-20 Additional power unit data

⇒ Enter the required power unit data here.

⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 219
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Brake control

Figure 8-21 Motor brake

⇒ If a motor brake is available, the type and properties can be set here.
⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

220 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Entering the actual value source

Figure 8-22 Configuring the motor - specifying the actual value source

⇒ Enter the type of tachometer or other actual value source. The drive cannot be operated if
no selection is made.
⇒ Enter the reference speed. To display on the AOP30 or to transfer the speed factors via
PROFIBUS, the physical speed at 100% is specified here.
⇒ Click Continue >

Encoder data - analog tachometer

⇒ Enter the tachometer voltage at maximum speed.
⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 221
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Encoder data - incremental encoder

Figure 8-23 Entering the encoder data

⇒ Enter the encoder type (usually HTL/TTL), the number of pulses per revolution, the level
and the zero mark configuration

CAUTION
Terminal X177.41 always delivers +15 V to supply the incremental encoder. That is
independent of the "voltage supply" setting selected in the box.

Note
The SMC30 supplies 5 V / 24 V encoder supply.

⇒ Click Continue >

Encoder data - Actual EMF value

⇒ Enter the tachometer voltage at maximum speed.
⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

222 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Encoder data - Freely wired actual value

⇒ Enter the source with the actual value for the closed-loop controller via the BICO
interconnection.
⇒ Click Continue >

Encoder data – Encoder on the SMC30 evaluation module

Figure 8-24 Entering the encoder data (DRIVE-CLiQ)

⇒ Enter the encoder type (usually HTL/TTL), the number of pulses per revolution, the level
and the zero mark configuration
⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 223
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Data on field

Figure 8-25 Data on field

⇒ Select the behavior of the field control and, if applicable, the field weakening.

Note
If field weakening is activated, the field characteristic curve must be recorded with the
optimization run p50051= 27 on the drive before the drive can be switched on.

⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

224 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Telegram selection

Figure 8-26 Selecting the telegram type

⇒ Select a standard telegram type or, with free configuration, the process data lengths.

Note
If a standard telegram is selected, BICO interconnections are triggered which cannot be re-
parameterized. If, e.g., p0840 is to be changed again, a switchover to free telegram
configuration has to be made first.

⇒ Click Continue >

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 225
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Entering important parameters

Figure 8-27 Important parameters

If necessary, enter important technological parameters.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

226 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Summary

Figure 8-28 Summary

⇒ Use Copy text to clipboard to insert the summary of the data of your drive unit displayed in
the window for later use in text processing.
⇒ Click Finish.
⇒ Save your project on the hard disk with Project > Save.

8.4.2.3 Starting the drive project

You have generated a project and saved it to your hard disk. The next step is to transfer your
project configuration data to the drive unit.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 227
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Transferring a STARTER project to the drive unit

The following steps are required to transfer the STARTER project created offline to the drive
unit:

Step Selection in the

toolbar
1 Select the menu command
Project > Connect to target system

If the following screen appears after step 1, select the Download to target device menu
command and continue with step 3. Otherwise, continue with step 2.

Figure 8-29 Online/offline comparison

Step Selection in the

toolbar
2 Select the menu command
Target system > Download > Project to target system

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

228 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

NOTICE
Your project data has now been transferred to the drive unit. This data is currently available
only in the drive unit's volatile memory and not on the CompactFlash Card!
To save your project data on the CompactFlash Card so that it is protected against power
failure, carry out the following steps.

Step Selection in the

toolbar
3 Select the menu command
Target system > Copy RAM to ROM

Note
The button for copying RAM to ROM can only be activated if the drive unit has been marked
in the project navigator.

Results of the preceding steps

● You have generated a project for your drive unit using the STARTER offline
● You have saved your project data to your PC hard drive
● You have transferred your project data to the drive unit
● You have saved your project data in your drive unit's FLASH memory so that it is backed
up in the event of a power failure

8.4.2.4 Connection through a serial interface

Along with the connection through the PROFIBUS, there is also a facility for data exchange
via the serial interface.

Preconditions
● A serial interface (COM) must be available on the PC from which the connection will be
made.
● p2030 = 3 must be set on the drive unit.
● An AOP30 must not be connected with the drive.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 229
Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

Settings
1. In STARTER, from Project > Set PC/PG interface, select the Serial cable (PPI) interface.
If this is not available in the dropdown list, you first have to add it using Select.

Note
If the interface cannot be added to the selection menu , the drive for the serial interface
still needs to be installed.
This is located in the following path on the STARTER CD:
\installation\starter\starter\Disk1\SerialCable_PPI\
STARTER must not be active while the driver is being installed.

2. Enter the following settings. The "0" address and the transmission rate 19.2 kbit/s are
important here.

Figure 8-30 Setting up the interface

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

230 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.4 Commissioning with the STARTER commissioning tool

3. The PPI bus address for a drive unit with a CUD is fixed at 3, for an expansion CDU in
the right slot it is fixed at 5.
4. When creating the drive unit, also set the corresponding bus address.

Figure 8-31 Setting the bus address

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 231
Commissioning
8.5 Activating function modules

8.5 Activating function modules

Subfunctions can be activated in the SINAMICS family drives as function modules.
Through activation, the parameters of the corresponding functionalities are also displayed.
Function modules can be individually activated / deactivated on every drive object.
In the SINAMICS DC MASTER, the free function blocks and the PROFINET interface are
modeled as function modules.

8.5.1 Activating offline with STARTER

Function modules can be defined for all DOs by using the properties dialog (activate by
clicking with the right mouse button on the DO in the project navigator). Shown for TM31 as
an example:

Figure 8-32 Properties

The function modules can be reached in the "Function modules" tab in the opening dialog.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

232 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.5 Activating function modules

Figure 8-33 Selecting the function modules

Accept the settings by clicking OK.

The function modules are also correspondingly set in the drive by connecting online and
downloading.

8.5.2 Activating online through parameters

Note
This process is not supported by STARTER because it uses its own mechanisms.

Activation is through p0108. r0108 and is available at each DO as a display parameter for
the activated function modules.
The setting is made on p0108[i] in the Control Unit. While doing so, the index corresponds to
the DO. Index 0 stands for the CU, Index 1 for the first DO – the default is the closed loop
control DO DC_CTRL. Index 2 optionally the first TMxx, etc.
The free function blocks are controlled through bit 18, the PROFINET interface (implicit)
through bit 31
The function modules are activated / deactivated by setting the bits to 1 or 0.
On BOP20 or AOP30 parameter assignment is made at DO1 (CU_DC)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 233
Commissioning
8.5 Activating function modules

● p0009=2
● Set or delete p0108[i] Bit 18
● p0009=0
That triggers software restart, activating the function module including all related parameters.

Note
Changing the parameters – The quantity structure is copied to the optional AOP30 by
"relearning" the existing parameters. This takes a few minutes.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

234 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

Additional modules can be integrated through DriveCLiQ (TM15, TM31, SMC30) or OMI Slot
(CBE20).
The components must be logged in to the software during a first commissioning.
That can be done:
● Offline by inserting the components into the project in STARTER and loading the project
into the drive or
● By adding the components through the parameter assignments on BOP20 / AOP30

8.6.1 Terminal Modules (TM31, TM15)

8.6.1.1 Commissioning with STARTER

Requirement
The project must be consistent with the drive before adding the TMxx (loading to PG
accomplished)

Figure 8-34 Inserting I/O component (1)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 235
Commissioning
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

Figure 8-35 Inserting I/O component (2)

● Select the desired type

Figure 8-36 Topology

● In the topology view, check which interface the TMxx is to be connected to and connect it
there (0 = X100, 1 = X101)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

236 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

● Load the project into the drive with "Download"

● Persistently save with RAM→ROM.
● The LEDs on the Terminal Module now light up green and the parameters of the
additional DOs can be accessed.

8.6.1.2 Commissioning via parameter assignment

Plug in the Terminal Module with DriveCliQ to X100 or X101.
Accept the additional components by writing the following parameter to the CU
p0009=1
p9910=1 (= accept components)
p0009=0
The software restarts and accepts the additional components.
If you then go online with an old STARTER project, the different topologies will be displayed
offline and online. With "Load to PG" the changed topology can also be accepted by
STARTER

8.6.2 Encoder evaluation (SMC30)

With an optional SMC30 encoder evaluation, a second incremental encoder can be
evaluated. Subsequently adding or deleting an SMC30 to/from an existing project is only
possible with the STARTER commissioning tool.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 237
Commissioning
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

8.6.2.1 Commissioning with STARTER

● Start the drive wizard via Configuration – DDS configuration

Figure 8-37 Configuring DDS

● Continue to the "Encoder" screen and activate the second encoder there

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

238 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

Figure 8-38 2. Activating the encoder

● Use the "Encoder data" button to enter the data of this encoder.
● If you also want to use the encoder connected to the SMC30 as the actual value for the
speed controller, you have to select as the source for the actual value "5: encoder on
SMC30"
● Run through the wizard until the end and load the expanded project into the drive.

8.6.2.2 Commissioning via parameter assignment

Plug in the Terminal Module with DriveCliQ to X100 or X101.
Accept the additional components by writing the following parameter to the CU:
Note:
During the first power up on the drive, the software will be loaded into the SMC if required.
After successful loading, the LED on the SMC30 flashes red/green and alarm A1007 is
queued. A power OFF is required before the components can be used.
p0009=1
p9910=1 (= accept components)
p0009=0

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 239
Commissioning
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

The software restarts and accepts the additional components.

Note:
After that, the assignments and settings of the encoder must still be made in STARTER (as
when commissioning with STARTER).

8.6.3 PROFINET module (CBE20)

8.6.3.1 Adding online into the drive

The CBE20 is automatically detected when plugged into the slot and is integrated into the
system.
Before the module can also be addressed in the network, an IP address and device name
must be assigned; refer to the "Function descriptions" chapter, "General information on the
PROFINET IO / addresses" section.
Note
If PROFINET is to be used only as a commissioning interface but process control is through
PROFIBUS, after commissioning the CBE20 the process data interface needs to be set back
to PROFIBUS (p8839=1).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

240 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.6 Commissioning optional additional modules

8.6.3.2 Adding offline in STARTER

Figure 8-39 Configuration

8.6.3.3 Deleting from the drive online

Deleting a CBE20 without STARTER always leads to the loss of the parameter assignments
which are replaced by the factory settings.
p0009=30
p0976=1
(re-commissioning)

8.6.3.4 Deleting offline with STARTER

In STARTER, using the Control Unit configuration wizard a
CBE20 can also be subsequently added or deleted (see adding offline in STARTER)
After deleting in the wizard, the project needs to be saved, loaded into the drive and
permanently saved with RAM→ROM.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 241
Commissioning
8.7 Manual optimization (where required)

8.7 Manual optimization (where required)

8.7.1 Setting the armature-circuit resistance (p50110) and armature-circuit inductance

(p50111)
You have 3 options for doing this:

〈1〉Set the armature-circuit parameters in accordance with the motor list

Disadvantage: The data is very imprecise and/or the actual values deviate significantly.
Feeder resistances are still not taken into account for the armature-circuit resistance.
Additional smoothing reactors and feeder inductances are still not taken into account for the
armature-circuit inductance.

〈2〉Rough estimate of armature-circuit parameters based on the rated data for the motor and
supply
Armature-circuit resistancep50110

S
S  p50110 = Armature-circuit resistance [Ω]
[S
p50101 = Rated armature voltage for motor [V]
p50100 = Rated armature current for motor [A]
This formula is based on the fact that, with the rated armature current, 10% of the rated
armature voltage drops at armature-circuit resistance Ra.
Armature-circuit inductancep50111

[U
S  p50111 = Armature-circuit inductance [mH]
S
r50071 = Rated armature supply voltage for units [V]
p50100 = Rated armature current for motor [A]
This formula is based on the empirical value: The crossover point from discontinuous to
continuous current is at approximately 30% of the motor's rated armature current.

〈3〉Determination of the armature-circuit parameters by measuring the current/voltage

● p50084 = 2:Select current-controlled operation
● p50153 = 0:Precontrol disabled
● p50082 = 0:Disable field to prevent motor from moving and, where necessary, lock the
rotor of the DC motor if retentivity is too high
● p50354 = 5%:Threshold for overspeed protection
● Enter 0 for the main setpoint.
● If "OPERATION ENABLE" has been applied and the "SHUTDOWN" command is entered,
an armature current of approximately 0% will now flow.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

242 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Commissioning
8.7 Manual optimization (where required)

Calculation of the armature-circuit resistance (p50110) on the basis of the measured

armature current and armature voltage values
● Gradually increase the main setpoint (shown at r52011) until the actual armature current
value (r50019 as a % of the unit's rated armature current) reaches approximately 70% of
the motor's rated armature current.
● Read off r50019 (actual armature current value) and convert it to amperes (using
p50100).
● Read off r50038 (actual armature voltage value in volts).
● Calculate the armature-circuit resistance:
Ra[Ω] = r50038/r50019 (converted to amperes)
● Set the armature-circuit resistance at p50110.
Calculation of the armature-circuit inductance (p50111) on the basis of the measured
armature current at the crossover point from discontinuous to continuous current
● Make an oscilloscope trace of the armature current.
● Starting from 0, gradually increase the main setpoint (shown at r52011) until the armature
current reaches the crossover point from discontinuous to continuous current.
● Measure the armature current at the crossover point from discontinuous to continuous
current (at standstill, EMF = 0) ILG, EMF = 0 , or read off the value of r50019 and convert it to
amperes using p50100.
● Line-to-line voltage of the armature power unit Uline, or read off the value of r50015.
● Calculate the armature-circuit inductance using the following formula:
La[mH] = 0.4 × Uline[V] / ILG, EMF = 0[A]
● Set the armature-circuit inductance at p50111.

8.7.2 Setting the field-circuit resistance (p50112)

You have 2 options for doing this:

〈1〉Rough estimate of field-circuit resistance RF (p50112) based on the rated field data for the
motor
RF = Rated excitation voltage/rated excitation current of motor p50102

〈2〉Adjustment of field-circuit resistance RF (p50112) by means of comparing the field current

setpoint and actual value
● p50112 = 0: Produces 180° field precontrol output and, therefore, actual field current
value of 0
● p50082 = 3: Enables field to remain permanently switched on, even when a line contactor
drops out
● p50254 = 0 and p50264 = 0: Only field precontrol active; field-current controller disabled
● Set p50102 to rated excitation current

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 243
Commissioning
8.7 Manual optimization (where required)

● Increase p50112 until the actual field current (r50035 converted to amperes using
r50073[1]) equals the required setpoint (p50102).
● Reset p50082 to the system's operating value.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

244 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Operation 9
9.1 Basic information

9.1.1 Parameters

Parameter types
The following adjustable and display parameters are available:
● Adjustable parameters (can be written and read)
These parameters have a direct effect on how a function responds.
Example: Ramping time of a ramp-function generator
● Display parameters (can only be read)
These parameters are used to display internal variables.
Example: Actual motor current

3DUDPHWHU

UHDGU UHDGZULWHS

%,&2RXWSXW 6WDQGDUGUHDG %,&2LQSXW 6WDQGDUGZULWHUHDG

SDUDPHWHU SDUDPHWHU

Figure 9-1 Parameter types

All these drive parameters can be read via PROFIBUS and changed by means of p
parameters using the mechanisms defined in the PROFIdrive profile.

Parameter categories
The parameters of the individual drive objects are categorized into data sets as follows:
● Data set-independent parameters
These parameters exist only once per drive object.
● Data set-dependent parameters
These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and can be addressed via
the parameter index for reading and writing. A distinction is made between various types
of data set:
– CDS: Command Data Set
By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them, the drive
can be operated with different pre-configured signal sources.
– DDS: Drive Data Set
The drive data set contains the parameters for switching between different automatic
speed control configurations.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 245
Operation
9.1 Basic information

The CDS and DDS can be switched over during normal operation. Additional types of data
set also exist, but these can only be activated indirectly by means of a DDS changeover.
● EDS - Encoder Data Set

7HUPLQDO0RGXOH
'ULYH

'DWDVHWLQGHSHQGHQW
GULYHSDUDPHWHUV

&'6&RPPDQGGDWDVHW

''6'ULYHGDWDVHW

(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ


('6(QFRGHUGDWDVHW

Figure 9-2 Parameter categories

Saving parameters in a non-volatile memory

The modified parameter values are stored in the volatile RAM. When the drive system is
switched off, this data is lost.
The data must be saved in the non-volatile memory, as described below, so that the
changes are available the next time the drive is switched on.
● Saving parameters with STARTER
See "Copy RAM to ROM" function
● Saving parameters
p0977 = 1; automatically reset to 0

NOTICE
The power supply to the Control Unit may first be switched off only after saving has
finished (i.e. after saving has started, wait until the parameter has the value 0 again).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

246 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.1 Basic information

Resetting parameters
The parameters can be reset to their factory settings as follows:
p0009 = 30; parameter reset
p0976 = 1
After execution p0976 is automatically set to 0 and p0009 is automatically set to 1.

Access level
The parameters are subdivided into access levels. The SINAMICS DCM List Manual
specifies the access level at which the parameter can be displayed and modified. The
required access levels 0 to 4 can be set in p0003.

Table 9- 1 Access levels

Access level Comment

0 User-defined Parameters from the user-defined list (p0013) are displayed on the BOP20
operator panel.
1 Standard Parameters for the simplest possible operations (e.g. p50303 = ramp-
function generator ramp-up time)
2 Extended Parameters for handling the basic functions of the unit
3 Expert Expert knowledge is already required for these parameters (e.g. knowledge
of assigning BICO parameters).
4 Service Please contact your local Siemens office for the password for parameters
with access level 4 (Service). It must be entered into p3950.

9.1.2 Drive objects

A drive object is a self-contained software function with its own parameters and potentially its
own faults and alarms. Drive objects can be provided as standard (e.g. automatic speed
control), or can be added individually or in groups times (e.g. TM31).
Properties of a drive object:
● Separate parameter space
● Separate window in STARTER
● Separate fault/alarm system
● Separate PROFIdrive telegram for process data

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 247
Operation
9.1 Basic information

Drive objects in the SINAMICS DC MASTER

'ULYHREMHFWV

&RQWURO8QLW &ORVHGORRSGULYHFRQWURO 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO

2QERDUG,2HYDOXDWLRQ 0RGXOH  0RGXOH
HYDOXDWLRQ HYDOXDWLRQ

3RZHUXQLW 7HUPLQDO 7HUPLQDO

0RGXOH 0RGXOH

Figure 9-3 Drive objects

● Automatic speed control (DC_CTRL)

Automatic speed control handles closed-loop control of the motor. The I/Os on the CUD
are evaluated within this drive object.
● Control Unit (CU_DC)
This drive object contains a variety of different system parameters.
● Evaluation of optional Terminal Module
An independent drive object handles evaluation of each optional Terminal Module.

Configuring drive objects

If, after first commissioning, additional drive objects are configured or deleted, they must be
added or deleted in STARTER or activated through parameters (refer to the chapter
Commissioning optional additional modules).

Note
Each installed drive object is allocated a number between 0 and 63 during first
commissioning so that they can be identified internally.

Overview of important parameters (refer to the SINAMICS DCM List Manual)

Adjustable parameters
● p0101 Drive object numbers
● p0107 Drive object type
● p0108 Drive object configuration
Display parameters
● r0102 Number of drive objects

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

248 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.1 Basic information

Standard drive objects

● Automatic speed control
● Control Unit

9.1.3 Functions of the CompactFlash Card

This section describes the basic functions of the CompactFlash Card in the SINAMICS DCM
system.

Basic information
The CUD (Control Unit for the SINAMICS DCM) manages three memory areas:
● A volatile memory, the RAM, also called work memory.
● A non-volatile memory, the ROM, also called flash memory
● An optionally available portable CompactFlash Card.

Note
CompactFlash Cards can be ordered as an option (S01 / S02) or as accessories, refer to
Chapter 2, "Ordering information for options and accessories" section.
SINAMICS DCM does not accept other CompactFlash Cards.

The work memory receives all project information and application programs while the device
is being operated. To save the current data from the work memory, you must copy it to non-
volatile memory before shutting down, refer to the "Commissioning " chapter, "Copying RAM
to ROM function".
An optional CompactFlash Card is used:
● For saving various parameter data sets
● For transferring the parameter data sets to additional SINAMICS DCM drives
● For series commissioning
The CompactFlash Card is mandatory:
● For installing software updates
● For using an AOP30 in languages other than German and English
● For using the controller-controller data exchange (starting from SINAMICS DCM V1.2)

Parameter data sets

Parameter data sets combine all the parameters for a project, including the project itself.
Parameter data sets differ on the basis of drive configuration (power unit, motor, encoder,
etc. used) and application (e.g. function modules, type of control).
Different amounts of data can be saved in the 3 memory areas:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 249
Operation
9.1 Basic information

● ROM: Four parameter data sets with the indices 0, 10, 11, and 12
● CompactFlash Card: Depending on the free storage space, up to 101 parameter data
sets (indices 0 to 100)
● The parameter data set with the index 0 is active in the RAM

Copying parameter data sets from non-volatile memory to the CompactFlash Card
There are three ways of copying parameter data sets from non-volatile memory to the
CompactFlash Card:
● The system is powered down
– Insert an empty CompactFlash Card into the CUD
– Switch on the system
– The system is put into operation by the software in the "ROM"
– Then the complete updated parameter data set with the index 0 is automatically
copied from the "ROM" to the CompactFlash Card without a prompt appearing.
● The system is switched on
– Insert a CompactFlash Card into the CUD
– Execute the "RAM to ROM" command (p0977[1]). The updated parameter data set is
copied automatically, first to the "ROM" and then as a data set to the CompactFlash
Card with index 0. If the CompactFlash Card already contains a parameter data set
with the index 0, this will be overwritten without a prompt appearing.
● The system is switched on
– From the user with application of the parameter data transmission from ROM to the
CompactFlash Card:
p0804 = 1, p0802 = (0...100) as target to the CompactFlash Card and p0803 =
(0/10/11/12) as source from the ROM.

NOTICE
While saving (BOP20 flashes, RDY LED flashes), the device must NOT be switched
off. Switching off the device while saving leads to the loss of the most recently
performed and not yet saved device parameterization.

Note
When options are being used (DCC, SMC30, TM15, TM31, etc.) and with certain
device configurations, the duration of the power-up can take several minutes.

Note
When a CompactFlash Card is inserted, the RAM to ROM command (p0977[1]) will
copy the parameter data set with the index 0 from the ROM to the CompactFlash
Card. Any previously saved parameter data set will be overwritten.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

250 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.1 Basic information

Copying parameter data sets from the CompactFlash Card to non-volatile memory
There are two ways of copying parameter data sets from the CompactFlash Card to non-
volatile memory:
● The system is powered down
– Insert a CompactFlash Card containing a parameter data set with the index 0 into the
CUD.
– Switch on the system. The new parameter data set will be copied to the ROM
automatically. The parameter data set with the index 0 which was previously in the
ROM will be overwritten.
– The system will then boot with the new parameter data set.
● The system is switched on
The user starts data transmission from the CompactFlash Card to the ROM with
parameters p0802, p0803 and p0804:
– p0804 = 2
– p0802 = (0...100) as source (from the CompactFlash Card) and p0803 = (0/10/11/12)
as target to the ROM.

Note
The parameter data set in the ROM is overwritten during system start-up. If a
CompactFlash Card with a parameter data set is inserted when the system is switched
on, the parameter data set with the index 0 in the ROM will be overwritten by the new
one with the index 0 on the CompactFlash Card.

Note
To actually activate the parameter data set loaded from the CompactFlash Card, the
parameter data set has to be transferred with p976=2 from ROM (non-volatile
memory) into the RAM (work memory).

Important parameters

p0977: Save all parameters (for more information, see the SINAMICS DCM List
Manual).
p0802: Data transfer of parameters [0,10,11,12], CompactFlash Card as source or
target
p0803: Data transfer of parameters [0...100], non-volatile device memory as source or
target
p0804: Start of parameter data transfer and specification of transfer direction:
p0804=1: Transfer from the CompactFlash Card to non-volatile device
memory
p0804=2: Transfer from non-volatile device memory to CompactFlash Card

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 251
Operation
9.1 Basic information

9.1.4 Data sets

Example of data set assignment

Table 9- 2 Example, data set assignment

DDS Encoder 1 (p0187) Encoder 2 (p0188)

DDS 0 EDS 0 EDS 1
DDS 1 EDS 0 EDS 0
DDS 2 EDS 0 EDS 0
DDS 3 EDS 1 -

9.1.4.1 Integration

Function diagrams (see the SINAMICS DCM List Manual)

● 8560 Command data sets (CDS)
● 8565 Drive data sets (DDS)
● 8570 Encoder data sets (EDS)

Overview of important parameters (refer to the SINAMICS DCM List Manual)

Adjustable parameters
● p0140 Encoder data sets (EDS) number
● p0170 Command data sets (CDS) number
● p0180 Drive data sets (DDS) number
● p0187 Encoder 1 encoder data set number
● p0188 Encoder 2 encoder data set number
● p0809 Copy command data set (CDS)
● p0810 BI: Command data set CDS bit 0
● p0819[0...2] Copy drive data set DDS
● p0820 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0
● p0821 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1

CDS: Command data set

The BICO parameters (binector and connector inputs) are grouped together in a command
data set. These parameters are used to interconnect the signal sources of a drive.
By parameterizing several command data sets and switching between them, the drive can
be operated with different pre-configured signal sources.
A command data set contains the following (examples):

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

252 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.1 Basic information

● Binector inputs for control commands (digital signals)

– ON/OFF, enable signals (p0844, etc.)
– Jog (p1055, etc.)
● Connector inputs for setpoints (analog signals)
– Speed setpoint (p50433)
– Torque setpoints (p50500, p50501)
A drive object can manage 2 command data sets.
The following parameters are available for selecting command data sets and for displaying
the currently selected command data set:
● Binector input p0810 BI: Command data set (CDS) selection
● r0836: Displays selected data set

Example: Switching between command data set 0 and 1

&'6   U  U  &'6VHOHFWHG

S
 

W
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
&'6DFWLYH U  U 

Figure 9-4 Switching the command data set (example)

DDS: Drive data set

A drive data set contains various adjustable parameters that are relevant for open-loop and
closed-loop drive control:
● Numbers of the assigned encoder data sets:
– p0187 and p0188: Up to 2 assigned encoder data sets (EDS)
● Various control parameters, e.g.:
– Speed limits min./max. (p50512, p50513)
– Characteristic data of ramp-function generator (p50295 ff)
– Characteristic data of controller (p50540 ff)
– ...
The parameters that are grouped together in the drive data set are identified in the
SINAMICS DCM List Manual by "DDS" and are provided with index [0...n].
It is possible to parameterize several drive data sets. You can switch easily between different
drive configurations (control type, motor, encoder) by selecting the corresponding drive data
set.
A drive object can manage 4 drive data sets.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 253
Operation
9.1 Basic information

Binector inputs p0820 and p0821 are used to select a drive data set. They represent the
number of the drive data set (0 to 3) in binary format (where p0821 is the most significant
bit).
● p0820 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0
● p0821 BI: Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1

EDS: Encoder data set

An encoder data set contains various adjustable parameters for the connected encoder that
are relevant for configuring the drive.
● Adjustable parameters, e.g.:
– Encoder interface component number (p0141)
– Encoder component number (p0142)
– Encoder type selection (p0400)
The parameters that are grouped together in the encoder data set are identified in the
parameter list by "EDS" and are provided with index [0...n].
A separate encoder data set is required for each encoder controlled by the Control Unit. Up
to 2 encoder data sets are assigned to a drive data set via parameters p0187 and p0188.
It is only possible to switch an encoder data set by means of a DDS switchover. When a
drive data set is selected, the assigned encoder data sets are selected automatically.

9.1.4.2 Using data sets

Copying a command data set

Set parameter p0809 as follows:
1. p0809[0] = Number of the command data set to be copied (source)
2. p0809[1] = Number of the command data to which the data is to be copied (target)
3. p0809[2] = 1
Starts copying.
Copying is finished when p0809[2] = 0.

Copying a drive data set

Set parameter p0819 as follows:
1. p0819[0] = Number of the drive data set to be copied (source)
2. p0819[1] = Number of the drive data set to which the data is to be copied (target)
3. p0819[2] = 1
Starts copying.
Copying is finished when p0819[2] = 0.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

254 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.1 Basic information

Uncommissioned data sets

Drive commissioning can be completed even if uncommissioned data sets (EDS, DDS) are
available.
Uncommissioned data sets are marked as "uncommissioned".
The attributes are displayed in STARTER or in the expert list or OPs.
Activating these data sets is not permitted and any attempt to do so will be rejected with an
error.
Assigning these data sets to a drive data set (DDS) is only possible by means of a
commissioning step (p0009 ≠ 0, p0010 ≠ 0).

Note
If there is no DDS dataset with the attribute "commissioned", the drive remains in a controller
inhibit state.

9.1.5 BICO technology: Interconnecting signals

9.1.5.1 Description

Description
Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and
internal control variables.
BICO technology (Binector Connector Technology) allows the drive to be adapted to a wide
variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be interconnected as required by means of BICO
parameters, are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI, or CO in their parameter name.
These parameters are identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams.

Note
The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO
technology.

9.1.5.2 Binectors, connectors

Binectors, BI: Binector Input, BO: Binector Output

A binector is a digital (binary) signal without a unit which can assume the value 0 or 1.
Binectors are subdivided into binector inputs (signal sink) and binector outputs (signal
source).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 255
Operation
9.1 Basic information

Table 9- 3 Binectors

Abbreviation Symbol Name Description

BI Binector input Can be interconnected to a binector output as
source.
(signal sink) The number of the binector output must be
entered as a parameter value.
BO Binector output Can be used as a source for a binector input.

(signal source)

Connectors, CI: Connector Input, CO: Connector Output

A connector is a digital signal, e.g. in 32-bit format. It can be used to emulate words (16 bits),
double words (32 bits) or analog signals. Connectors are subdivided into connector inputs
(signal sink) and connector outputs (signal source).

Table 9- 4 Connectors

Abbreviatio Symbol Name Description

n
CI Connector input Can be interconnected to a connector output as
source.
(signal sink) The number of the connector output must be
entered as a parameter value.
CO Connector output Can be used as a source for a connector input.

(signal source)

9.1.5.3 Interconnecting signals using BICO technology

To interconnect two signals, a BICO input parameter (signal sink) must be assigned to the
desired BICO output parameter (signal source).
The following information is required in order to interconnect a binector/connector input with
a binector/connector output:
● Binectors: Parameter number, bit number, and drive object ID
● Connectors with no index: Parameter number and drive object ID
● Connectors with index: Parameter number, index, and drive object ID
● Data type (signal source for connector output parameter)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

256 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.1 Basic information

%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW %,%LQHFWRULQSXW
&2&RQQHFWRURXWSXW &,&RQQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH 6LJQDOVLQN
%,
%2 S[[[[\
U 
&,
&2ZLWKRXWLQGH[ S[[[[\
U 

&2ZLWKLQGH[
,QGH[ >@ U &,
>@ U S[[[[\
>@ U >@
>@ U
>@ U

Figure 9-5 Interconnecting signals using BICO technology

Note
A connector input (CI) cannot be interconnected with all connector outputs (CO, signal
source). The same applies to the binector input (BI) and binector output (BO).
For each CI and BI parameter, the parameter list shows the information on the data type of
the parameter and the data type of the BICO parameter under "data type".
For CO parameters and BO parameters, only the data type of the BICO parameter is shown.
Notation:
Data types BICO input: Data type parameter/Data type BICO parameter
Example: Unsigned32/Integer16
Data types BICO output: Data type BICO parameter
Example: FloatingPoint32
The possible interconnections between the BICO input (signal sink) and BICO output (signal
source) are listed in the table titled "Possible combinations for BICO interconnections", which
can be found in the "Explanations on the parameter list" section of the SINAMICS DCM List
Manual.

The BICO parameter interconnections can be implemented in different command data sets
(CDS). The different interconnections are activated by switching data sets. Drive object
interconnections are also possible.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 257
Operation
9.1 Basic information

9.1.5.4 Internal encoding of the binector/connector output parameters

Internal encoding is required for writing BICO input parameters via PROFIBUS, for example.

'ULYH
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ,QGH[QXPEHU
REMHFW
%LW  ಹ   ಹ   ಹ 

 8QLW&8'
 6HSDUDWHREMHFW
([DPSOHVRIVLJQDOVRXUFHV
ELQ ELQ ELQ
)&KH[ൺ&2>@
GHF GHF GHF

ELQ ELQ ELQ KH[ൺ)HVWHರರ

ELQ ELQ ELQ KH[ൺ)HVWHರರ

Figure 9-6 Internal encoding of the binector/connector output parameters

9.1.5.5 Example: Interconnecting digital signals

Suppose you want to operate a drive via terminals DI 0 and DI 3 on the CUD using jog 1 and
jog 2.

%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW %,%LQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH 6LJQDOVLQN
9
S&
; ', -RJ
U
S&
; ', -RJ
U

9
S&
; ', ,QWHUQDO -RJ
U 
S&
; ',
U
,QWHUQDO -RJ


Figure 9-7 Interconnecting digital signals (example)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

258 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.1 Basic information

9.1.5.6 Information on BICO technology

Binector-connector converters and connector-binector converters

Binector-connector converters
● Several digital signals are converted to a 32-bit integer double word or to a 16-bit integer
word.
● p2080[0...15] BI: PROFIdrive PZD send bit-by-bit

Connector-binector converters
● A 32-bit integer double word or a 16-bit integer word is converted to individual digital
signals.
● p2099[0...1] CI: PROFIdrive PZD selection receive bit-by-bit

Fixed values for interconnection using BICO technology

The following connector outputs are available for interconnecting any fixed value settings:
● p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value_%_1
● p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value_%_2
● p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value_M_1
Example:
These parameters can be used to interconnect the scaling factor for the main setpoint or to
interconnect an additional torque.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 259
Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

9.2.1 General information about the BOP20

The BOP20 can be used to power drives up and down during the commissioning phase as
well as display and modify parameters. Faults can be diagnosed as well as acknowledged.

Overview of displays and keys

'ULYH1R
581

6 3 &

Figure 9-8 Overview of displays and keys

Information on the displays

Table 9- 5 Displays

Display Meaning
Top left The active drive object of the BOP is displayed here.
2-digit The displays and key operations always refer to this drive object.
RUN Lights up if at least one drive in the drive line-up is in the RUN state (in operation).
RUN is also displayed via bit r0899.2 of the drive.
Top right The following is displayed in this field:
2-digit • More than 6 digits: Characters that are present but cannot be seen (e.g. "r2" ––> 2
characters to the right are invisible, "L1" ––> 1 character to the left is invisible)
• Faults: Selects/displays other drives with faults
• Designation of BICO inputs (bi, ci)
• Designation of BICO outputs (bo, co)
• Source object of a BICO interconnection with a drive object different than the active one
S Lights up if at least one parameter was changed and the value has not yet been transferred to
the non-volatile memory.
P Lights up if, for a parameter, the value only takes effect after the P key is pressed
C Lights up if at least one parameter was changed and the calculation for consistent data
management has still not been initiated
Bottom, 6-digit Displays. parameters, indices, faults, and alarms, for example

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

260 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

Information on the keys

Table 9- 6 Keys

Key Name Meaning

ON Power up the drives for which the "ON/OFF1" command should come from the BOP.
Binector output r0019.0 is set using this key.
OFF Power down the drives for which the "ON/OFF1", "OFF2", or "OFF3" commands should come
from the BOP.
Binector outputs r0019.0, .1 and .2 are simultaneously reset when this key is pressed. After the
key has been released, binector outputs r0019.1 and .2 are again set to a "1" signal.
Note:
Whether these keys are active can be defined by assigning appropriate BICO parameters (e.g. it
is possible to use these keys to control all of the existing drives at the same time).
Functions The significance of these keys depends on the actual display.
Note:
Whether this key is active with respect to acknowledging faults can be defined by assigning
appropriate BICO parameters.
Parameters The significance of these keys depends on the actual display.
If this key is pressed for 3 s, the "Copy RAM to ROM" function is executed. The "S" displayed on
the BOP disappears.
Increase The keys depend on the current display and are used to either increase or decrease values.

Decrease

BOP20 functions

Table 9- 7 Functions

Name Description
Backlighting The backlighting can be set using p0007 in such a way that it switches itself off automatically
after the set time if no actions are carried out.
Switch active drive From a BOP perspective, the active drive is defined using p0008 or the keys "FN" and "Arrow
up".
Units The units are not displayed on the BOP.
Access level The access level for the BOP is defined using p0003.
The higher the access level, the more parameters can be selected using the BOP.
Parameter filter Using the parameter filter in p0004, the available parameters can be filtered according to their
particular function.
Select status display Actual values and setpoints are displayed on the status display.
The status display can be set using p0006.
User parameter list Parameters can be selected for access using the user parameter list in p0013.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 261
Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

Name Description
Unplug while voltage is The BOP can be unplugged and connected while under voltage.
present • The ON and OFF keys have a function.
The drives are stopped when the BOP is unplugged.
After connecting it, the drives must be powered up again.
• The ON and OFF keys have no function.
Unplugging and connecting has no effect on the drives.
Key operation The following applies to the "P" and "FN" keys:
• When used in a combination with another key, "P" or "FN" must be pressed before the
other key.

Overview of important parameters (refer to the SINAMICS DCM List Manual)

All drive objects

● p0005 BOP status display selection
● p0006 BOP status display mode
● p0013 BOP user-defined list
● p0971 Drive object, save parameters

Drive object, Control Unit (CU_DC)

● r0002 Control Unit status display
● p0003 BOP access level
● p0004 BOP display filter
● p0007 BOP backlighting
● p0008 BOP drive object selection
● p0009 Device commissioning, parameter filter
● p0011 BOP password input (p0013)
● p0012 BOP password confirmation (p0013)
● r0019 CO/BO: Control word, BOP
● p0977 Save all parameters

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

262 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

NOTICE
During a saving process triggered by the user, the electronic power supply for the
SINAMICS DC MASTER must not be interrupted.
An active saving process is indicated by the following actions:
• The RDY LED flashes (see the "Description of functions" chapter, "Description of the
LEDs on the CUD" section)
• The BOP20 flashes
Interrupting the power supply while saving can lead to the loss of the current device
parameter assignments. Also refer to the "Operation" chapter, "CompactFlash Card
functions" section.

Drive object (DC_CTRL)

● p0010 Commissioning, parameter filter

9.2.2 Displays and using the BOP20

Features
● Operating display
● Changing the active drive object
● Displaying/changing parameters
● Displaying/acknowledging faults and alarms
● Controlling the drive using the BOP20

Operating display
The operating display for each drive object can be set using p0005 and p0006. Using the
operating display, you can change into the parameter display or to another drive object. The
following functions are possible:
● Changing the active drive object
– Press key "FN" and "Arrow up" -> the drive object number at the top left flashes
– Select the required drive object using the arrow keys
– Acknowledge using the "P" key
● Parameter display
– Press the "P" key.
– The required parameters can be selected using the arrow keys.
– Press the "FN" key -> parameter r0000 is displayed
– Press the "P" key -> changes back to the operating display

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 263
Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

Parameter display
The parameters are selected in the BOP20 using the number. The parameter display is
reached from the operating display by pressing the "P" key. Parameters can be searched for
using the arrow keys. The parameter value is displayed by pressing the "P" key again. You
can toggle between the drive objects by simultaneously pressing the keys "FN" and the
arrow keys. You can toggle between r0000 and the parameter that was last displayed by
pressing the "FN" key in the parameter display.

2SHUDWLQJGLVSOD\

RU

9DOXHGLVSOD\
3DUDPHWHUGLVSOD\
3$GMXVWDEOHSDUDPHWHU

LQLQGH[HG

U9LVXDOL]DWLRQSDUDPHWHU

%LQHFWRUSDUDPHWHU
EL%LQHFWRULQSXW
ER%LQHFWRURXWSXW
FL&RQQHFWRULQSXW
FR&RQQHFWRURXWSXW

<RXFDQWRJJOHEHWZHHQUDQGWKHSDUDPHWHUWKDWZDVODVWGLVSOD\HGE\SUHVVLQJWKH
)1NH\LQWKHSDUDPHWHUGLVSOD\

Figure 9-9 Parameter display

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

264 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

Value display
To switch from the parameter display to the value display, press the "P" key. In the value
display, the values of the adjustable parameters can be increased and decreased using the
arrow. The cursor can be selected using the "FN" key.

'HFLPDOQXPEHU
HJS

,QWHJHUQXPEHU
HJS

 

'HFLPDOQXPEHU
HJU  

7LPHU
HJU
KPVPV

++H[DGHFLPDO
[$)%

FKDQJLQJWKHFRPSOHWHQXPEHU

&XUVRU FKDQJLQJDQLQGLYLGXDOGLJLW

 GLVSOD\LQJWKHRULJLQDOYDOXH

Figure 9-10 Value display

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 265
Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

Example: Changing a parameter

Precondition: The appropriate access level is set
(for this particular example, p0003 = 3).

[
3DUDPHWHUGLVSOD\

[ [
9DOXHGLVSOD\

Figure 9-11 Example: Changing p0013[4] from 0 to 300

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

266 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

Example: Changing binector and connector input parameters

For the binector input p0840[0] (OFF1) of drive object 2 binector output r0019.0 of the
Control Unit (drive object 1) is interconnected.

[



  



Figure 9-12 Example: Changing indexed binector parameters

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 267
Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

9.2.3 Displaying faults and alarms

Displaying faults

$FNQRZOHGJHDOO
IDXOWV
))DXOW
2QHIDXOWIURPGULYHREMHFW

1H[WIDXOW

0RUHWKDQRQHIDXOWIURPGULYH
REMHFW

$IDXOWIURPDGULYHREMHFWRWKHU
WKDQWKHDFWLYHRQH

'ULYHQR
0RUHWKDQRQHIDXOWIURPWKH IODVKLQJ
DFWLYHGULYHREMHFWDQG
DQRWKHUGULYHREMHFW FKDQJH

Figure 9-13 Faults

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

268 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.2 Parameterizing using the BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)

Displaying alarms

$$ODUP 0RUHWKDQRQHDODUP
IURPWKHDFWLYHGULYH
DQGDQRWKHUGULYH

1HZDODUPVRUDODUPVSUHVHQW
DQGQRNH\SUHVVHGIRUDSSUR[
VHFRQGV
DIWHUVHFRQGV

$ODUPVDUHFORFNHGWKURXJKDXWRPDWL DIWHUVHFRQGV
FDOO\

DIWHUVHFRQGV

Figure 9-14 Alarms

9.2.4 Controlling the drive using the BOP20

Description
When commissioning the drive, it can be controlled via the BOP20. A control word is
available on the Control Unit drive object (r0019) for this purpose, which can be
interconnected with the appropriate binector inputs of e.g. the drive.
The interconnections do not function if a standard PROFIdrive telegram was selected as its
interconnection cannot be disconnected.

Table 9- 8 BOP20 control word

Bit (r0019) Name Example, interconnection parameters

0 ON / OFF (OFF1) p0840
1 No coast down/coast down (OFF2) p0844
2 No fast stop/fast stop (OFF3) p0848
Note:
For simple commissioning, only bit 0 should be interconnected. When interconnecting bits 0 ... 2,
then the system is powered-down according to the following priority: OFF2, OFF3, OFF1.
7 Acknowledge fault (0 -> 1) p2102
13 Motorized potentiometer, raise p1035
14 Motorized potentiometer, lower p1036

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 269
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

Note
To operate the AOP30, p2030=3 must be set.

An operator panel is located in the cabinet door of the cabinet unit for operating, monitoring,
and commissioning tasks. It has the following features:
● Graphical, backlit LCD for plain-text display and a "bar display" of process variables
● LEDs for displaying the operating states
● Help function describing the causes of and remedies for faults and alarms
● Keypad for controlling a drive under normal operating conditions
● LOCAL/REMOTE switchover for selecting the control terminal (master control assigned to
operator panel or customer terminal block/PROFIBUS)
● Numeric keypad for entering setpoints or parameter values
● Function keys for prompted navigation through the menus
● 2-stage safety concept to protect against accidental or unauthorized changes to settings
● IP54 degree of protection (as installed)

2SHUDWLQJVWDWXV 'LVSOD\
/('V

21JUHHQ

$ODUP\HOORZ

)DXOWUHG

IXQFWLRQNH\V

0DVWHUFRQWURO
0HQXNH\ VHOHFWLRQ

'LUHFWLRQUHYHUVDO
.H\ERDUGLQWHUORFN
,QFUHDVHGHFUHDVH

1XPHULFNH\SDG 212)) -RJPRGH

Figure 9-15 Components of the cabinet unit operator panel (AOP30)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

270 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

9.3.1 Overview and menu structure

Description
The operator panel can be used for:
● Assigning parameters (commissioning)
● Monitoring status variables
● Controlling the drive
● Diagnosing faults and alarms
All the functions can be accessed via a menu.
Your starting point is the main menu, which you can always call up using the yellow MENU
key:

0$,10(18 Dialog screen for the main menu:

2SHUDWLRQVFUHHQ This can be accessed at any time with the
3DUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQW "MENU" key.
)DXOWDODUPPHPRU\
&RPPLVVLRQLQJVHUYLFH
Press "F2" or "F3" to navigate through the
/DQJXDJHVHOHFWLRQ menu options in the main menu.
+HOS
 2.

) ) ) ) )

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 271
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

Menu structure of the operator panel

'LDJQRVWLFV &XUUHQWIDXOWV !

0DLQPHQX 2SHUDWLRQVFUHHQ
&XUUHQWDODUPV
2OGIDXOWV
0(18
2OGDODUPV

3DUDPHWHUL]LQJ ,QGLYLG'2 '2

$OO'2 '2
'DWDVHWVHOHFWLRQ
'2Q
3HUPDQHQWSDUDPHWHU
WUDQVIHU
!
)DXOW 2YHUYLHZRIIDXOWVDODUPV
'2IDXOWVDODUPV
DODUPPHPRU\
! '2IDXOWVDODUPV

'2QIDXOWVDODUPV

&RPPLVVLRQLQJ 'ULYH
%DVLFFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
VHUYLFH FRPPLVVLRQLQJ
&RPSOHWHFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
'HYLFH
FRPPLVVLRQLQJ 2SWLPL]DWLRQUXQ

$23VHWWLQJV &RQWUROVHWWLQJV
'LVSOD\VHWWLQJV
'HILQHRSHUDWLRQVFUHHQ
6HWGDWHWLPH
'DWHIRUPDW
56EXVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYH
'2QDPHGLVSOD\PRGH
5HVHW$23VHWWLQJV

$23GLDJQRVWLFV 6RIWZDUHGDWDEDVHYHUVLRQ
'DWDEDVHFRQWHQWV

6SUDFKDXVZDKO %DWWHU\VWDWXV
/DQJXDJH
/DQJXDJHVHOHFWLRQ .H\ERDUGWHVW
/DQJXDJH
/('WHVW
/DQJXDJHQ 'DWDEDVHVWDWLVWLFV

6DIHW\LQKLELWV
2SHUDWRULQKLELWORFN
3DUDPHWHUVGLVDEOH
$FFHVVOHYHO

! ,QIRWH[WFDQEHFDOOHGXSIRUDOODODUPVDQGIDXOWV

Figure 9-16 Menu structure of the AOP30 operator panel

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

272 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

9.3.2 Menu: Operation screen

Description
The operation screen displays the most important status variables for the drive unit:
In the factory setting, it displays the operating state of the drive, the direction of rotation, the
time, as well as four drive variables (parameters) in numerical format and two values in the
form of a bar display for continuous monitoring.
You can call up the operation screen in one of three ways:
1. Automatically after ramping-up is complete
2. From the main menu, by selecting the "Operation screen" menu command and F5 ("OK")
3. From the "Fault/alarm overview" screen, by selecting F4 ("Tools+"/"Back") and F5 ("OK")
if the jump is from the operation screen into this screen

^'&B&75/`23(5$7,21 6
16(7 USP 67$7 
(0)  ,B) 
1B$&7>USP@
   
,B$&7>$@
   
+HOS QVHW &KDQJH VHOSDU 'LDJ

) ) ) ) )
Figure 9-17 Operation screen

If a fault was registered during ramping-up, the system automatically branches from the
operation screen into which the jump was made following the ramping-up process into the
fault screen. This also happens if the system is on the operation screen and the first fault is
registered here.
You can use F2 in the LOCAL state to enter the setpoint via the numeric keypad, if the drive
is in the OPERATION state or the system setting "Save AOP setpoint" is set to YES.
The "Define operation screen" menu can be selected directly using F3 ("Change").
The individual parameters of the operation screen can be selected using F4 ("Sel. par"). F1
("Help+") can be used to display the corresponding parameter number of the short identifier
and call up a description of the parameter.

Setting options
By selecting Commissioning/Service –> AOP settings –> Define operation screen, you can
adjust the display type and the values displayed as required (see the section titled
"Operation/AOP30 settings").

9.3.3 Parameterization menu

You can adjust the unit settings in the Parameterization menu.
Two display types can be selected in the AOP:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 273
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

1. All parameters
All the parameters present in the unit are listed with this option. The DO to which the
parameter currently selected belongs (inverted) is displayed in curly brackets in the top
left of the screen. With this display type, the response time for turning a page is
dependent on the number of DOs and is generally longer than with parameter lists that
only display one DO.
2. DO selection
With this display type, you can pre-select a DO so that only the parameters for this DO
are listed. (The expert list in STARTER is only displayed in this DO view.)
In both cases, the set access level governs which parameters are displayed. You can set the
access level in the menu for safety inhibits, which can be called up using the key button.
The parameters for access levels 1 and 2 are sufficient for simple applications.
At access level 3 ("Expert"), you can change the structure of the function by interconnecting
BICO parameters.
The Parameterization menu offers four options:
● Individ DO
Shows the parameters of a DO to be selected in advance
● All DO
Shows the parameters of all DOs in list format (as described above)
● Data set selection
'DWDVHWVHOHFWLRQ
7\SH 0D[ 'ULYH $23
&RPPDQG'6 F   
'ULYH'6 G   
6SHHGHQFRGHU'6 H   

+HOS
 %DFN &KDQJH

) ) ) ) )
Figure 9-18 Data set selection

In the "AOP" column of the "Data set selection" screen, you can choose which of the data
sets selected is currently displayed on the operator panel. The data set numbers that are set
in the drive (i.e. are currently active) are displayed in the "Drive" column. The "Max" column
shows the maximum data set number to be entered for the AOP30 display.
In parameter lists, data set parameters are indicated by the letter c, d, or e between the
parameter number and parameter designator. The number at the right of the first row from
the top shows which data set a highlighted parameter comes from.
In the commissioning wizard, the drive is commissioned using the data set selected on this
screen.
The data set selection dialog appears whenever a data set parameter is changed in the
parameter list. The data set selected in the data set selection screen is a default setting.
● Permanent parameter transfer
Parameter changes in the SINAMICS DC MASTER are only made temporarily in the RAM. If
a parameter assignment is intended to be permanent, it is possible to trigger a save process
at this point. Depending on the configuration, this can take from 45 s to several minutes.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

274 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

Also refer to the "Operation" chapter, "CompactFlash Card functions" section.

9.3.4 Menu: Fault/alarm memory

When you select this menu, a screen appears containing an overview of faults and alarms
that are present.
For each drive object, the system indicates whether any faults or alarms are present ("Fault"
or "Alarm" appears next to the drive object in question).
In the graphic below, you can see that at least one active fault/alarm is present for the
"DC_CTRL" drive object. No faults or alarms are indicated for the other drive two objects.

2YHUYLHZRIIDXOWVDODUPV Overview of faults/alarms

When you navigate to the line with active
&8B'&   alarms/faults and then press the F5 (<Diag>)
'&B&75/ )DXOW :DUQLQJ key, the system displays a screen in which
70   you may select the current or old
alarms/faults.

 7RROV 'LDJ

) ) ) ) )

^'&B&75/`'LVSOD\GLDJQRVWLFV Displaying diagnostics

&XUUHQWIDXOWV When you navigate to the required line and
&XUUHQWDODUPV then press the F5 (<OK>) key, the
2OGIDXOWV corresponding faults/alarms are displayed.
2OGDODUPV The list of current faults is selected here as
an example.

 %DFN 2.

) ) ) ) )

^'&B&75/`)DXOWV  Display of current faults

) ([WHUQDOIDXOW A maximum of eight current faults are
displayed along with their fault number and
name.
To display additional help regarding the
cause of the problem and how to solve it,
+HOS
 %DFN $FN
choose F1 (<Help>).
) ) ) ) ) To acknowledge the faults, choose F5
(<Ack.>). If a fault cannot be acknowledged,
the fault remains.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 275
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

9.3.5 Menu: Commissioning/Service

9.3.5.1 Drive commissioning

Selecting this option enables you to re-commission the drive from the main menu, using the
AOP wizard.

Basic commissioning
A few key parameters (such as the maximum speed, ramp-up time, and ramp-down time)
are requested. The changes can then be permanently saved in the final confirmation screen.

Complete commissioning
Complete commissioning, with entry of the motor and encoder data, is carried out. Following
this, key motor parameters are recalculated on the basis of the motor data. The parameter
values calculated during the previous commissioning process are lost. The calculated values
are then overwritten during a subsequent optimization run.

Optimization run
The selection screen for the optimization runs appears.

9.3.5.2 Device commissioning

In this menu, you can enter the device commissioning status directly. This is the only way
that you can reset parameters to their factory settings, for example.

9.3.5.3 AOP settings

Control settings
This defines the settings for the control keys in LOCAL mode (see the section titled
"Operation/Operation via the operator panel") as well as additional settings that are relevant
for drive control.

Display settings
This menu is where you make the lighting, brightness, and contrast settings for the display.

Define operation screen

In this menu, you can switch between five operation screens. You can set the parameters
that are to be displayed.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

276 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

'HILQHRSHUDWLRQVFUHHQ 2SHUDWLRQVFUHHQ

 
 
6FUHHQ QRWBDFWLYH  U 16(7RXWSWR5)*
2SHUDWLRQVFUHHQW\SH YDOXHVEDUV  U 67$7VWDWXVGLVSOD\
)
2SHUDWLRQVFUHHQYDOXHV  U (0)DFWXDO(0)YDOXH



6FUHHQW\SH YDOXHVEDU  U ,B),IBFRQWDFWYDORXWS

+HOS
 %DFN &KDQJH +HOS
 %DFN &KDQJH

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
Figure 9-19 Define operation screen

The figure below shows how the entries are assigned to the screen positions:

^'&B&75/`23(5$7,21 6 ^'&B&75/`23(5$7,21 6
(QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\
(QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\
(QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\
(QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\
(QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\
  

^'&B&75/`23(5$7,21 6 ^'&B&75/`23(5$7,21 6
(QWU\ (QWU\ (QWU\
  
(QWU\ (QWU\
(QWU\
(QWU\
  
  
(QWU\ (QWU\
     

^'&B&75/`23(5$7,21 6

(QWU\ (QWU\

Figure 9-20 Layout of the entries on the operation screen

9.3.5.4 Lists of signals for the operation screen

The following tables list some of the main signals for the operation screen along with their
associated reference variables and default settings for quick commissioning.

DC_CTRL object

Table 9- 9 List of signals for the operation screen - DC_CTRL object

Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling (100%=...) see

table below
Factory setting (entry no.)
N setpoint following limitations (1) r50029 NSETP rpm p2000

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 277
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling (100%=...) see

table below
Status display (2) r50000 STAT - -
Actual EMF value (3) r52287 EMF % -
Actual field current value (4) r52265 I_F % -
Actual speed value (5) r00021 N_ACT rpm p2000
Actual armature current value (6) r00027 I_ACT A p2002
Armature firing angle (7) r50018 ALF_A ° -
Field firing angle (8) r50034 ALF_F ° -
Motor temperature rise (9) r50014.0 TEMP % -
Thyristor temperature rise (10) r50014.1 TEMP1 % -
For diagnostic purposes
Speed setpoint smoothed r0020 NSETP rpm p2000
Actual speed value, motor encoder r0061 N_ACT rpm p2000
Actual speed value following smoothing r0063 N_ACT rpm p2000
For further diagnostic purposes
PROFIBUS setpoint r2050 PBSOL rpm p2000

Scalings for DC_CTRL object

Table 9- 10 Scalings for DC_CTRL object

Variable Scaling parameter Default for quick commissioning

Reference speed 100% = p2000 p2000
Reference voltage 100% = p2001 p2001 = 1,000 V
Reference current 100% = p2002 p2002 = Current limit (p0640)
Reference torque 100% = p2003 p2003 = 2 × rated motor torque
Reference power 100% = r2004 r2004 = (p2003 × p2000 × π) / 30
Reference temperature 100% = 100 °C -

TM31 object

Table 9- 11 List of signals for the operation screen – TM31 object

Signal Parameter Short name Unit Scaling (100% = ...)

Analog input 0 [V, mA] r4052[0] AI_UI V, mA V: 100 V/mA: 100 mA
Analog input 1 [V, mA] r4052[1] AI_UI V, mA V: 100 V/mA: 100 mA
Analog input 0, scaled r4055[0] AI_% % V: 100 V/mA: 100 mA
Analog input 1, scaled r4055[1] AI_% % V: 100 V/mA: 100 mA

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

278 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

Setting the date/time

Settings: MENU – Commissioning/Service – AOP settings

For date stamping in the case of fault codes and alarms, and for AOP time display on the
operation screen
The AOP30 contains a battery-buffered real-time clock.
You set the date and time on this screen.
Synchronization
You can also set whether and/or how the AOP30 and drive unit are to be synchronized.
Synchronizing the AOP with the drive enables fault codes and alarms to be date- stamped
and time-stamped (in the default setting, time-stamping occurs in accordance with the CU
runtime).
● None (factory setting)
The AOP30 and drive unit times are not synchronized.
● AOP → Drive
– Activating this option synchronizes the AOP and drive unit immediately, whereby the
current AOP time is transferred to the drive unit.
– The current AOP30 time is transferred to the drive unit every time the AOP30 is
started.
– At 02:00 (AOP time) every day, the current AOP30 time is transferred to the drive unit.
● Drive → AOP
– If a time-of-day master is connected to the drive, then activating this option enables
the AOP and drive unit to be synchronized immediately, whereby the current drive unit
time is transferred to the AOP30.
– The current drive unit time is transferred to the AOP30 every time the AOP30 is
restarted.
– At 02:00 (AOP time) every day, the current drive unit time is transferred to the AOP30.

Date format
The date format can be set in this menu:
● DD.MM.YYYY: European date format
● MM/DD/YYYY: North American date format

RS485 bus termination active

RS485 bus termination can be activated/deactivated on this screen.

DO name display mode

A user-definable DO name can be activated/deactivated on this screen.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 279
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

In the drive, there is the option of entering a user-defined, 25-character DO name for each
DO, using the configuration software. The default assignment consists of the system DO
name and, with CU_DC, the PROFIBUS address (last 3 characters) for:
● CU_DC_126 (PROFIBUS address is in the last 3 characters; see p0918)
● DC_CTRL_02 (DO ID is in the last 2 characters; see p0101)
● TM31_03 (DO ID is in the last 2 characters; see p0101)
The possible number of characters in a DC name display is limited by the screen in question:
1. DO name in screens displaying the current DO
Examples of screens in this category are operation screens, parameter lists, quick
commissioning wizard screens, etc.
The maximum text length is 7 characters. Example {2:DC_CTRL}
Texts of up to 7 characters in length are displayed in full. The first six characters of texts
that are 8 to 25 characters in length are displayed with "..." as the seventh character.
2. DO names in the overview of faults and alarms (alarm overview)
The maximum text length is 12 characters. Example 2:HOIST 12345
Texts of up to 12 characters in length are displayed in full.
The first 11 characters of texts that are 13 to 25 characters in length are displayed with
"..." as the 12th character.
Texts that have been shortened can be displayed in full for around 3 seconds by pressing
the "+/-" button, provided that the "User-definable DO name" function is activated.

Reset AOP settings

Selecting this menu command resets the AOP factory settings for the following:
● Language
● Display (brightness, contrast)
● Operation screen
● Control settings

NOTICE
When you reset parameters, all settings that are different from the factory settings are
immediately reset on the operator panel. This may cause the unit to switch to an
unwanted operating state. For this reason, you should always take great care when
resetting parameters.

9.3.5.5 AOP30 diagnostics

Software/database version
This menu command shows the versions of the software and database.
The database version must be compatible with the drive software version (refer to parameter
r0018).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

280 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

Database contents
Shows detailed information on the drive objects (DOs) present in the system

Battery status
This menu displays the battery voltage (in volts and as a bar chart). The battery ensures that
the data in the database and the current time are retained.
When the battery voltage is represented as a percentage, a battery voltage of ≤ 2 V is equal
to 0%, and a voltage of ≥ 3 V to 100%.
The data is secure up to a battery voltage of 2 V.
● If the battery voltage is ≤ 2.45 V, the message "Replace battery" is displayed in the status
bar.
● If the battery voltage is ≤ 2.30 V, the system displays the following message: "Alarm,
weak battery".
● If the battery voltage is ≤ 2 V, the system displays the following message: "Caution: The
battery is dead".
● If the time and/or database are unavailable due to lack of voltage after a prolonged
system downtime, the loss is established by means of a CRC check when the system is
switched on again. This triggers a message instructing the user to replace the battery and
then load the database and/or set the time.
For instructions on how to change the battery, see "Maintenance and servicing".

Keyboard test
On this screen, you can check that the keys are functioning properly. Keys that you press
are represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display. You can press keys in any order you
wish. You cannot exit the screen (F4 – "Back") until you have pressed each key at least
once.

Note
Alternatively, you can exit the keyboard test screen by pressing any key and holding it down.

LED test
On this screen, you can check that the 4 LEDs are functioning properly.

Database statistics
Data related to the database is displayed here (e.g. free memory for additional DOs)

9.3.6 Sprachauswahl/Language selection

The operator panel downloads the texts for the different languages from the drive.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 281
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

You can change the language of the operator panel via the "Sprachauswahl/Language
selection" menu.

Note
Additional languages for the operator panel
Languages in addition to those that are currently available for the operator panel are
available on request.

9.3.7 Operation via the operator panel (LOCAL mode)

You activate the control keys by switching to LOCAL mode. If the green LED in the
LOCAL/REMOTE key does not light up, the key is not active.

Note
If the "OFF in REMOTE" function is activated, the LED in the LOCAL/REMOTE key flashes.

All of the supplementary setpoints are deactivated for LOCAL master control.
After the master control has been transferred to the operator panel, none of the BICO
interconnections at bit 0 to bit 10 of the control word for the sequence control are active
(refer to function diagram 2501).

9.3.7.1 LOCAL/REMOTE key

Activation of LOCAL mode: Press the LOCAL key.
LOCAL mode: LED lights up
REMOTE mode: LED does not light up; the ON, OFF, JOG, direction reversal, faster, and
slower keys are not active.

Settings: Menu – Commissioning/Service – AOP settings – Control settings

Save LOCAL mode (factory setting: Yes)
● Yes: The "LOCAL" or "REMOTE" operating state is saved when the power supply is
switched off and restored when the power supply is switched back on.
● No: The "LOCAL" or "REMOTE" operating state is not saved. "REMOTE" is activated
when the power supply is switched on.
OFF in REMOTE (factory setting: No)
● Yes: The OFF key functions in REMOTE mode even if the drive is being controlled by
external sources (PROFIBUS, customer terminal strip, NAMUR terminal strip).
WARNING: This function is not an EMERGENCY STOP function.
● No: The OFF key only functions in LOCAL mode.
LOCAL/REMOTE also during operation (factory setting: No)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

282 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

● Yes: You can switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is switched on (motor
is running).
● No: Before switching to LOCAL or REMOTE, a check is carried out to determine whether
the drive is in the "Operation" state. If yes, the system does not switch to
LOCAL/REMOTE and outputs the error message "LOCAL/REMOTE mode during
operation not possible". Before the system switches to REMOTE, the drive is switched off
and the setpoint is set to 0.

9.3.7.2 ON key/OFF key

ON key: Active in LOCAL if no operator inhibit lock is activated
OFF key: Always active in LOCAL; active in REMOTE under certain conditions (if the system
setting "OFF in REMOTE" is set to "Yes")
OFF key acts as
● OFF1: Ramp-down on the down ramp (p50303)
At speed 0: Disconnection (only if line contactor is present)
● OFF2: Immediate pulse inhibit, motor coasts down
● OFF3: Ramp-down on the quick stop ramp (p50296)
Factory setting: OFF1

9.3.7.3 CCW/CW changeover

Settings: Menu – Commissioning/Service – AOP settings – Control settings

CCW/CW changeover (factory setting: No)
● Yes: CCW/CW changeover by means of the CCW/CW key functions in LOCAL mode
● No: The CCW/CW key is inactive.
For safety reasons, the CCW/CW key is disabled in the factory setting (normally pumps and
fans must only be operated in one direction).
The direction of rotation that is currently selected is indicated on the operation screen by
means of an arrow next to the operating state.

9.3.7.4 Jogging

Settings: Menu – Commissioning/Service – AOP settings – Control settings

JOG key active (factory setting: No)
● Yes: In "LOCAL" mode, the JOG key is active in the state "Ready for Switching On" (not
in "Operation").
● No: The JOG key is not active.
See also function diagram sheet 3125 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
The speed for the JOG function is entered using parameter p50436.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 283
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

9.3.7.5 Increase setpoint/Decrease setpoint

You can use the Increase and Decrease keys to enter the setpoint with a resolution of 1% of
the maximum speed.
Alternatively, the setpoint can also be entered via the numeric keypad. To do this, press F2
while on the operation screen. The system displays an inverted edit field for entering the
required speed. Enter the required value using the numeric keypad. Press F5 ("OK") to
confirm the setpoint.
Any speed between 0 and the maximum speed (p2000) can be entered using the numeric
keypad.
Setpoint entry in LOCAL mode is unipolar. You can change the direction of rotation by
pressing the key that allows you to switch between CCW/CW rotation.
● CW rotation and "Increase" key mean:
The setpoint displayed is positive and the speed is increased.
● CCW rotation and "Increase" key mean:
The setpoint displayed is negative and the speed is increased.

9.3.7.6 AOP setpoint

Settings: Menu – Commissioning/Service – AOP settings – Control settings

Save AOP setpoint (factory setting: No)
● Yes: In LOCAL mode, the last setpoint (once you have released the Increase or
Decrease key or confirmed a numeric entry) is saved.
The next time you switch the system on in LOCAL mode, the saved value is selected.
This occurs even if you switched to REMOTE in the meantime or the power supply was
switched off.
When the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched
on (motor is running), the actual value that was last present is set as the output value for
the AOP setpoint and saved.
If the system is switched from REMOTE to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched off,
the AOP setpoint that was last saved is used.
● No: When the system is switched on in LOCAL mode, the speed is always set to the
value entered under "AOP starting setpoint". When the system is switched from REMOTE
to LOCAL mode while the drive is switched on (motor is running), the actual value that
was last present is set as the output value for the AOP setpoint.
AOP setpoint ramp-up time (factory setting: 20 s)
Defines the speed at which the setpoint specified by the AOP is increased when the "+" key
is pressed
AOP setpoint ramp-down time (factory setting: 30 s)
Defines the speed at which the setpoint specified by the AOP is decreased when the "-" key
is pressed

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

284 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

AOP starting setpoint (factory setting: 0.000 rpm)

The AOP starting setpoint is the speed setpoint which is active when the drive is switched on
(with the "ON" key on the AOP30); the "Save setpoint" system setting must be set to "No" for
this purpose (see also the description of the "Save AOP setpoint" system setting).

Note
The internal drive ramp-function generator is always active.

9.3.7.7 Inhibiting AOP LOCAL mode

Settings: Menu – Commissioning/Service – AOP settings – Control settings

Inhibit AOP LOCAL mode (factory setting: No)
● Yes: Deactivates the "Control via operator panel" function, thereby disabling the
LOCAL/REMOTE key.
● No: Activates the LOCAL/REMOTE key.

Note
LOCAL functionality can also be inhibited on the drive by means of the p0806 parameter
(BI: Inhibit master control).

9.3.7.8 Acknowledging errors via the AOP

Settings: Menu – Commissioning/Service – AOP settings – Control settings

Acknowledge error from the AOP (factory setting: Yes)
● Yes: Errors can be acknowledged via the AOP.
● No: Errors cannot be acknowledged via the AOP.

9.3.7.9 Timeout monitoring

In "LOCAL" mode or if "OFF in REMOTE" is active, the drive is shut down after 1 s. if the
data cable between the AOP and drive is disconnected.

9.3.7.10 Operator inhibit lock/Parameters disable

Operator inhibit lock/Parameters disable

To prevent the control keys from being operated and parameters from being changed
unintentionally, you can activate an operator inhibit lock/parameters disable using a key-
operated pushbutton. Two key icons appear at the top right of the display when these safety
inhibits are enabled.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 285
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

Table 9- 12 Operator inhibit lock/parameters disable

Inhibit type Online mode Offline mode

No safety inhibit

Operator inhibit lock

Parameters disable

Operator inhibit lock + parameters disable

Settings

6DIHW\ORFNV 3DUDPHWHUVGLVDEOH



2SHUDWRULQKLELWORFN QRWBDFWLYH 3DVVZRUG

)
3DUDPHWHUVGLVDEOH QRWBDFWLYH &KDQJH
$FFHVVOHYHO 6WDQGDUG &KDQJH (QWHUSDVVZRUGDJDLQ

+HOS
 %DFN 2.  & &DQFHO 2.

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
Figure 9-21 Setting safety inhibits

The "Operator inhibit lock" setting can be changed directly via <F5> ("Change") once you
have selected the selection box.
When "Parameters disable" is activated, you may enter a numeric password (twice). You
must also enter this password when deactivating "Parameters disable".
Operator inhibit lock (factory setting: Not active)
● Active: The parameters can still be viewed, but a parameter value cannot be saved
(message: "Note: Operator inhibit lock active"). The OFF key (red) is enabled. The
LOCAL/REMOTE, ON (green), JOG, CW/CCW, INCREASE, and DECREASE keys are
disabled.
Parameters disable (factory setting: Not active)
● Active: Parameters cannot be changed unless a password is entered. Parameters are
assigned in the same way as in the operator inhibit lock state. If you try to change
parameter values, the message "Note: Parameters disable active" is displayed. All the
control keys, however, remain enabled.
Access level (factory setting: Expert):
The different parameters required for this complex application are filtered so that they can be
displayed as clearly as possible. You select them according to the access level.
An expert level, which must only be used by expert personnel, is required for certain actions.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

286 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

9.3.8 Faults and alarms

Displaying faults and alarms

If a fault occurs, the drive displays the fault(s) and/or alarm(s) on the operator panel. Faults
are indicated by means of the red "FAULT" LED lighting up.
The "Fault/alarm overview" also appears automatically in the following two cases:
1. When a fault is registered while the system is ramping up
2. If the first fault is registered on the operation screen
You can use the F1 (Help) function on the screen to call up information about the cause of
the fault and how to remedy it. You can use F5 (Ack.) to acknowledge a stored fault.
Any alarms that are pending are indicated by means of the yellow "ALARM" LED lighting up.
Additionally, a note relating to the cause of the alarm is displayed in the status bar of the
operator panel.

What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional (unwanted)
status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered, for
example, by the winding temperature monitoring function for the motor. The faults are
displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS.

What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive. It does not result in the
drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self-
acknowledging"; that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.

Displaying faults and alarms

Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with the time at which it
occurred. This time stamp can take 2 forms:
● Number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the AOP was first switched on
(format DDDD: HH:MM:SS) (no "AOP→ Drive" time synchronization)
● System time (format YY:MM:DD HH:MM:SS = Year:Month:Day Hour:Minute:Second), in
cases where a time-of-day master is present in the system (if "AOP → Drive" time
synchronization is active, for example)
You can call up an overview screen that displays the current status of faults and/or alarms
for every drive object in the system by choosing MENU – Fault/alarm memory.
A shortcut menu offering the "Back" and "Ack." options appears when you press F4
("Tools+"). (You can use F4 to exit the shortcut menu.) The function required can be
selected using F2 and F3 and executed by pressing F5 ("OK").
The "Ack." function sends an acknowledgement signal to each drive object.
The red FAULT LED goes out once all the faults have been acknowledged.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 287
Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

^'&B&75/`)DXOWV  ([WHUQDOIDXOW

) ([WHUQDOIDXOW )DXOWYDOXH[KH[
&DXVH
) 7KH%,&2VLJQDOIRUH[WHUQDOIDXOW
KDVEHHQWULJJHUHG
5HPHG\

+HOS
 %DFN $FN %DFN


) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
Figure 9-22 Fault screen

You can use F5 (Ack.) to acknowledge a stored fault.

^'&B&75/`$ODUPV ([WHUQDODODUP
$ 0RWRUGDWD,' $FWLYH $ODUPYDOXH[KH[
$ ([WHUQDODODUP $FWLYH &DXVH
) 7KH%,&2VLJQDOIRUH[WHUQDODODUP
KDVEHHQWULJJHUHG
7KHFRQGLWLRQIRUWKLVH[WHUQDO

+HOS
 %DFN &OHDU %DFN


) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
Figure 9-23 Alarm screen

Alarms that are no longer active are removed from the alarm memory with F5 (Clear).

9.3.9 Saving the parameters permanently

Description
If parameters are changed using the operator panel (confirm with OK in the Parameter
editor), the new values are initially stored in the volatile memory (RAM) of the converter. An
"S" flashes in the top right of the AOP display until they are saved permanently. This
indicates that at least 1 parameter has been changed and not yet stored permanently.
2 methods are available for permanently saving parameters that have been changed:
● To store the parameters permanently, choose <MENU> <Parameterization> <OK>
<Permanent parameter transfer>.
● When confirming a parameter setting with the OK key, press it for > 1 s. The system
displays a message asking you whether the setting is to be saved in the EEPROM.
If you press "Yes", the system saves the setting in the EEPROM. If you press "No", the
setting is not saved permanently and the "S" starts flashing to indicate this fact.
In both cases, all changes that have not yet been saved permanently are stored in the
EEPROM. Depending on the configuration, this can take from 45 s to several minutes. Also
refer to the "CompactFlash Card functions" chapter.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

288 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Operation
9.3 Controlling via the AOP30 operator panel

NOTICE
During a saving process triggered by the user, the electronic power supply for the
SINAMICS DC MASTER must not be interrupted.
An active saving process is indicated by the following actions:
• The RDY LED flashes (see the "Description of functions" chapter, "Description of the
LEDs on the CUD" section)
• The BOP20 flashes
Interrupting the power supply while saving can lead to the loss of the current device
parameter assignments. Also refer to the "Operation" chapter, "CompactFlash Card
functions" section.

9.3.10 Parameterization errors

If an error is made when reading or writing parameters, a popup window explaining the
cause of the problem in plain text appears.

Example: Parameter write error

Value limit exceeded

9.3.11 Assigning parameters to make AOP30 time-of-day master

The AOP30 contains an integrated real-time clock. The SINAMICS DCM system time can be
synchronized with this real-time clock. This function can be activated with the following
steps:
● On the AOP30 in the "Menu/Commissioning/Service/AOP settings/Date and Time" menu
command activate to "AOP sets clock in SINAMICS".
● The current clock time in the AOP30 is then written into the drive.
In the display for faults and alarms, the time stamp is now displayed in the format YY-MM-
DD hh:mm in real-time. The time stamp mode and the current clock time can be read from
the parameters p3100, p3102 and p3103. For details, please see the SINAMICS DCM List
Manual.
The current clock time is resynchronized at each power-up. (The AOP30 must be switched
on together with the drive). During uninterrupted duty, a synchronization takes place every
day at 02:00.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 289
Descriptions of functions 10
10.1 Inputs/Outputs

10.1.1 Overview of inputs/outputs

Table 10- 1 Overview of inputs and outputs

Component Digital Analog

CUD • 4 inputs • 7 inputs
(2 inputs freely available, 2 inputs for /OFF2 • 2 outputs
and enable pre-assigned)
• 1 temperature sensor input
• 4 bidirectional inputs/outputs
• 4 outputs
• 1 incremental encoder input
Power interface • 1 E-Stop input • 1 analog tachometer input
• 1 line contactor relay output • 2 temperature sensor inputs
• 1 fan control relay output • 2 current transformer inputs
• 1 fan monitoring input
• 1 external fault input
TM15 • 24 bidirectional inputs/outputs -
TM31 • 8 inputs • 2 inputs
• 4 bidirectional inputs/outputs • 2 outputs
• 2 relay outputs • 1 temperature sensor input
Technical data for inputs and outputs:
• For the CUD and power interface, refer to the section titled "Connecting".
• For the TM15 and TM31, refer to the section titled "Additional system components".

10.1.2 Digital inputs/outputs

Function diagrams in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual

2050 Digital inputs DI0 to DI3

2055 Digital outputs DO0 to DO3
2060 Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs DI/DO4 and DI/DO5
2065 Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs DI/DO6 and DI/DO7
2070 E-Stop (XS1)
8047 Unit fan (XV1, XV2, XV3)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 291
Descriptions of functions
10.1 Inputs/Outputs

10.1.3 Analog inputs

Properties

Table 10- 2 Properties of the analog inputs

Inputs Properties
AI0, AI1 • Differential inputs
• Voltage inputs -10 to +10 V or
Current inputs -20 to +20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
• Hardware input filter: T = 1 ms
• Integrating measuring procedure. Averaging time = 1 ms. The average value determined during
this time is provided in BICO format.
AI2 • Differential input
• Voltage input -10 to +10 V
• Hardware input filter: T = 1 ms
• Integrating measuring procedure. Averaging time = 1 ms. The average value determined during
this time is provided in BICO format.
The 3 inputs AI0, AI1, and AI2 of a CUD on the left and the 3 inputs AI0, AI1, and AI2 of a CUD on the right can be
operated so that they are averaged during the same measuring interval. The 6 mean values are provided on 6 BICOs (see
FP2083).
AI3, AI4, AI5, AI6 • Differential inputs
• Voltage inputs -10 to +10 V
• Hardware input filter: T = 100 µs
• Sampling measuring procedure. Sampling time = 250 µs. The mean value taken from 4 sampling
values is provided in BICO format.
An external actual armature current value or an external actual armature voltage value can be
supplied at these inputs (see FP6850 and FP6902).
Power interface • Input referred to ground
tachometer input • High-voltage input -270 to +270 V
XT1.103/104 • Hardware input filter: T = 1 ms
• Integrating measuring procedure. Averaging time = 1 ms. The average value determined during
this time is provided in BICO format.
This input is designed for connecting an analog tachometer, but can also be used in other ways.
Power interface • Input referred to ground
XT5, XT6 • NTC 10 kΩ connection
Power interface • Input referred to ground
X7, X8 • Current transformer connection
• Internal 10 Ω load resistors

Function diagrams

2075 Analog inputs AI0 and XT1.103/104

2080 Analog inputs AI1 and AI2
2085 Analog inputs AI3 and AI4

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

292 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.1 Inputs/Outputs

2090 Analog inputs AI5 and AI6

8048 Monitoring inside the unit (XT5,XT6)

10.1.4 Analog outputs

See function diagram 2095 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 293
Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

10.2 PROFIBUS

10.2.1 PROFIBUS connection

Position of PROFIBUS connection and diagnostics LEDs

The PROFIBUS connection and diagnostics LEDs are located on the Control Unit (CUD).
The PROFIBUS connection is established using a 9-pin Sub-D socket (X126). The
connections are electrically isolated.

PROFIBUS connection

Table 10- 3 PROFIBUS connector assignment

Connector Pin Signal name Technical data

X126
1 - Not assigned
2 - Not assigned
3 RxD/TxD-P RS485 receive/transmit data P (B)
4 CNTR-P Control signal (TTL)
5 DGND PROFIBUS data ground
6 VP Positive supply voltage (5 V +/-10%)
7 - Not assigned
8 RxD/TxD-N RS485 receive/transmit data N (A)
9 - Not assigned
Module C98043-A7100-L1/L2, Standard/Advanced CUD

Connectors
The cables must be connected using PROFIBUS connectors as these contain the necessary
bus terminating resistors.
The figure below shows suitable PROFIBUS connectors with different cable outlets.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

294 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS connector PROFIBUS connector

without PG/PC connection with PG/PC connection
6ES7972-0BA41-0XA0 6ES7972-0BB41-0XA0

Bus terminating resistor

The bus terminating resistor must be switched on or off depending on its position in the bus,
otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly.
Principle: The terminating resistors must only be switched on at both ends of the bus line;
the resistors must be switched off at all other connectors.
The cable shield must be connected at both ends and over a large surface area.

)LUVWEXVQRGH /DVWEXVQRGH

RQ RQ RQ

RII RII RII

%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ %XVWHUPLQDWLRQ

)URPSUHYLRXV 7RQH[W
EXVQRGH EXVQRGH

Figure 10-1 Position of the bus terminating resistors

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 295
Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

10.2.2 Control via PROFIBUS

"DP1 (PROFIBUS)" diagnostics LED

The PROFIBUS diagnostics LED is located on the Control Unit (CUD). It can be seen when
you remove the front cover of the SINAMICS DC MASTER. The table below outlines the
different meanings its states have.

Table 10- 4 Description of the LED

Color State Description

----- Off Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place.
Green Continuous PROFIBUS is ready for communication and cyclic communication is taking place.
Green 0.5 Hz flashing Cyclic communication is not yet running fully.
light Possible reason: The master is not transmitting setpoints.
Red Continuous Cyclic communication has been interrupted.

10.2.3 Monitoring: Telegram failure

Description
Following a telegram failure and after a monitoring time has elapsed (t_An), bit r2043.0 is set
to "1" and alarm A01920 is output. Binector output r2043.0 can be used for a quick stop,
for example.
Once a delay time (p2044) has elapsed, fault F01910 is output and fault reaction OFF3
(quick stop) is triggered. If no OFF response is to be triggered, the fault response can be
reparameterized accordingly.
Fault F01910 can be acknowledged immediately. The drive can then be operated even
without PROFIBUS.

S
U
&\FOLFWHOHJUDPV
IURPPDVWHU 7  $
S
W
6 4 7 
)

5 4

Figure 10-2 Monitoring: Telegram failure

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

296 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

10.2.4 Telegrams and process data

General information
Selecting a telegram via CU parameter p0922 determines which process data is transferred
between the master and slave.
From the perspective of the slave (SINAMICS DC MASTER), the received process data
comprises the receive words, and the process data to be sent comprises the send words.
The receive and send words comprise the following elements:

• Receive words: Control words and setpoints

• Send words: Status words and actual values

User-defined telegram selection

a. Standard telegrams
Standard telegrams are structured in accordance with the PROFIdrive profile or internal
company specifications. The internal process data links are established automatically in
accordance with the telegram number setting in CU parameter p0922.
The following standard telegrams can be set via parameter p0922:

• p0922 = 1 → Speed setpoint, 16-bit

• p0922 = 20 → Speed setpoint, 16-bit VIK-NAMUR
• p0922 = 352 → Speed setpoint, 16 PCS7
b. Free telegrams (p0922 = 999)
Send and receive telegrams can be configured as required by using BICO technology to
interconnect the send and receive words. The default process data assigned under a) is
retained during the changeover to p0922 = 999, although it can be changed or
supplemented at any time.
To maintain compliance with the PROFIdrive profile, however, the following assignments
should be retained:
● Interconnect PZD receive word 1 as control word 1 (STW 1)
● Interconnect PZD send word 1 as status word 1 (STW 1)
Please refer to function diagrams FP2460 and FP2470 for details on interconnection options.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 297
Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

Information on telegram interconnections

After changing p0922 = 999 (factory setting) to p0922 ≠ 999, the telegram interconnection is
made and blocked automatically.

Note
Telegrams 20 and 352 are the exceptions. Here, PZD06 in the send telegram and PZD03 to
PZD06 in the receive telegram can be interconnected as required.

When you change p0922 ≠ 999 to p0922 = 999, the previous telegram interconnection is
retained and can be changed.

Note
If p0922 = 999, a telegram can be selected in p2079. A telegram interconnection is
automatically made and blocked. However, the telegram can also be extended.
This is an easy method of creating extended telegram interconnections on the basis of
existing telegrams.

Table 10- 5 Structure of the telegrams

Telegr. PZD 1 PZD 2 PZD 3 PZD 4 PZD 5 PZD 6 PZD 7 PZD 8 PZD 9 PZD 10
1 STW1 NSET_A
ZSW1 NACT_A
20 STW1 NSET_A
ZSW1 NACT_A_ IAACT_ MACT_ PACT_ SIG_
SMOOTH SMOOT SMOOTH SMOOTH NAMUR
H
352 STW1 NSET_A PCS7_3 PCS7_4 PCS7_5 PCS7_6
ZSW1 NACT_A_ IAACT_ MACT_ ALARM_ FAULT_
SMOOTH SMOOT SMOOTH CODE CODE
H
999 STW1 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free
ZSW1 Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free

10.2.5 Description of control words and setpoints

Overview

Table 10- 6 Overview of control words and setpoints

Abbreviation Description Parameter Function diagram

STW1 Control word 1 See table: "Control word 1" FP2442
NSET_A Speed setpoint A (16-bit) p1070 FP3113
PCS7_x PCS7-specific setpoints

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

298 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

Control word 1 (STW1)

Table 10- 7 Control word 1 (STW1)

Bit Meaning Explanation Operating BICO

condition
0 0 = OFF1 (OFF1) 0: Deceleration on the down ramp, then pulse 1 BI: p0840
inhibit, line contactor (if present) is opened
0 → 1 = ON Pulse enable possible
1 0 = Coast down (OFF2) 0: Pulse inhibit, line contactor (if present) is 1 BI: p0844
opened BI: p0845
1 = Do not coast down Enable possible
Note: Control signal OFF2 is generated by ANDing BI: p0844 and BI: p0845.
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) 0: Deceleration on the quick stop ramp, then 1 BI: p0848
pulse inhibit, line contactor (if present) is opened.
1 = No quick stop Enable possible
Note: Control signal OFF3 is generated by ANDing BI: p0848 and BI: p0849.
3 0 = Inhibit operation 0: Pulse inhibit. The motor coasts down. The 1 BI: p0852
"Ready for Operation" state remains set.
1 = Enable operation 1: Pulse enable, ramp-up with active setpoint
4 0 = Inhibit ramp-function 0: The ramp-function generator output is set to 1 BI: p1140
generator setpoint "0".
1 = Enable ramp-function
generator
5 0 = Stop ramp-function 0: The current setpoint is frozen at the ramp- 1 BI: p1141
generator function generator output.
1 = Start ramp-function
generator
6 1 = Enable speed setpoint 1: The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp- 1 BI: p1142
function generator is enabled.
0 = Inhibit speed setpoint 0: The speed setpoint at the input of the ramp-
function generator is set to zero. The drive
brakes in accordance with the set ramp-down
time.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge fault A positive edge change acknowledges all the - BI: p2103
current faults.
Note: Acknowledgement is realized with a 0/1 edge via BI: p2103 or BI: p2104 or BI: p2105.
8 Reserved - -
9 Reserved - -
10 1 = Control via PLC 1: Profibus control words and setpoints are 1 BI: p0854
analyzed.
0: Profibus control words and setpoints are not
analyzed.
Note: This bit should not be set to "1" until the PROFIBUS slave has returned an appropriate status via ZSW1.9
= "1".
11 Reserved - -
12 Reserved - -

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 299
Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

Bit Meaning Explanation Operating BICO

condition
13 1 = Motorized Only when p0922 = 1 or 352, otherwise reserved - BI: p1035
potentiometer, higher
14 1 = Motorized Only when p0922 = 1 or 352, otherwise reserved - BI: p1036
potentiometer,
lower
Note:
If "Motorized potentiometer, higher" and "Motorized potentiometer, lower" both 0 or 1 at the same time, the
current setpoint is frozen.
15 1 = CDS bit 0 1: Command data set changeover (CDS) bit 0 is - BI: p0810
(only with telegrams p0922 active.
= 20!) 0: Command data set changeover (CDS) bit 0 is
inactive.
Reserved When p0922 = 1 or 352 - -

Setpoints

Speed setpoint A, 16-bit (NSET_A)

● Speed setpoint with 16-bit resolution incl. sign bit
● Bit 15 determines the setpoint sign:
– Bit = 0 → Positive setpoint
– Bit = 1 → Negative setpoint
● The speed setpoint is scaled via parameter p2000.
N_set_A = 4000 hex or 16384 dec = speed in p2000

PCS7-specific setpoints (PCS7 x)

Depending on the configuration, KP adaptation values for the speed controller and
acceleration values or other setpoints, for example, are transferred here.

10.2.6 Description of status words and actual values

Overview

Table 10- 8 Overview of status words and actual values

Abbreviation Description Parameter Function diagram

ZSW1 Status word 1 See table "Status word 1" FP2452
NACT_A Speed setpoint A (16-bit) r0063 FP6810
NACT_SMOOTH Actual speed value, smoothed r0021 FP6810
IAACT_SMOOTH Actual current value, smoothed r0068 FP6850

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

300 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

Abbreviation Description Parameter Function diagram

MACT_SMOOTH Actual torque value, smoothed r0080 -
PACT_SMOOTH Actual power value, smoothed r0032 -
ALARM_CODE Alarm code r2132 FP8065
ERROR_CODE Fault code r2131 FP8060

Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Table 10- 9 Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Bit Meaning Explanation BICO

0 Ready for Switching On 1 Ready for Switching On BO: r0899.0
Power supply on, electronics initialized, line contactor
released if necessary, pulses inhibited
0 Not Ready for Switching On
1 Ready for Operation 1 Ready for Operation BO: r0899.1
Line voltage applied, i.e. line contactor closed (if
present), field being built up
0 Not Ready for Operation
Reason: No ON command has been issued.
2 Operation Enabled 1 Operation Enabled BO: r0899.2
Enable electronics and pulses, then ramp up to active
setpoint
0 Operation Disabled
3 Fault active 1 Fault active BO: r2139.3
The drive is faulty and, therefore, out of service. The
drive switches to "switching on inhibited" once the fault
has been acknowledged and the cause has been
remedied. The active faults are stored in the fault buffer.
0 No fault active
There are no faults in the fault buffer.
4 Coasting down not active 1 Coasting down (OFF2) not active BO: r0899.4
(OFF2 inactive) 0 Coasting down active (OFF2)
An OFF2 command is active.
5 Quick stop not active 1 Quick stop (OFF3) not active BO: r0899.5
(OFF3 inactive) 0 Quick stop active (OFF3)
An OFF3 command is active.
6 Switching on inhibited active 1 Switching on inhibited BO: r0899.6
Switching back on is only possible by means of OFF1
and then ON.
0 No switching on inhibited
Switching on is possible.
7 Alarm active 1 Alarm active BO: r2139.7
The drive is operational again. No acknowledgement
necessary.
The active alarms are stored in the alarm buffer.
0 No alarm active
No alarms in the alarm buffer.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 301
Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

Bit Meaning Explanation BICO

8 Speed setpoint/actual value 1 Setpoint/actual value monitoring in tolerance band BO: r2197.7
deviation in tolerance Actual value within tolerance band; dynamic overshoot
or undershoot permitted for t < tmax, tmax can be
parameterized. See FP8020 and FP2534
0 Setpoint/actual value monitoring not within tolerance
band
9 Control request 1 Control request BO: r0899.9
"1" is always present 0 Local operation
10 n setpoint reached or exceeded 1 n setpoint reached or exceeded BO: r2199.1
0 n setpoint not reached
Note:
The message is parameterized as follows: p50373 (threshold value), p50374 (hysteresis)
See FP8020 and FP2537
11 I or M limit not reached (when 1 I or M limit not reached BO: r1407.7
p0922 = 1 or 352) 0 I or M limit reached or exceeded (inverted)

I or M limit not reached (when 1 I or M limit not reached BO: 0056.13

p0922 = 20) 0 I or M limit reached or exceeded (inverted)
12 Holding brake released 1 Holding brake is released BO: r0899.12
(when p0922 = 1 or 352) 0 Holding brake is not released
Reserved (when p0922 = 20)
13 Reserved
14 Motor rotates forward 1 Motor rotates forward (n_act ≥ 0) BO: r2197.3
(n_act ≥ 0) 0 Motor does not rotate forward (n_act < 0)
15 Reserved
(when p0922 = 1 or 352)
CDS display 1 CDS selection bit 0 selected BO: r0836.0
(when p0922 = 20) 0 CDS selection bit 0 not selected

Actual values

Actual speed value A 16-bit (NACT_A, NACT_SMOOTH)

● Actual speed value with 16-bit resolution incl. sign bit
● Bit 15 determines the actual value sign:
– Bit = 0 → positive actual value
– Bit = 1 → negative actual value
● The actual speed value is scaled using parameter p2000.
N_act_A = 4000 hex or 16384 dec = speed in p2000

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

302 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.2 PROFIBUS

Actual current value (IAACT, IAACT_SMOOTH)

● Actual current value with 16-bit resolution
● The actual current value is scaled using parameter p2002.
Ia_act = 4000 hex or 16384 dec = current in p2002

Actual torque value (MACT, MACT_SMOOTH)

● Actual torque value with 16-bit resolution incl. sign bit
● Bit 15 determines the actual value sign:
– Bit = 0 → positive actual value
– Bit = 1 → negative actual value
● The actual torque value is scaled using parameter p2003.
M_act = 4000 hex or 16384 dec = torque in p2003

Actual power value (PACT, PACT_SMOOTH)

● Actual power value with 16-bit resolution incl. sign bit
● Bit 15 determines the actual value sign:
– Bit = 0 → positive actual value
– Bit = 1 → negative actual value
● The actual power value is scaled using parameter p2004.
P_act = 4000 hex or 16384 dec = power in p2004

Alarm code (ALARM_CODE)

The number of the current alarm and the last alarm to occur are output here. Decimal
notation is used (i.e. value 7910 dec = A07910 (motor overtemperature)).

Fault code (FAULT_CODE)

The number of the oldest fault still active is output here. Decimal notation is used (i.e. value
7860 dec = fault F07860 (external fault 1)).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 303
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

10.3 PROFINET IO

10.3.1 Activating online mode: STARTER via PROFINET IO

Description
The following options are available for activating online mode via PROFINET IO:
● Online mode via IP

Preconditions
● STARTER with Version ≥ 4.1.5 (SINAMICS DCM is supported starting only from
STARTER Version 4.1.5)
● CBE20

STARTER via PROFINET IO (example)

352),1(7
LQWHUIDFH
&8'
67$57(5 3*3&
(WKHUQHW 352),1(7 'HYLFH
DGDSWHU
,3

Figure 10-3 STARTER via PROFINET (example)

Procedure for activating online mode with PROFINET

1. Set the IP address in Windows XP
This involves assigning a fixed, free IP address to the PC/PG.
2. Settings in STARTER
3. Enter the IP address and a name for the drive unit's PROFINET interface.
The PROFIBUS interface must be named so that STARTER can establish
communication.
4. Select online mode in STARTER.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

304 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Set the IP address in Windows XP.

On the desktop, right-click on "Network environment" -> Properties -> double-click on
Network card and choose -> Properties -> Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) -> Properties -> Enter
the freely-assignable addresses.

Figure 10-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) properties

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 305
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Settings in STARTER
The following settings are required in STARTER for communication via PROFINET:
● Tools → Set PG/PC interface...

Figure 10-5 Set PG/PC interface

Assigning the IP address and name for the PROFINET interface of the drive unit
Use the STARTER to assign an IP address and a name to the PROFINET interface (e.g.
CBE20).
Precondition:
● Connect the direct Ethernet cable from the PG/PC to the PROFINET interface of the
Control Unit (CUD).
● Switch on the Control Unit (CUD).
The accessible nodes must be searched in STARTER:
● Project → Accessible nodes
The nodes are then displayed in the dialog screen.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

306 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Figure 10-6 STARTER - Accessible nodes

The selected node is edited by right-clicking the field for the node and selecting the option
"Edit Ethernet node...".

Figure 10-7 STARTER - Accessible nodes - Edit Ethernet node

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 307
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

In the dialog screen that appears next, enter a freely selectable unit name, the IP address,
and subnet screen.
The subnet screens must match before STARTER can be run.

Figure 10-8 STARTER - Edit Ethernet Node

After selecting the "Assign name" button, the following confirmation will appear if the
assignment was successful: Simultaneously, a RAM to ROM is executed in the drive and
one must wait for it to complete.

Figure 10-9 STARTER - Successful assignment of the unit name

After selecting the "Assign IP configuration" button, the following confirmation will appear if
the assignment was successful: Simultaneously, a RAM to ROM is executed in the drive and
one must wait for it to complete.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

308 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Figure 10-10 STARTER - Successful assignment of the IP configuration

Once the "Edit Ethernet Node" dialog screen has closed and the node overview has been
updated (F5), a display indicates that the node properties have been successfully assigned.

Figure 10-11 STARTER - Accessible nodes update completed

Note
The IP addresses allocated for the PC and the Profinet interface in the drive must be
different; otherwise communication between the PC and drive is not possible.

Note
The IP address and device name for the Control Unit are stored in the non-volatile memory
as parameters (p61000 and p61001) and also internally in the CBE20. If a previously
parameterized CBE20 is plugged into another drive, the drive takes over the IP address and
device name of the previously parameterized CBE20.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 309
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

10.3.2 General information about PROFINET IO

10.3.2.1 General information about PROFINET IO for SINAMICS

General information
PROFINET IO is an open Industrial Ethernet standard for a wide range of production and
process automation applications. PROFINET IO is based on Industrial Ethernet and
observes TCP/IP and IT standards.
The following standards ensure open, multi-vendor systems:
● International standard IEC 61158
PROFINET IO is optimized for high-speed, time-critical data communication at field level.

PROFINET
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
development of the following systems:
● PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus,
and
● Industrial Ethernet, the communication bus for the cell level
Experiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET. As an
Ethernet-based automation standard defined by PROFIBUS International (PROFIBUS
Nutzerorganisation e.V. (PROFIBUS user organization)), PROFINET is a manufacturer-
independent communication and engineering model.
When a Communication Board CBE20 is inserted, a SINAMICS DC MASTER becomes an
IO device in terms of PROFINET. The SINAMICS DC MASTER and CBE20 can be used for
communication via PROFINET IO with RT.

CAUTION
Inserting the CBE20 Communication Board deactivates the cyclic PZD channel for
PROFIBUS DP.

Note
PROFINET for drive technology is standardized and described in the following document:
References:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
PROFINET System Description,
Order number 6ES7398-8FA10-8AA0, 6ES7151-1AA10-8AA0

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

310 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

10.3.2.2 Real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time (IRT) communication

Real-time communication
If supervisors are involved in communication, this can result in excessively long runtimes for
the production automation system. When communicating time-critical IO user data,
PROFINET therefore uses its own real-time channel, rather than TCP/IP.

Definition: Real time (RT) and determinism

Real time means that a system processes external events over a defined period.
Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable manner (deterministically).
In industrial networks, both these requirements are important. PROFINET meets these
requirements and is, therefore, implemented as a deterministic real-time network as follows:
● Transmission of time-critical data takes place at guaranteed time intervals. To achieve
this, PROFINET provides an optimized communications channel for real-time
communication: Real time (RT).
● It is possible to predict the exact time at which data transmission will take place.
● Problem-free communication using other standard protocols is guaranteed within the
same network.

Definition: Isochronous real-time communication (IRT)

Isochronous real-time Ethernet: Real-time properties of PROFINET IO where IRT telegrams
are transmitted deterministically via scheduled communication paths in a defined sequence
to achieve the best possible synchronism and performance. This is also known as time-
scheduled communication and uses knowledge about the network structure. IRT requires
special network components that support scheduled data transmission.
When the transfer procedure is implemented in the ERTEC ASICs (Enhanced Real-Time
Ethernet Controller), this results in cycle times of at least. 500 μs and a jitter accuracy of less
than 1 μs.

HJPVF\FOH
5HVHUYHGUDQJH 0LQLPXPZLGWK

&\FOLFVFKHGXOHG 6SRQWDQHRXVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ

FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
0RQLWRUHGOLPLW 0RQLWRUHGOLPLW

Figure 10-12 Bandwidth distribution/reservation, PROFINET IO IRT

Note
Currently, only communication via PROFINET IO with RT is possible when operating S7-300
stations with SINAMICS drives.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 311
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

10.3.2.3 Addresses

Definition: MAC address

Each PROFINET device is assigned a globally unique device identifier at the factory. This 6-
byte long device identifier is the MAC address. The MAC address consists of:
● 3 bytes manufacturer's ID and
● 3-byte device identification (consecutive number)
The MAC address is usually indicated on the front of the device.
For example: 08-00-06-6B-80-C0

IP address
To enable a PROFINET device to be addressed as a node on Industrial Ethernet, this device
also requires an IP address that is unique within the network. The IP address is made up of
4 decimal numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255. The decimal numbers are
separated by periods. The IP address is made up of
● The address of the (sub-) network and
● The address of the node (generally called the host or network node)

IP address assignment
The TCP/IP protocol is required to establish a connection and assign parameters; this is the
reason that an IP address is required.
The IP addresses of IO devices can be assigned by the IO controller and always have the
same subnet screen as the IO controller. They can be assigned in an ascending sequence
starting from the IP address of the IO controller. The IP address can be changed manually if
necessary, and is saved in the volatile memory.
If the IP address is to be saved in the non-volatile memory, the address must be assigned
using the Primary Setup Tool (PST) or STARTER.
This can also be carried out using HWConfig in STEP 7, where the function is called "Edit
Ethernet node".

Note
If the network is part of an existing Ethernet company network, ask your network
administrator for the information you need (IP address, subnet screen, and any router that
may be in use.)

Device name
In its delivery state, an IO device does not have a device name. An IO device can only be
addressed by an IO controller (in order to transmit project engineering data (including the IP
address) during startup or exchange user data during cyclic operation, for example) after it
has been assigned a device name with the IO supervisor.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

312 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

NOTICE
The device name must be saved in the non-volatile memory using either the Primary Setup
Tool (PST) or HW Config in STEP 7.

Replacing the Control Unit (CUD) (IO device)

The IP address and device name are stored in the non-volatile memory in the form of
parameters (p61000 und p61001).
If a module is replaced, therefore, it is possible to continue running it as a PROFINET device
by resetting the parameters.

Definition: Subnet screen

The bits set in the subnet screen define the part of the IP address that contains the address
of the (sub)network. The following generally applies:
● The network address is obtained by an AND logic operation on the IP address and
subnet screen.
● The node address is obtained by an AND NOT logic operation on the IP address and
subnet screen.

Subnet screen example

Subnet screen: 255.255.0.0 (decimal) = 11111111.11111111.00000000.00000000 (binary),
IP address: 140.80.0.2, significance: The first 2 bytes of the IP address determine the
subnetwork; i.e. 140.80. The last two bytes address the node; i.e. 0.2.

Default router
If data needs to be forwarded via TCP/IP to a partner located outside the subnetwork, this is
carried out via the default router. In the Properties dialog in STEP 7 (Properties of Ethernet
interface > Parameters > Network transfer), the default router is referred to as the router.
STEP 7 assigns the local IP address to the default router.

10.3.2.4 Data transmission

Properties
The Communication Board CBE20 supports:
● IRT – isochronous real-time Ethernet
● RT – real-time Ethernet
● Standard Ethernet services (TCP/IP, LLDP, UDP, and DCP)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 313
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

PROFIdrive telegram for cyclic data transmission and non-cyclic services

Telegrams to send and receive process data are available for each drive object of a drive
unit with cyclic process data exchange. In addition to cyclic data transfer, acyclic services
can also be used for parameterizing and configuring the drive. These acyclic services can be
used by the supervisor or the controller.
The total length of the Ethernet frame increases with the number of drive objects in a drive
unit.

Sequence of drive objects during data transmission

The sequence of drive objects is displayed via a list in p0978[0...15]; it can also be changed
using this parameter.

Note
The sequence of drive objects in HW Config must be the same as that in the drive (p0978).

NOTICE
A ring-type topology is not permissible.

10.3.3 Hardware configuration (configuring SINAMICS drives with PROFINET)

Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

The CBE20 option module is inserted in the option slot of the CUD. The CBE20 is equipped
with a PROFINET interface with 4 ports that can be used to connect the PROFINET
subnetwork.

Note
The ports must not be interconnected in such a way that a ring topology is created.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

314 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Cycle generation
A SINAMICS DC MASTER with CBE20 can only act as a synchronization slave within a
PROFINET IO network.
● CBE20 module is plugged into CUD:
– The cyclic DP interface is disabled.
– Transmission type IRT, device is synchronization slave and isochronous, cycle is
applied to bus: CBE20 synchronizes, providing the cycle for the CUD.
– RT or IRT (option "not isochronous") has been configured. The SINAMICS DC
MASTER uses a local cycle (cycle configured in SINAMICS DC MASTER).
● The following applies to a CUD for which a CBE20 is configured, but does not exist:
– The SINAMICS DC MASTER uses the local cycle (cycle configured in SINAMICS DC
MASTER); if no data is exchanged via PROFINET, alarm A1487 ("Topology fault") is
issued.
Access via PROFINET is not available.

Telegrams
The following PROFIdrive telegrams can be selected for PROFINET IO communication:
● Isochronous standard telegrams 1, 20
● Telegram 352
● Telegram 999

DCP flashing
This function is used to check whether assignments to a module and its interfaces have
been made correctly.
1. In HW Config or STEP7 Manager, select the menu command "Target system" >
"Ethernet" > "Edit Ethernet node".
2. The "Edit Ethernet Node" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Browse" button.
4. The "Browse Network" dialog box opens and displays the connected nodes.
5. After SINAMICS with CBE20 has been selected as a node, activate the "DCP flashing"
function by means of the "Flash" button.
The "DCP flashing" function is activated on the RDY LED (READY LED 2 Hz, green/orange
or red/orange) on the CUD.
The LED will continue to flash as long as the dialog is open. When the dialog is closed, the
LED will go out automatically. The function is available as of STEP7 V5.3 SP1 via Ethernet.

STEP 7 routing with CBE20

The CBE20 does not support STEP 7 routing between PROFIBUS and PROFINET IO.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 315
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Connecting the IO supervisor

You can go online with STARTER in a number of ways, which are illustrated below:

7RSRORJ\
,2VXSHUYLVRUYLD352),1(7

,2VXSHUYLVRU 'HYLFH &RQWUROOHU

HJ3& HJ&8' HJ6&38

(7 &%( 3% 3% 31

7RSRORJ\
,2VXSHUYLVRURQ352),%86RIFRQWUROOHU

,2VXSHUYLVRU 'HYLFH &RQWUROOHU

HJ3& HJ&8' HJ6&38

3% &%( 3% 3% 31

7RSRORJ\
,2VXSHUYLVRURQ352),%86RIGHYLFH

,2VXSHUYLVRU 'HYLFH
HJ3& HJ&8'

3% &%( 3%

Figure 10-13 Connecting the IO supervisor

NOTICE
SINAMICS does not support routing from PROFIBUS to PROFINET and vice versa.

NOTICE
If a CBE20 module fails (e.g. due to a power failure) then communication with the
subsequent nodes is interrupted at this point.

10.3.4 RT classes for PROFINET IO

Description
PROFINET IO is a scalable real-time communication system based on Ethernet technology.
The scalable approach is expressed in the form of three real-time classes.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

316 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

RT
RT communication is based on standard Ethernet. The data is transferred via prioritized
Ethernet telegrams. Because standard Ethernet does not support any synchronization
mechanisms, isochronous operation is not possible using PROFINET IO with RT. The real-
time capability is comparable with the present 12-MBaud PROFIBUS DP solutions, i.e. a
sufficiently large bandwidth portion is available for transmitting IT services in parallel on the
same line.
The real update time during which cyclic data are exchanged depends on the bus load, the
devices used, and the quantity structure of the I/O data. The update time is a multiple of the
send cycle.

IRT*
Previous RT class IRTtop.

IRT
Two options are available with this RT class:
● IRT "high flexibility"
● IRT "high performance".

Software requirements for configuring IRT:

● STEP 7 5.4 SP4 (HW Config)
● SINAMICS firmware version 2.5 SP1 Hotfix 10 or 2.6.
The software requirements for IRT also apply when configuring RT class IRT*.

Note
For further information about configuring the PROFINET interface for the I/O controller and
I/O device, please refer to the following document: SIMOTION SCOUT Communication
System Manual.

IRT "high flexibility"

The telegrams are sent cyclically in a deterministic cycle (Isochronous Real Time). The
telegrams are exchanged in a bandwidth reserved by the hardware. One IRT time interval
and one standard Ethernet time interval are created for each cycle.

Note
IRT "high flexibility" cannot be used for isochronous applications.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 317
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

IRT "high performance"

In addition to the bandwidth reservation, the telegram traffic can be further optimized by
configuring the topology. This enhances the performance during data exchange and the
deterministic behavior. The IRT time interval can thus be further optimized or minimized with
respect to IRT "high flexibility".
In addition to the isochronous data transmission function provided by IRT, even the
application itself (position control cycle, IPO cycle) can be isochronous in the devices. This is
an essential requirement for closed-loop axis control and synchronization via the bus.
Isochronous data transmission with cycle times well below one millisecond and with a
deviation in the cycle start (jitter) of less than a microsecond provide sufficient performance
reserves for demanding motion control applications.
The RT classes IRT "high flexibility" and IRT "high performance" can be selected as options
in the synchronization settings configuration area of HW Config. In the description below,
both these classes are simply referred to as "IRT".
In contrast to standard Ethernet and PROFINET IO with RT, the telegrams for PROFINET IO
with IRT are transmitted according to a schedule.

IRT* (formerly IRTtop)

Equivalent to the IRT "high performance" function, but a different synchronization method is
used. This is incompatible with the IRT synchronization method (IRT "high flexibility", IRT
"high performance").

Comparison between RT and IRT

Table 10- 10 Comparison between RT and IRT

RT class RT IRT "high flexibility" IRT "high performance"

Transmission mode Switching based on the MAC Switching using the MAC Path-based switching
address; prioritization of the address; according to a topology-
RT telegrams possible using bandwidth reservation by based schedule; no
Ethernet-Prio (VLAN tag) reserving an IRT "high transmission of TCP/IP
flexibility" interval in which frames and IRT "high
only IRT "high flexibility" flexibility" frames in the IRT
frames are transferred but, "high performance" interval
for example, no TCP/IP
frames
Isochronous application No No Yes
in the IO controller
Determinism Variance of the transmission Guaranteed transmission of Precisely scheduled
duration by started TCP/IP the IRT "high flexibility" transmission; times for
telegrams telegrams in the current transmitting and receiving
cycle thanks to reserved are guaranteed for any
bandwidth topologies.
Reload the network Not relevant Only when the size of the Whenever the topology or
configuration after a change IRT "high flexibility" interval the communication
needs to be modified relationships
(position reservation is change
possible)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

318 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

RT class RT IRT "high flexibility" IRT "high performance"

Maximum switching depth 10 at 1 ms 61 32
(number of switches in one
line)
For possible send cycles, see subitem "Send cycles and update times for RT classes" in table "Adjustable send cycles and
update times"

Set the RT class

The RT class is set by means of the IO controller interface properties. If RT class IRT "high
performance" is set, it is not possible to operate any IRT "high flexibility" devices on the IO
controller and vice versa. IO devices with RT can always be operated, regardless of the IRT
class setting.
You can set the RT class for the relevant PROFINET device in HW Config.
1. In HW Config, double-click the PROFINET interface item in the module.
The "Properties" dialog opens.
2. Select the RT class under "RT class" on the "Synchronization" tab.
3. Once you have selected "IRT", you can also choose between "high flexibility" and "high
performance".
4. Confirm with "Update".

Synchronization domain
Taken as a whole, all of the devices that are to be synchronized form a synchronization
domain. The entire domain must be set to a single, specific RT class (real-time class) for
synchronization, meaning that mixed operation of RT classes IRT and IRT* is not
permissible. Different synchronization domains can communicate with one another via RT.
With IRT* and IRT, all IO devices and IO controllers must be synchronized with a common
synchronization master.
IRT* drive units can be replaced with IRT drive units in HW Config. This conversion from
IRT* to IRT and vice versa is not performed automatically, but instead must be carried out
manually.
The HW Config consistency check ascertains whether modules communicating with one
another within a single synchronization domain are all configured to use the same RT
classes: All modules use either IRT* or IRT.
RT allows an IO controller to communicate with a drive unit outside a synchronization
domain or "through" another synchronization domain. As of version 5.4 SP1, STEP 7
supports multiple synchronization domains on a single Ethernet subnetwork.
Example:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 319
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

● Synchronization domain IRT*: SIMOTION 1 with SINAMICS

● Synchronization domain IRT: SIMOTION 2 with SINAMICS
● SINAMICS, which is assigned to the IO system of SIMOTION 1, is arranged in the
topology in such a way that its RT communication must be conducted through the IRT
synchronization domain.

6\QFGRPDLQ 6\QFGRPDLQ
,57 ,57

6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6

6,027,21
6,027,21

Figure 10-14 RT communication across the limits of synchronization domains

- - - Communication outside synchronization domains

Update times and send cycles for RT classes

Definition of update time/send cycle:

If we take a single IO device in the PROFINET IO system as an example, this device has
been supplied with new data (outputs) by the IO controller and has transferred new data
(inputs) to the IO controller within the update time. The send cycle is the shortest possible
update time.
All cyclic data is transferred within the send cycle. The actual send cycle that can be set
depends on various factors:
● Bus load
● Type of devices used
● Computing capacity available in the IO controller
● Send cycles supported in the PROFINET devices assigned to a synchronization domain.
1 ms is an example of a typical send cycle.

The table below specifies the reduction ratios which can be set between the send cycle and
the update times for IRT*, IRT "high performance", IRT "high flexibility", and RT.

Table 10- 11 Adjustable send cycles and update times

Send cycle Reduction ratios between update time and send cycle
RT IRT*
IRT "high flexibility" 4) IRT "high performance"

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

320 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Range 250, 500, 1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128,256,512 IRT*: 1

"even" 1) 1,000 µs IRT "high performance": 1,2,4,8,16 2)
2,000 µs 1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128,256 IRT*: 1
IRT "high performance": 1,2,4,8,16 2)
4,000 µs 1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128 IRT*: 1
IRT "high performance": 1,2,4,8,16 2)
Range 375, 625, 750, Not supported 5) 1
"uneven"3) 875, 1125,
1,250 to
3,875 µs
(increment
125 µs)

Note
There is no intersection between the send cycles for the "even" and "uneven" ranges.

Explanations for the above table:

1) It is only possible to set send cycles from the "even" range when IO devices with RT class
"RT" are assigned to a synchronization domain. Likewise, only the reduction ratios from the
"even" range can be set for a send cycle setting from the "even" range.
2) It is generally only possible to set a reduction ratio of 1:1 between the update time and
send cycle for IO devices (ET200S IM151-3 PN HS, SINAMICS S) which are operated in
isochronous mode. In this case, the update time mode must always be set to "fixed factor"
(under "I/O device" properties, "IO cycle" tab, "Mode" pulldown menu). This means that
STEP 7 will not automatically adjust the update time and, therefore, that the update time will
always correspond to the send cycle.
3) The send cycles from the "uneven" range can be set only if a synchronization domain
does not include any IO devices with RT class "RT". Likewise, only the reduction ratios from
the "uneven" range can be set for a send cycle setting from the "uneven" range.
4) Isochronous operation is not compatible with IRT "high flexibility".
5) Uneven send cycles can be used only if the IO systems assigned to the synchronization
domain do not include any RT or IRT "high flexibility" devices.
Furthermore, the send cycles which can actually be set are determined by the intersection
between the send cycles supported by all the devices in the synchronization domain.
The reduction ratio between the update time of an IO device and the send cycle is set in the
"Properties" of the PROFINET interface for the relevant device.

Send cycles for SINAMICS drive units

A SINAMICS drive unit with PROFINET interface which supports IRT*/IRT permits send
cycle settings of between 0.5 ms and 4.0 ms in a 250 µs time frame.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 321
Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

Topology rules
Topology rules for RT
● A topology can be configured for RT, but does not need to be. If a topology has been
configured, the devices must be wired in accordance with the topology.
● Apart from this stipulation, the devices can be wired in any way you wish.

Topology rules for IRT* and IRT

● Mixed operation is not supported by STEP 7 V5.4 SP4, i.e. IRT "high performance"
cannot be combined with IRT "high flexibility" in the same synchronization domain.
● A synchronization domain with IRT*/IRT "high performance" can contain a maximum of
one IRT*/IRT "high performance" island. An "island" refers to the fact that the devices
must be interconnected to match the configured topology. A synchronization master must
be positioned in the relevant island.
● IRT "high flexibility" is subject to the same topology rules as IRT*/IRT "high performance",
the only exception being that a topology does not need to be configured. However, if a
topology has been configured, the devices must be wired to match the topology.

Device selection in HW Config

Hardware catalog:
The drive unit from the appropriate unit family entry in the hardware catalog must then be
configured. These are all the entries with end identifier ...PN-V2.2 for RT class IRT. The
remaining entries are for RT class IRT*.
GSD:
Two GSD files are also available (one each for IRT* and IRT) for SINAMICS firmware
versions V2.5 SP1 Hotfix 10 and V2.6. The names of GSD files for devices which contain
IRT end in …PN-V2.2.

10.3.5 Selection of the PROFINET variant

PROFINET variants
The PROFINET variant for the PROFINET interface can be selected as of SINAMICS
firmware version 2.5 SP1 Hotfix 10.
Only one of the available PROFINET variants can be loaded as firmware at any one time to
the Control Unit. All firmware files provided for different PROFINET variants are stored on
the Control Unit's memory card.
The different PROFINET variants are listed below:
● PROFINET version 2.1 (RT class IRT*)
● PROFINET version 2.2 (RT class IRT)
● Customized
The PROFINET variants required are each stored in a separate UFW file on the memory
card. The pointer file OPTBOARD.INF contains the names of the UFW files to be loaded.
The contents of the pointer file are modified in order to switch from one firmware variant to

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

322 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.3 PROFINET IO

another. POWER ON must then be executed to activate the change in variant. During the
subsequent system boot, the UFW file referenced in the pointer file is loaded.
The pointer file refers to PROFINET V2.2 by default.

Table 10- 12 UFW files and selected in the pointer file

UFW file and folder on memory card Functionality Pointer file content
/SIEMENS/SINAMICS/CODE/CB/ PROFINET V2.1 CBE20=0
CBE20_0.UFW
/SIEMENS/SINAMICS/CODE/CB/ PROFINET V2.2 CBE20=1
CBE20_1.UFW
/OEM/SINAMICS/CODE/CB/ Customized CBE20=99
CBE20.UFW

The new parameter (p8835) available as of firmware version 2.6 can be used to modify/read
the content of the pointer file OPTBOARD.INF. This file must be edited manually with other
firmware versions. The default value PROFINET is p8835 = (1).
Indices of p8835:
0 = PROFINET V2.1
1 = PROFINET V2.2
99 = Customized
Writing the parameter modifies the content of file OPTBOARD.INF as long as the written
value corresponds to a firmware variant on the card.
Reading the parameter displays the content of file OPTBOARD.INF.
Modifying the parameter effects switchover between the different variants. A POWER ON
must then be performed to activate the change.
Identification of firmware variant:
The OMI diagnostic channel (r8858) can be read to identify which firmware variant of
PROFINET interface is currently loaded.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 323
Descriptions of functions
10.4 Serial interface with USS protocol

10.4 Serial interface with USS protocol

Specification
Developed by SIEMENS, the USS® protocol is a proprietary fieldbus which was already
being used in a variety of applications before PROFIBUS was established. Since the USS®
protocol had not yet been replaced by PROFIBUS in some applications, it was implemented
in the SINAMICS DC MASTER.
The USS® protocol is described in the following document:
USS® Protocol Specification: Order number E20125-D0001-S302-A1

Properties
The USS® protocol can only be used as a fieldbus instead of Profibus; USS and PROFIBUS
cannot run at the same time.
The USS® protocol enables one or more SINAMICS DC MASTER units to be connected to a
master station by means of either a point-to-point or bus-type configuration. A maximum of
31 nodes can be connected in the bus configuration (1 master and a maximum of 30 slaves).
The bus terminator must be activated on both bus nodes at each end of the bus line.
The USS® protocol enables access to all relevant process data, diagnostic information, and
parameters for the SINAMICS DC MASTER.
The USS® protocol is purely a master-slave protocol in which a SINAMICS DC MASTER
can only ever be a slave. In this case, a SINAMICS DC MASTER only sends a telegram to
the master if it has received a telegram from it. Therefore, SINAMICS DC MASTER units
cannot use the USS® protocol to exchange data with one another directly.

Connecting
Terminal X178

Function diagrams
The function diagrams for the fieldbus interface are of relevance here:
See FP2410, FP2420, FP2440, FP2442, FP2450, FP2452, FP2460, FP2470, FP2472,
FP2481, and FP2483.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

324 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.4 Serial interface with USS protocol

Wiring example for a USS bus

0DVWHU 6ODYH 6ODYH 6ODYHQQ 

%XVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUGHDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUGHDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG

6,0$7,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6

&3ZLWK56 '&0$67(5 '&0$67(5 '&0$67(5
PRGXOH
-XPSHU; !ZLUH 5[ 7[ 5[ 7[ 5[ 7[
FDEOH
5[ 7[ 

 ;
;
       
  ;  ;  ; 
˖

68%'FRQQHFWRU
SLQ
 

1) The shields for the interface cables must be connected directly on the units (using a clamp, for example) to unit or
cabinet ground, with a low level of impedance.
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2×0.5 mm2; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding cable should be used to ensure
that the difference in ground potentials between the link partners remains below 7 V.
Figure 10-15 USS bus

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 325
Descriptions of functions
10.5 Switch on, switch off, enable

10.5 Switch on, switch off, enable

10.5.1 Switch on/Switch off (ON/OFF1) - control word bit 0

The "Switch on/Shutdown" (ON/OFF1) function is controlled using the "ON/OFF1 switch-on
command" (= ANDing the signal from terminal X177.12 with the signal selected using
p0840).

The following operating modes are possible here:

p50445 = 0: The "ON/OFF1 switch-on command" takes the form of ANDing the signal
from terminal X177.12 with the signal selected using p0840 (level-controlled,
0 = shutdown, 1 = switch on).
p50445 = 1: Edge triggering of "ON/OFF1 switch-on command":
The switch-on command is saved when a 0 → 1 transition takes place (see
function diagram 3130 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual). The binector
selected using p50444 must be in the log. "1" state at this point. The
memory is reset when this binector enters the log. "0" state.

Sequence of events for switching on the drive:

1. Apply the "Switch on" command (e.g. using the "Switch on/Shutdown" terminal).
2. The system exits operating state o7.
3. The "Line contactor closed" relay (terminal XR1-109 and -110) picks up.
4. The field-current reduction function stops.

If "Operation enable" is applied:

5. With positive brake-release time (p50087):
The "Release holding or operational brake" (r53210.0 = 0) signal is output and p50087 is
awaited in operating state o1.0.
With negative brake-release time (p50087 negative):
Procedure goes straight to step 6; brake not yet closed (r53210.0 = 1).
6. The ramp-function generator, n controller, and I controller are enabled.
7. Once a negative brake-release time (p50087) has elapsed, the "Release holding or
operational brake" (r53210.0 = 0) signal is output.

Procedure for shutting down the drive:

1. Apply the "Shutdown" command (e.g. using the "Switch on/Shutdown" terminal).
2. Deceleration along the ramp-function generator ramp
3. Wait until n < nmin (p50370, p50371).
4. The "Close holding or operational brake" (r53210.0 = 1) signal is output.
5. The brake-closing time (p50088) is awaited.
6. The ramp-function generator and n controller are disabled.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

326 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.5 Switch on, switch off, enable

7. Reduction in armature current

8. The armature firing pulses are disabled.
9. The "Line contactor closed" relay (terminal XR1-109 and XR1-110) drops out.
10.Operating state o7.0 or higher is reached.
11.The wait time for field-current reduction (p50258) elapses.
12.The field is reduced to a parameterizable value (p50257).

"Switch on/Shutdown" overview

2Q

6ZLWFKRQ6KXWGRZQ 6KXWGRZQ
&ORVHGORRSFRQWUROOHUIUHH
&ORVHGORRSFRQWUROOHU
,QWHUQDOFRQWUROOHUHQDEOH QRWIUHH
6HWSRLQWUHOHDVHG

,QWHUQDOVHWSRLQWHQDEOH 6HWSRLQW 
QQPLQSS QQPLQ
Q!QPLQ

6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG
S

$FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH 6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG
%UDNHFRQWUROVLJQDO &ORVHEUDNH
U+ROGLQJEUDNH 2SHQEUDNH
,QWHUQDOVWDQGVWLOO
S S 6WDQGVWLOOILHOG
ILHOGGHIDXOW 1RVWDQGVWLOOILHOG
(,1$86

p50087 Brake-release time (positive in this case)

p50088 Brake-closing time
p50258 Wait time for automatic field-current reduction
Figure 10-16 Switch on/Shutdown

● An internal interlock becomes active once n < nmin (r50370, r50371) for the first time.
This stops the drive from attempting to decelerate again if the motor is rotated by external
influences; the n < nmin message then disappears.
● Whether level triggering or pulse triggering is selected has an overriding effect on "Switch
on", "Shutdown", and "Creep".

Note
The "Creep' function is described in the "Setpoint channel" chapter, "Creep" section.

● Selecting edge triggering causes "Switch on" and "Creep" to replace one another, i.e.:
– A "Switch on" edge at terminal X177.12 cancels a "Creep" function that had previously
been triggered.
– A "Creep" edge at a binector selected using p50440 cancels a "Switch on" function
that had previously been triggered.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 327
Descriptions of functions
10.5 Switch on, switch off, enable

● With edge triggering, an automatic restart following a brief interruption in the electronic
power supply voltage is not possible.
● To ensure that "Shutdown" functions even when rewiring is carried out, current or torque
lower limits are specified, or additional setpoints are supplied, certain functions are
disabled automatically when "Shutdown" is applied.
– All torque limits are disabled during braking to n < nmin.
– Of the current limits, only the system current limit (p50171 and p50172), speed-
dependent current limit, and current limit resulting from I2t monitoring of the power unit
are enabled.

10.5.2 OFF2 (disconnection) - control word bit 1

The OFF2 signal is LOW active (log. "0" state = disconnection).

Procedure for applying disconnection:

1. The ramp-function generator, n controller, and Ia controller are disabled.
2. Reduction in armature current
3. The firing pulses are disabled.
4. "Close operational brake" is output (r53210.0 = 1, where p50080 = 2).
5. Operating state o10.0 or higher is reached.
6. The field current is maintained at a fixed point (i.e. there is no increase in the field current,
even on exiting the field-weakening range).
7. The "Line contactor closed" relay (terminal XR1-109 and XR1-110) drops out.
8. The drive coasts down (or is decelerated by the operational brake).
9. The parameterizable wait time (p50258) elapses.
10.The field is reduced to a parameterizable value (p50257).
11.Once n < nmin (p50370, p50371), the "Close holding brake" signal is output (r53210.0 =
1, where p50080 = 1).

10.5.3 OFF3 (quick stop) - control word bit 2

The OFF3 signal is LOW active (log. "0" state = quick stop).

Procedure for applying "Quick stop":

1. The ramp-function generator is disabled.
2. A speed setpoint of zero is applied.
3. Deceleration along the down ramp acc. to p50296, p50297, p50298
4. Wait until n < nmin (p50370, p50371).
5. "Close operational or holding brake" (r53210.0 = 1) is output.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

328 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.5 Switch on, switch off, enable

6. Wait for brake-closing time (p50088)

7. The ramp-function generator and speed controller are disabled.
8. Reduction in armature current
9. The armature firing pulses are disabled.
10.The "Line contactor closed" relay (terminal XR1-109 and XR1-110) drops out.
11.Operating state o9.0 or higher is reached.
12.The wait time for field-current reduction (p50258) elapses.
13.The field is reduced to a parameterizable value (p50257).

Procedure for withdrawing "Quick stop":

1. Remove "Quick stop" command.
2. Apply the "Shutdown" command (e.g. using the "Switch on/Shutdown" terminal).
3. The system exits operating state o8.

Quick stop overview

2Q
6KXWGRZQ
6ZLWFKRQ6KXWGRZQ
1RTXLFNVWRS ([WHUQDOTXLFNVWRS

4XLFNVWRS
1RTXLFNVWRS
,QWHUQDOTXLFNVWRS
,QWHUQDOTXLFNVWRS
&ORVHGORRSFRQWUROOHUIUHH
&ORVHGORRSFRQWUROOHU
,QWHUQDOFRQWUROOHUHQDEOH QRWIUHH
6HWSRLQWUHOHDVHG

,QWHUQDOVHWSRLQWHQDEOH 6HWSRLQW 
QQPLQSS QQPLQ
Q!QPLQ

6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG
S
$FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH 6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG

2SHQEUDNH &ORVHEUDNH
%UDNHFRQWUROVLJQDOU
+ROGLQJEUDNH
,QWHUQDOVWDQGVWLOO S S 6WDQGVWLOOILHOG
ILHOGGHIDXOW 1RVWDQGVWLOOILHOG
$86

p50087 Brake-release time (positive in this case)

p50088 Brake-closing time
p50258 Wait time for automatic field-current reduction
Figure 10-17 OFF3 (quick stop)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 329
Descriptions of functions
10.5 Switch on, switch off, enable

● The "Quick stop" command only needs to be present as a short pulse (> 10 ms). It is then
saved internally. It is only possible to reset the memory by applying the "Shutdown"
command.
● The SINAMICS DC MASTER links all "Quick stop" commands in such a way that the
"Quick stop" function is only disabled once all commands are in the "No quick stop" state.
● An internal interlock becomes active once n < nmin (r50370, r50371) for the first time.
This stops the drive from attempting to decelerate again if the motor is rotated by external
influences; the n < nmin message then disappears.

10.5.4 Operation enable (enable) - control word bit 3

The enable signal is HIGH active (log. "1" state = enable).
Control word bit 3 and terminal X177.13 (enable) are logically ANDed. See also function
diagram 2580.

Procedure for applying operation enable (if a switch-on command is present):

1. With positive brake-release time (p50087):
The "Release holding or operational brake" signal (r53210.0 = 0) is output and p50087 is
awaited in operating state o1.0.
With negative brake-opening time (p50087 negative):
Go immediately to step 2; brake is still closed (r53210.0 = 1)
2. The ramp-function generator, n controller, and I controller are enabled.
3. Operating state o0 is reached.
4. Once a negative brake-release time (p50087) has elapsed, the "Release holding or
operational brake" (r53210.0 = 0) signal is output.

Procedure for withdrawing operation enable:

1. The ramp-function generator, n controller, and I controller are disabled.
2. Reduction in armature current
3. The armature firing pulses are disabled.
4. The "Close operational brake" signal is output (r53210.0 = 1, where p50080 = 2).
5. Operating state o1.0 or higher is reached.
6. The drive coasts down (or is decelerated by the operational brake).
7. Once n < nmin (p50370, p50371), the "Close holding brake" signal is output (r53210.0 =
1, where p50080 = 1).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

330 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.6 Safety shutdown (E-STOP)

10.6 Safety shutdown (E-STOP)

Note
The E-STOP function is not an EMERGENCY STOP function in the sense of EN 60204-1.

The E-STOP function forces the "line contactor closed" relay to drop out, activating the relay
contact (terminals XR1-109 and -110) for the main contactor control within approximately 15
ms, independent of the semiconductor components and Control Unit (CUD) functions. If the
CUD is operating correctly, applying I = 0 via the controller serves to disconnect the line
contactor from the power supply. The drive coasts down once E-STOP has been applied.
The E-STOP function is triggered when the switch between terminals XS1-105 and XS1-106
is opened.
The E-STOP function causes the drive to enter the "Switching on inhibited" operating state.
This must be acknowledged by activating the "Shutdown" function by opening terminal
X177.12, for example.
Procedure for applying E-STOP:
1. The ramp-function generator, n controller, and I controller are disabled.
2. Reduction in armature current
3. a) p51616 = 0: E-STOP acts like OFF2 (firing pulses are disabled as soon as I = 0).
b) p51616 = 1: E-STOP immediately stops firing pulses from being output (without waiting
for I = 0).
4. The "Close operational brake" signal is output (r53210.0 = 1, where p50080 = 2).
5. Operating state o10.0 or higher is reached.
6. The field current is maintained at a fixed point (i.e. there is no increase in the field current,
even on exiting the field-weakening range).
7. The "Line contactor closed" relay (terminal XR1-109 and XR1-110) drops out.
8. The drive coasts down (or is decelerated by the operational brake).
9. The wait time (to be set at p50258) elapses.
10.The field is reduced to a parameterizable value (p50257).
11.Once n < nmin (p50370, p50371), the "Close holding brake" signal is output (r53210.0 =
1, where p50080 = 1).
Note
15 ms after E-STOP has been applied (even if point 7 in this procedure has not yet been
reached), the "Line contactor closed" relay (terminal XR1-109 and XR1-110) will always drop
out; this is triggered by the hardware.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 331
Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

10.7 Setpoint channel

10.7.1 Ramp-function generator

Table 10- 13 Definitions

Ramp-up Acceleration from lower positive to higher positive speeds (e.g. 10% to 90%) or from
lower negative to higher negative speeds (e.g. -10% to -90%)
Return flow Deceleration from higher positive to lower positive speeds (e.g. 90% to 10%) or from
higher negative to lower negative speeds (e.g. -90% to -10%)
Transition from negative to E.g. from -10% to +50%:
positive speeds From -10% to 0 = ramp-down and
From 0 to +50% = ramp-up, and vice versa
Rampup time The amount of time the ramp-function generator requires, when initial rounding and final
rounding = 0 and an input variable jump from 0 to 100% or 0 to -100% is performed, for
passing through the 100% range at the ramp-function generator output. For smaller
jumps at the input, the rise at the output is performed at the same rate.
Ramp-down time The amount of time that the ramp-function generator requires, when initial rounding and
final rounding = 0 and an input variable jump from 100% to 0 or -100% to 0 is performed,
for passing through the 100% range at the ramp-function generator output. For smaller
jumps at the input, the rise at the output is performed at the same rate.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

332 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

Ramp-function generator mode of operation

U
+/= 5/= 5/=
U

+/=

[ \

$5 (5

$5 (5 W
$5



U $5 (5 $5  $5 (5 $5  $5 $5 
GYGW

W
GYGWU

+/*

[ = Ramp-function generator setpoint \ = Ramp-function generator output

RUT = Rampup time RDT = Ramp-down time
IR = Initial rounding FR = Final rounding
1) Transition from ramp-down incline to ramp-up incline
2) Initial rounding makes the transition to final rounding even before the maximum ramp-down incline is reached.
3) Only the last part of final rounding is performed here due to the ramp-function generator setpoint jump.
Figure 10-18 Ramp-function generator mode of operation

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 333
Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

Operating modes for ramp-function generator rounding

p50295 = 0:
When a setpoint reversal occurs during ramp-up (or ramp-down),
the ramp-up (or ramp-down) process is interrupted and initial
\ rounding for the ramp-down (or ramp-up) process starts
[ immediately. This does not mean any additional increase (or
decrease) in the setpoint, but rather a bend in the signal at the
ramp-function generator output (i.e. a jump in the acceleration).
p50295 = 1:
When a setpoint reversal occurs during ramp-up or ramp-down,
\ the ramp-up/ramp-down process slowly crosses over into
ramping-down/ramping-up. This results in an additional increase
[
(or decrease) in the setpoint, as well as a bend in the signal at the
ramp-function generator output (i.e. there is no jump in the
acceleration).

Table 10- 14 Control signals for the ramp-function generator operating mode

Ramp-function generator enable 0 = Ramp-function generator disabled; ramp-function generator output set to 0
Control word bit 4, p01140[c] 1 = Ramp-function generator enabled
Ramp-function generator start 1 = Setpoint is switched into the ramp-function generator input
Control word bit 5, p01141[c] 0 = Ramp-function generator is stopped at the current value (ramp-function
generator output is switched in as ramp-function generator input)
Setpoint enable 1 = Setpoint enabled at ramp-function generator input
Control word bit 6, p01142[c] 0 = Switchover to ramp-function generator setting 1 performed and 0 applied to
the input (ramp-function generator output travels to 0)
Set ramp-function generator 1 = The ramp-function generator output is set to the setting value (selection via
(p50640[c]) p50639).
Ramp-function integrator operation See below and description of p50302 in the parameter list found in the
(p50302) SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
Enable switchover of the ramp-function See below.
integrator (p50646)
Ramp-function generator settings 2 and See below.
3
Ramp-function generator tracking ON See below and description of p50317 in the parameter list found in the
(p50317) SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
Set ramp-function generator on See description of p50318 in the parameter list found in the SINAMICS DCM
switching off (p50318) List Manual.
Bypass ramp function generator 1 = The ramp-function generator operates with ramp-up time and ramp-down
time = 0.
The function is then controlled via the binector selected using p50641. It is also
possible to select the option of bypassing the ramp-function generator in
operating modes JOG, CREEP, and APPLY FIXED SETPOINT.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

334 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

Ramp-function generator settings 1, 2, and 3

Selection via the binectors selected using p50637 and p50638.
The ramp-function generator settings that are entered via the binectors selected using
p50637 and p50638 have priority over the ramp-function generator setting entered by the
ramp-function integrator.

Binector state selected via Ramp-function Active ramp-up Active ramp- Active initial Active final
parameters generator time down time rounding rounding
p50637 p50638 setting
0 0 1 p50303 p50304 p50305 p50306
1 0 2 p50307 p50308 p50309 p50310
0 1 3 p50311 p50312 p50313 p50314
1 1 Not permitted; fault F60041 (setting not unique) triggered

Ramp-function integrator
The ramp-function integrator is activated by setting p50302 to 1, 2, or 3. Once an "ON"
command ("Switch on", "Jog", "Creep") has been applied, ramp-function generator setting 1
(p50303 to p50306) is used until the ramp-function generator output reaches the required
setpoint for the first time.
Following this, the process is controlled by the "Enable switchover of ramp-function
integrator" signal (binector selected using p50646):
● Enable switchover of ramp-function integrator = 1:
If the ramp-function generator output reaches the required setpoint for the first time after
the "ON" command has been applied, the system automatically switches over to the
ramp-function generator setting selected according to p50302.
● Enable switchover of ramp-function integrator = 0:
Once the ramp-function generator output has reached the setpoint, ramp-function
generator setting 1 (p50303 to p50306) remains active until "Enable switchover of ramp-
function integrator" is switched to 1. The system then switches over to the ramp-function
generator setting selected according to p50302.
If the "Enable switchover of ramp-function integrator" signal is withdrawn (→ 0), the system
switches back to ramp-function generator setting 1 and, when the signal is applied again
(→1), remains at this setting until the ramp-function generator output has reached the
setpoint again. Following this, the system switches back over to the ramp-function generator
setting selected according to p50302.
When the "Switch off" command is applied, the drive is switched off via ramp-function
generator setting 1.
Note:
Activating "Ramp-function generator setting 2" (p50307 to p50310; selection via p50637) or
"Ramp-function generator setting 3" (p50311 to p50314; selection via p50638) has priority
over the ramp-function generator setting requested by the "Ramp-function integrator"
function.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 335
Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

Ramp-function-generator tracking
The ramp-function generator output (r52190) is limited to the following values when ramp-
function generator tracking is active:
0OLPLW™.SQDFW5)*RXWSXW0OLPLW™.SQDFW

When p50170 = 1 (closed-loop torque control), the following applies:

,$OLPLW™˓PRWRU™.SQDFW5)*RXWSXW,$OLPLW™˓PRWRU™.SQDFW

When p50170 = 0 (closed-loop current control), the following applies:

,$OLPLW™.SQDFW5)*RXWSXW,$OLPLW™.SQDFW

Φmotor Scaled motor flux (1 at rated excitation current)

nact Actual speed value (r52167)
+Mlimit Smallest positive torque limit (r52143)
-Mlimit Smallest negative torque limit (r52144)
+IA.limit Smallest positive current limit (r52131)
-IA.limit Smallest negative current limit (r52132)
Kp Active speed controller gain
If, however, the value added to nact would be less than 1%, then +1% or is –1% is added.
The "Ramp-function generator tracking" function prevents the ramp-function generator value
from straying too far from the actual speed value if the torque or current limit has been
reached.
Note:
When ramp-function generator tracking is active, the filtering time of the speed setpoint
p50228 should be low (ideally = 0).

Limiting after ramp-function generator

This limiting stage can be used by freely selecting the input signal, completely independently
from the ramp-function generator.
A distinguishing feature of this type of limiting is that lower limiting can also be set to positive
values and upper limiting to negative values (see p50300 and p50301). In this case, a limit
set using this method acts as a lower limit (lower limiting value) for the output signal of the
ramp-function generator, with the sign inverted.
Example:
p50632.01-04 = 1 (= 100.00%)
p50300 = 100.00 (%)
p50301 = 10.00 (%)
p50633.01-04 = 9 (= -100.00%)
results in the value range of r52170 being limited to between +10.00% and +100.00%.

Velocity signal dv/dt (r52191)

This signal specifies the change in ramp-function generator output r52190 during the time
set in p50542.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

336 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

10.7.2 Jog
See also function diagram 3125 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
The JOG function can be applied via the binectors selected using p50435 index .00 to .07,
and via control word bit 8 and bit 9 (r898.8 & r898.9) (see function diagram for logic
operation).
The "Jog" function can only be executed if "Switch off" and "Operation enable" have been
applied.
The "Jog" function is applied by one or more of the sources referred to (binectors, control
word bits) entering the log. "1" state. During this, each source is assigned a setpoint (to be
selected using p50436).
If two or more sources apply the "Jog" function at the same time, then 0 is applied as the jog
setpoint.
For each source (binector, control word bit) with which the "Jog" function can be applied,
p50437 may be used to determine whether the ramp-function generator is bypassed
(binector r53170.11). In this case, the ramp-function generator operates with ramp-up time =
0 and ramp-down time = 0.

Procedure for applying jog:

If "Jog" is applied, the system is switched on and the jog setpoint applied via the ramp-
function generator. For this procedure, refer to the section titled "Switch on/Switch off
(ON/OFF1)".

Procedure for withdrawing jog:

Once the "Jog" function has been withdrawn, the procedure begins in the same way as the
"Switch off" function, as outlined in the section titled "Switch on/Switch off (ON/OFF1)". Once
n < nmin, the controller is disabled and, following a parameterizable time (p50085) of 0 to 60
s, the line contactor is opened (operating state o7.0 or higher). While the wait time that can
be parameterized using p50085 (max. 60.0 s.) is running, the drive remains in operating
state o1.3.

10.7.3 Creep
See also function diagram 3130 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
The "Creep" function can be activated in operating state o7 and the "Operation" state while
"Operation enable" applies.
"Creep" is applied by means of one or more of the binectors selected using p50440 entering
the log. "1" state. During this, each binector is assigned a setpoint (to be selected using
p50441). If "Creep" is applied by several binectors, their corresponding setpoints are added
together.
For each source (binector) with which the "Creep" function can be applied, p50442 may be
used to determine whether the ramp-function generator is bypassed (binector r53170.12). In
this case, the ramp-function generator operates with ramp-up time = 0 and ramp-down time
= 0.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 337
Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

Level/Edge

P50445 = 0: Level-controlled
Binector selected using p50440= 0: No creep
Binector selected using p50440= 1: Creep
P50445 = 1: Edge-triggered
The application of the "Creep" function is saved when the binector makes
the 0 → 1 transition. The binector selected using p50444 must be in the log.
"1" state at this point. The memory is reset when this binector enters the log.
"0" state.

Procedure for applying creep:

If "Creep" is applied in operating state o7, the system is switched on and the creep setpoint
is applied via the ramp-function generator.
If "Creep" is applied in the "Operation" state, the drive uses the ramp-function generator to
travel from the operating speed to the creep setpoint.

Procedure for withdrawing creep:

For "Creep" when the "Switch on" command is not present:
If all binectors that apply the "Creep" function enter the log. "0" state, the controller is
disabled and the line contactor is opened (operating state o7.0 or higher) after n < nmin.
For "Creep" from the "Operation" state:
If all binectors that apply the "Creep" function enter the log. "0" state, and the conditions for
the "Operation" state are still present, the drive uses the ramp-function generator to travel
from the set creep speed to the operating speed.
See also the section titled "Switch on/Switch off (ON/OFF1)" for information on edge
triggering, automatic restart, and the effect of current and torque limits when decelerating.

10.7.4 Fixed setpoint

See also function diagram 3115 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
The "Fixed setpoint" function can be applied via the binectors selected using p50435 index
.00 to .07, p50680 and p50681 (see function diagram for logic operation).
"Fixed setpoint" is applied by one of more of the sources referred to (binectors) entering the
log. "1" state. During this, each source is assigned a setpoint (to be selected using p50431).
If "Fixed setpoint" is applied by several sources at the same time, their corresponding
setpoints are added together (limited to ±200%).
For each source with which "Fixed setpoint" can be applied, p50432 may be used to
determine whether the ramp-function generator is bypassed. In this case, the ramp-function
generator operates with ramp-up time = 0 and ramp-down time = 0.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

338 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.7 Setpoint channel

Response when "Fixed setpoint" is applied:

The fixed setpoint is switched in instead of the r52211 setpoint.

Withdrawal of "Fixed setpoint":

If all possible sources for switching in the fixed setpoint are in the log. "0" state again, r52211
is switched through as a setpoint.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 339
Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation

10.8 Encoder evaluation

General information
The SINAMICS DC MASTER can evaluate speed/position encoders. The possible encoder
types are listed in the description of parameter p400 in the List Manual.
2 encoders can be evaluated simultaneously. Encoder 1 is connected to connector X177 on
the CUD. Encoder 2 is connected to encoder module SMC30, which is connected via
DriveCLiQ with the CUD.
Encoder 1 is often referred to as the motor encoder as it is normally attached directly to the
motor.
Encoder 2 is often referred to as the load encoder as it is normally attached directly to the
load.
The encoder evaluation determines the current actual speed value and the actual position
value for both encoders. (See function diagrams 4704, 4710 and 4711 in the List Manual).
Furthermore, for both encoders the encoder control word and the encoder status word
according to PROFIdrive are available. (See function diagrams 4720, 4730 and 4735 in the
List Manual).
PROFIdrive V4.1 is the PROFIBUS profile for drive technology with a wide range of
applications in production and process automation systems.

Note
PROFIdrive for drive technology is standardized and described in the following document:
References: /P5/ PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology

10.8.1 Actual speed values

The calculation of the actual speed value can be seen in the following function diagrams:
● FP4710 (for encoder 1)
● FP4711 (for encoder 2)
The actual speed values of the encoders are always available as freely interconnected BICO
outputs.
● r0061[0]: Actual speed value for encoder 1
● r0061[1] = r3370: Actual speed value for encoder 2
If you want to use an actual speed value from the encoder as an actual-value input, you
need to set the actual speed value selection p50083 to 1 (for encoder 1) or to 5 (for encoder
2). See FP6810.
The maximum speed (i.e. the 100 % speed) is set via p2000 in both cases.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

340 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation

10.8.1.1 Encoder 1 actual position value 1 (G1_XIST1)

● Resolution: Encoder pulses × 2n
n: Fine resolution, number of bits for the internal multiplication
The fine resolution is specified via p0418.
● Used to transfer the cyclic actual position value to the controller.
● The transferred value is a relative, free-running actual value.
● Any overflows must be evaluated by the master controller.
,QWHUQDOPXOWLSOLFDWLRQ

(QFRGHUSXOVHV )LQHLQIRUPDWLRQ

%LW   

SIRU*[B;,67HQFRGHUWR )DFWRU\VHWWLQJ

Figure 10-19 Classification and settings for Gx_XIST1

● Encoder pulses of incremental encoder

● After switching on: Gx_XIST1 = 0
● An overflow in Gx_XIST1 must be viewed from the higher-level controller.
● There is no modulo interpretation of Gx_XIST1 in the drive.

10.8.1.2 Encoder 1 actual position value 2 (G1_XIST2)

Different values are entered in Gx_XIST2 depending on the function.
● Priorities for Gx_XIST2
The following priorities should be considered for values in Gx_XIST2:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 341
Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation

<HV
3DUNLQJHQFRGHU" *[B=6:  *[B;,67 

1R

<HV *[B;,67
(QFRGHUHUURU" *[B=6: 
HUURUFRGH

1R

*[B=6: 
6HDUFKIRUUHIHUHQFHPDUN <HV *[B;,67
RU 
RUIO\LQJPHDVXUHPHQW UHTXHVWHGYDOXH
RU 
VHOHFWHG" S
RU 

1R

<HV *[B;,67
7UDQVPLWDEVROXWHYDOXH DEVROXWHYDOXH
*[B=6: 
F\FOLFDOO\" S

1R

Figure 10-20 Priorities for functions and Gx_XIST2

● Resolution: Encoder pulses × 2n

n: fine resolution, no. of bits for internal multiplication
,QWHUQDOPXOWLSOLFDWLRQ

(QFRGHUSXOVHV )LQHLQIRUPDWLRQ

   
)DFWRU\VHWWLQJ
7KHIROORZLQJDSSOLHVWRUHIHUHQFHPDUNRU S
IO\LQJPHDVXUHPHQW S
SIRU*B;,67HQFRGHU
SIRU*B;,67HQFRGHU )RUUHDGDEVROXWHYDOXH(Q'DWHQFRGHU
SIRU*B;,67HQFRGHU
SIRU*B;,67HQFRGHU

Figure 10-21 Subdivision and settings for Gx_XIST2

● Encoder pulses of incremental encoder

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

342 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation

Error code in Gn_XIST2

Table 10- 15 Error code in Gn_XIST2

n_XIST2 Meaning Possible causes / description

1 Encoder fault One or more existing encoder faults.
Detailed information in accordance with drive messages.
2 Zero mark monitoring –
3 Abort parking sensor • Parking drive object already selected.
4 Abort reference mark • A fault exists (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1)
search • Encoder has no zero marker (reference mark)
• Reference mark 2, 3 or 4 is requested
• Command "Read value x" set during search for reference mark
• Inconsistent position measured value with distance-coded reference marks.
5 Abort, retrieve reference • More than four values requested
value • No value requested
• Requested value not available
6 Not relevant -
7 Abort get measured value • More than one value requested
• No value requested.
• Requested value not available
• Parking encoder active
• Parking drive object active
8 Abort absolute value • Absolute encoder not available
transmission on • Alarm bit absolute value protocol set
3841 Function not supported –

10.8.1.3 Encoder 2 actual position value 1 (G2_XIST1)

● See G1_XIST1

10.8.1.4 Encoder 2 actual position value 2 (G2_XIST2)

● See G1_XIST2

10.8.2 Control and status words for encoders

Description
An encoder interface is defined in the PROFIBUS Profile for drive technology (PROFIdrive
V4.1). This interface defines a control and status word for encoders.
They are available in the following parameters:
● r0480[0] = G1_STW encoder 1 control word
● r0480[1] = G2_STW encoder 2 control word

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 343
Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation

● r0481[0] = G1_ZSW encoder 1 status word

● r0481[1] = G2_ZSW encoder 2 status word
The bit assignments of the control and status words for the encoders can be seen in the
following function diagrams:
● FP4720 (control word for encoders 1 and 2)
● FP4730 (status word for encoders 1 and 2)

10.8.2.1 Encoder n control word (Gn_STW, n = 1, 2)

Encoder n control word (Gn_STW, n = 1, 2)

The encoder control word controls the encoder functions.

Table 10- 16 Description of the individual signals in Gn_STW

Bit Name Signal status, description

0 Reference mark Functions Request reference mark search:
1 search Bit Meaning
2 0 Function 1 Reference mark 1
3 1 Function 2 Reference mark 2
2 Function 3 Reference mark 3
3 Function 4 Reference mark 4
Note:
• Bit x = 1 Request function
Bit x = 0 Do not request function
• The following applies if more than 1 function is activated:
The values for all functions cannot be read until each activated function
has terminated and this has been confirmed in the corresponding status
bit (ZSW.0/.1/.2/.3 "0" signal again).
• Reference mark search
It is possible to search for a reference mark.
4 Command Bit 6, 5, 4 Meaning
5 000 –
6 001 Activate function x
010 Read value x
011 Cancel function
(x: function selected via bit 0-3)
7 Mode 0 Reference mark search (fine resolution via p0418)
1 Not permitted
8...12 Reserved –

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

344 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation

Bit Name Signal status, description

13 Request cyclic absolute value 1 Request cyclic transfer of the absolute actual position value in
Gn_XIST2.
Used for (e.g.):
• Additional measuring system monitoring
• Synchronization during power up
0 No request
14 Parking encoder 1 Request parking encoder (handshake with Gn_ZSW bit 14)
0 No request
15 Acknowledge encoder error 0/1 Request to reset encoder errors

*QB=6:

(QFRGHUHUURU


*QB67: 
$FNQRZOHGJHHQFRGHUHUURU



*QB=6:
(QFRGHUIDXOWDFNQRZOHGJH

DFWLYH

&OHDUHUURU

6LJQDOPXVWEHUHVHWE\XVHU

0 No request

Details on Gn_STW.14 (parking encoder)

When an encoder is parked, the encoder being addressed is switched to inactive (r0146 =
0). Monitoring of a certain encoder is suppressed.
Control is carried out via the encoder control/status words of the cyclic telegram
(Gn_STW.14 and Gn_ZSW.14).
To activate encoder parking, the drive must be stopped (e.g. via STW1.0 (OFF1).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 345
Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation


67:


*QB67:


*QB=6:


U


Q


Figure 10-22 Flow diagram: parking encoder

10.8.2.2 Encoder n status word (Gn_ZSW, n = 1, 2)

Encoder n status word (Gn_ZSW, n = 1, 2)

The encoder status word is used to display states, errors and acknowledgements.

Table 10- 17 Description of the individual signals in Gn_ZSW

Bit Name Signal status, description

0 Reference Status: Applies to reference mark search
1 mark search, Function 1 - 4 Bit Meaning
measurement active
2 0 Function 1 Reference mark 1
3 1 Function 2 Reference mark 2
2 Function 3 Reference mark 3
3 Function 4 Reference mark 4
Note:
• Bit x = 1 function active
Bit x = 0 function inactive
4 Status: Applies to reference mark search
5 Value 1 - 4 Bit Meaning
available
6 4 Value 1 Reference mark 1
7 5 Value 2 Reserved
6 Value 3 Reserved
7 Value 4 Reserved
Note:
• Bit x = 1 value available
Bit x = 0 value not available
• Only one value can be retrieved at a time.
Reason: There is only one common status word Gn_XIST2 to read the values.
8 Reserved 1 -
0 -

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

346 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.8 Encoder evaluation

Bit Name Signal status, description

9 Reserved 1 -
0 -
10 Reserved -
11 Encoder fault acknowledge 1 Encoder fault acknowledge active
active Note:
See STW.15 (acknowledge encoder fault)
0 No acknowledgement active
12 Reserved -
13 Transmit absolute value 1 Acknowledgement for Gn_STW.13 (request absolute value cyclically)
cyclically Note:
Cyclic transmission of the absolute value can be interrupted by a function
with higher priority.
• See Gn_XIST2
0 No acknowledgement
14 Parking encoder 1 Parking encoder active (i.e. parking encoder switched off)
0 No active parking encoder
15 Encoder fault 1 Fault from encoder or actual-value sensing pending.
Note:
The error code is stored in Gn_XIST2.
0 No error is pending.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 347
Descriptions of functions
10.9 Switch-on command for holding or operational brake

10.9 Switch-on command for holding or operational brake

See also function diagram 2750 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
The signal for controlling the brake is available at binector r53210.0:
Status log."1" = Close brake
Status log."0" = Release brake
This binector must be wired to a digital output in order to activate a brake; see function
diagrams 2055, 2060, and 2065 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
The following parameters affect the function of the brake-control signal:

p50080 = 1 The brake is a holding brake:

The "Close brake" command is only applied when n < nmin (p50370,
p50371).
p50080 = 2 The brake is an operational brake:
The "Close brake" command is applied even if the motor is running.
p50087 Brake-release time:
A positive value prevents the motor from working against a brake that is
currently being released.
A negative value causes the motor to work against a brake that is still closed
in order to prevent a short-term torque-free state.
p50088 Brake-closing time:
Causes the motor to keep applying torque while the brake is closing
p50319 Delay time for ramp-function generator enable:
Following a controller enable, the setpoint 0 is applied during the time set
here. This time should be set so that the brake has actually been released
once it has elapsed. This is mainly necessary when p50087 is set to a
negative value.
The figures below illustrate the brake-control timing interval when a level change occurs at
the "Switch on/Shutdown" (terminal X177.12) and "Operation enable" (terminal X177.13)
inputs.
Where brake control is concerned, the "Jog", "Creep", or "Quick stop" input commands act in
the same way as "Switch on/Switch off", and the "Disconnection" or "E-STOP" input
commands act in the same way as when the "Operation enable" command is withdrawn.
The "Close brake" command is output during the optimization run for precontrol and current
controller (p50051 = 24 and 25).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

348 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.9 Switch-on command for holding or operational brake

2SHUDWLRQHQDEOH (QDEOH ,QKLELW

7HUPLQDO;
21
6ZLWFKRQ6KXWGRZQ
7HUPLQDO; 2))
S S
,QWHUQDOFRQWUROOHUHQDEOH
S
QQPLQ
SS
U
6SHHGVHWSRLQW

$FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH

S ! S

2SHUDWLQJPRGH R R RRR R R RRR R
!
! !
%UDNHFRQWUROVLJQDO
U
2SHQ &ORVH
W

Figure 10-23 Operational brake (p50080 = 2), brake-release time (p50087) positive

2SHUDWLRQHQDEOH (QDEOH ,QKLELW

7HUPLQDO;
21
6ZLWFKRQ6KXWGRZQ
7HUPLQDO; 2))
S
,QWHUQDOFRQWUROOHUHQDEOH
S
QQPLQ
SS
U
6SHHGVHWSRLQW

$FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH !

S
2SHUDWLQJPRGH R R RRR R RRR R
!
!
%UDNHFRQWUROVLJQDO
U 2SHQ &ORVH

Footnotes for the two figures above

<1> Mechanical deceleration of drive by means of operational brake
<2> Drive coasting down; "Close holding brake" first applied when n < nmin
<3> Time for brake to be released before motor applies torque (p50087 positive)
<5> Time for brake to be closed, during which motor continues to apply torque (p50088)
Figure 10-24 Holding brake (p50080 = 1), brake-release time (p50087) positive

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 349
Descriptions of functions
10.9 Switch-on command for holding or operational brake

(QDEOH ,QKLELW
2SHUDWLRQHQDEOH
7HUPLQDO;
6ZLWFKRQ6KXWGRZQ 21
7HUPLQDO; 2))

,QWHUQDOFRQWUROOHUHQDEOH

QQPLQ S
SS
U
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
$FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH

S ! S

2SHUDWLQJPRGH R RRR R RRR R

! ! !

S S
%UDNHFRQWUROVLJQDO
U
2SHQ &ORVH W

Figure 10-25 Operational brake (p50080 = 2), brake-release time (p50087) negative

(QDEOH ,QKLELW
2SHUDWLRQHQDEOH
7HUPLQDO;
21
6ZLWFKRQ6KXWGRZQ
7HUPLQDO; 2))

,QWHUQDOFRQWUROOHUHQDEOH

QQPLQ S
SS
U
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
$FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH !

S

2SHUDWLQJPRGH R RRR R RRR R

!
!
%UDNHFRQWUROVLJQDO
2SHQ &ORVH
U
S W

Footnotes for the two figures above

<1> Mechanical deceleration of drive by means of operational brake
<2> Drive coasting down; "Close holding brake" first applied when n < nmin
<4> Here, motor works against the brake, which is still closed (p50087 negative)
<5> Time for brake to be closed, during which motor continues to apply torque (p50088)
Figure 10-26 Holding brake (p50080 = 1), brake-release time (p50087) negative

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

350 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.10 Switching on auxiliary circuits

10.10 Switching on auxiliary circuits

This function serves as a switch-on command for auxiliary circuits (e.g. motor fans).
The "Switch on auxiliary circuits" signal is available at binector r53210.2:
Log."0" state = Auxiliary circuits OFF
Log."1" state = Auxiliary circuits ON
This binector must be wired to a digital output in order to activate the auxiliary circuit; see
function diagrams 2055, 2060, and 2065 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual.
The "Switch on auxiliary circuits" signal enters the "High" level along with the "Switch on"
command. Following this, operating state o6.0 is retained for a parameterizable time
(p50093); only once this has elapsed is the line contactor closed.
When the "Switch off" command is applied, the firing pulses are disabled and the line
contactor drops out after n < nmin. Following a parameterizable time (p50094), the "Switch
on auxiliary circuits" signal enters the "Low" level. If, however, the "Switch on" command is
applied before this time elapses, operating state o6.0 is not retained; instead, the line
contactor is closed instantaneously.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 351
Descriptions of functions
10.11 Thermal overload protection for the DC motor (I2t monitoring of the motor)

10.11 Thermal overload protection for the DC motor (I2t monitoring of the
motor)
I2t monitoring protects the motor against impermissible loads.

CAUTION
No full motor protection
I2t monitoring only provides an approximate representation of the motor's thermal image.
If the electronic power supply fails for more than 2 s., the preload calculated for the motor is
lost; following a restart, it is assumed that the motor has no load.
If a restart is performed within 2 s. of the electronic power supply failing (e.g. by means of
the "Automatic restart" function), the most recently computed l2t value for the motor is taken
as the starting point.
When p50114 = 0 (= factory setting), I2t monitoring is disabled.

Adaptation

Table 10- 18 Parameter settings for I2t monitoring

Parameters Data
p50114 Thermal time constant Time constant [sec] with which I2t monitoring is to operate
p50100 Rated armature current Determination of permissible continuous current for motor:
p50113 Continuous-current factor Permissible continuous current = p50100 × p50113

Advance-alarm characteristic/Shutdown characteristic

If, for example, the motor load is constantly at around 125% of the permissible continuous
current for the motor, alarm A60037 responds after a time constant (p50114) has elapsed. If
there is no reduction in the load, the drive is shut down when the shutdown characteristic is
reached, and error message F60137 is displayed.
Advance-alarm/shutdown times for other loads may be taken from the diagram below.
I2t monitoring of the motor: Alarm triggering and fault triggering
The diagrams below show the time after which an alarm or fault is triggered when a new,
constant load is suddenly switched in following an extended period of preloading (> 5×T_th).
T_th = p50114 .. - thermal time constant of motor

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

352 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.11 Thermal overload protection for the DC motor (I2t monitoring of the motor)


\ ! 
 

 





 


 !




      
[

Figure 10-27 I2t monitoring of the motor: Alarm triggering


\ ! 
 


 





 

 
!





      
[

Figure 10-28 I2t monitoring of the motor: Fault triggering

<1> ... Preloading

y ... load current/permissible continuous current (p50100 × p50113)
x ... time/thermal time constant of motor

Determining the thermal equivalent time constant (p50114)

It should be noted that the thermal equivalent time constant depends on the maximum
overcurrent.
Thermal equivalent time constant of DC motors 1G . 5/1H . 5 acc. to Catalog DA12 T (project
guidelines for Catalog DA 12):

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 353
Descriptions of functions
10.11 Thermal overload protection for the DC motor (I2t monitoring of the motor)




\ PLQ











[

y ... Ttherm, thermal equivalent time constant [min] (p50114)

x ... I/IN [%]
I = Maximum overcurrent at which the motor is operated
IN = Rated armature current for the motor (p50100)
Figure 10-29 Thermal equivalent time constant

Information
● Please observe the manufacturer's specifications if you are using other motor types.
● If you are using DC motors 1G.5/1H.5 as per Catalog DA12, p50113 must be set to 1.00.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

354 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.12 Speed-dependent current limitation

10.12 Speed-dependent current limitation

Speed-dependent current limitation protects the DC motor's commutator and brushes at high
speeds.
The settings required for this (p50104 to p50107) must be taken from the motor rating plate.
Additionally, the maximum operating speed of the motor (p50108) must be entered; this must
match the actual maximum operating speed.
The actual maximum operating speed is determined as follows:
● Using p2000 in cases where the actual speed value comes from an incremental encoder
● Using p50741 in cases where the actual speed value comes from an analog tachometer
● Using p50115 in the case of operation without a tachometer
Aside from this, speed-dependent current limitation must be activated by setting p50109 to 1.

CAUTION
Making an incorrect setting for speed-dependent current limitation can lead to excessive
stress on the commutator and brushes, which in turn results in a significantly reduced
service life for the brushes.

Setting speed-dependent current limitation for motors with a bend in the commutation characteristic

= Motor rating plate data

5DWHGXQLW'&FXUUHQW
= Permissible limit values
,$ 3 $SSOLFDWLRQSRLQW
Q( = Application point for speed-dependent current
&XUUHQWOLPLW
aQFRPPXWDWLRQ limitation
, OLPLWFXUYH Q = Maximum operating speed

, I10 = 1.4 × I1
,
,1 , I20 = 1.2 × I2
,1 6
,
31
6 ,

3

Q1 Q Q Q
Q( QPRWRU

The current limitation curve is determined using n1, I10, n2, and I20.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 355
Descriptions of functions
10.12 Speed-dependent current limitation

Parameters:
p50104 = n1
p50105 = I1 (unit calculates I10 from this)
p50106 = n2
p50107 = I2 (unit calculates I20 from this)
p50108 = n3 (defines the speed scaling)
p50109 = 0 ... speed-dependent current limitation switched off
= 1 ... speed-dependent current limitation switched on

6+817027 ****+8=
15((1
9Q0,1 Q,$,.:

5(*
(559$7+<5%&/9 0+9+=
6(3,3,0%
,&/)
=$*..
6(39(17,/
Figure 10-30 Example of a motor rating plate

Setting speed-dependent current limitation for motors without a bend in the commutation
characteristic

= Motor rating plate data

5DWHGXQLW'&FXUUHQW
= Permissible limit values
,$ 3 $SSOLFDWLRQSRLQW
Q( = Application point for speed-dependent current
&XUUHQWOLPLW
aQFRPPXWDWLRQ limitation
OLPLWFXUYH Q = Maximum operating speed

, I20 = 1.2 × I2
,

,

,1 , ,
,1 6
31 3
6

Q1 Q( Q Q Q
QPRWRU

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

356 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.12 Speed-dependent current limitation

6+817027 **)++8=
15((1
9Q Q0,1$.:

5(*, ,
(559$7+<5%&/9 0+9+=
6(3,3,0%
,&/)
=$*..
6(39(17,/

Figure 10-31 Example of a motor rating plate

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 357
Descriptions of functions
10.13 Automatic restart

10.13 Automatic restart

"Automatic restart" means:
When brief interruptions in the network (such as voltage dips) occur, the SINAMICS DC
MASTER does not enter the "FAULT" operating state immediately, but instead blocks the
armature firing pulses before automatically re-enabling them once the network returns to
normal.
"Brief" refers to a time that is shorter than the time set at p50086 (= hot restart time)
During the brief pulse inhibit period that is initiated when faults occur in the network, the
SINAMICS DC MASTER waits in operating state o4.0 (for power system faults in the
armature circuit) or o5.1 (for power system faults in the field circuit).
If the network does not return to normal during the hot restart time, the relevant fault is
triggered as soon as it elapses.
The following faults relate to the "Automatic restart" function:

F60004 Armature circuit phase failure (1U1, 1V1, 1W1)

F60005 Field circuit phase failure (3U1, 3W1)
F60006 Undervoltage (armature current or field current)
F60007 Overvoltage (armature current or field current)
F60008 Line frequency too low (armature current or field current)
F60009 Line frequency too high (armature current or field current)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

358 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.14 Connecting the units in parallel

10.14 Connecting the units in parallel

To enhance converter power, up to 6 SINAMICS DC MASTER units can be connected in
parallel at the power unit side.

Operating modes
There are 2 operating modes:
● Standard:
A SINAMICS DC MASTER is defined as the master. This unit carries out closed-loop
speed control, closed-loop armature-current control, and line synchronization tasks, as
well as determining firing points. The firing points and the thyristor pair to be fired are
transferred to the slave units; all the slaves then fire the thyristor pairs at these points.
● "n+m" (SW 1.2 and higher):
A SINAMICS DC MASTER is defined as the master. Additional SINAMICS DC MASTER
units are defined as substitute masters. As with standard mode, the unit defined as the
master carries out closed-loop speed control, closed-loop armature-current control, and
line synchronization tasks, as well as determining firing points.
If a slave fails (due to a fuse blowing in the power unit or a fault being output, for
example), operation in this mode continues with the remaining converter units. The
SINAMICS DC MASTER units that are still in proper working order continue to run
uninterrupted.
If a master fails (due to a fuse blowing in the power unit or a fault being output, for
example) a substitute master automatically becomes the master and the remaining units
continue to run uninterrupted.
During configuration, it is important to note that the power produced by n units alone
(rather than n+m units) must also be sufficient for the application in question.
The electronics for all the units connected in parallel must be connected using a parallel-
connection interface.

Notes:
● For additional details on how units are connected in parallel, please refer to function
diagrams 9350, 9352, and 9355.
● The control commands "Switch on/Switch off", "Operation enable", "Quick stop", and so
on must be applied to a group of units connected in parallel at the master unit (and at all
substitute master units).
Terminals 12 and 13 must be permanently connected to terminal 9 on slave units.
● The speed setpoint and actual speed value must be applied to a group of units connected
in parallel at the master unit (and at all substitute master units) as well.
● The parallel-connection interface also enables any BICOs (that can be parameterized by
the user) to be exchanged between nodes. See function diagrams 9352 and 9355.
Exchanging data in this way is not required for closed-loop control of the firing pulses or
for generating them, and is available for the user to make use of in any way he or she
wishes.
● Optimization runs must be started on the master unit. All slave units must be connected
and ready for operation at this point.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 359
Descriptions of functions
10.14 Connecting the units in parallel

10.14.1 Connection scheme

$&+]99

$&+]9

'& 9 '& 9 '& 9

  

8
9
:

8
9
:
8
9
:

8
9
:

8
9
:

8
9
:
  8 :   8 :   8 :
3RZHUVXSSO\ 3RZHUVXSSO\ 3RZHUVXSSO\
)LHOG )LHOG )LHOG )DQ $UPDWXUH
)DQ $UPDWXUH )DQ $UPDWXUH

6,1$0,&6'&0 6,1$0,&6'&0 6,1$0,&6'&0

&RQWURO0RGXOH &RQWURO0RGXOH &RQWURO0RGXOH
VODYH PDVWHU VODYH
; ; ; & ' ; ; ; & ' ; ; ; & '
 & ' '&  & ' '&  & ' '&
     

2))
(QDEOH 0

1) The same phase sequence is required between 1U1/1V1/1W1.

2) The same phase sequence is required between 1C1/1D1.
3) The units are connected using (8-pin) shielded patch cables of type UTP CAT5 in acc. with ANSI/EIA/TIA 568,
such as those that are used in PC network technology.
A standard, 5 m cable can be obtained directly from Siemens (order number: 6RY1707-0AA08).
(n-1) cables are required for connecting n devices in parallel.
The bus terminator must be activated for each unit positioned at the start or end of the bus (p51805 = 1).
Figure 10-32 Parallel connection

Up to 6 units can be connected in parallel.

When connecting several units in parallel, the master unit should be positioned centrally due
to the signal runtimes. Maximum cable length of the parallel-connection interface cable
between master and slave units at each bus end: 15 m.
Separate line reactors of the same type are required for each power unit for current splitting
purposes. The difference in reactor tolerances determines the current splitting. For operation
without derating (current reduction), a tolerance of 5% or more is recommended.

NOTICE
Only power units with the same DC current ratings, the same type of line reactors, and the
same type of wiring/bus bars may be connected in parallel!

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

360 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.14 Connecting the units in parallel

10.14.2 Parameter assignment

10.14.2.1 Standard mode

Table 10- 19 Parallel connection: Standard mode

Master Slaves
p51800=11 Master node p51800=12 Slave node
(use master firing pulses)
p51801 Any p51801 Any
p51803 = 0 "n+m mode" not active p51803 = 0 "n+m mode" not active
p51804[..] Any p51804[..] Any
p51805 = 1 Bus terminator 1) p51805 = 1 Bus terminator 1)

p51805 = 0 No bus terminator 2) p51805 = 0 No bus terminator 2)

p51806=... Unique station address p51806=... Unique station address
p50082 <> 0 Operating mode for the field p50082 = 0 Internal field is not used
p50076[..] =... Reduction in rated unit DC current. Same setting to be made at all units.
p50078[..] =... Rated value for supply voltage. Same setting to be made at all units.
p50100=... Rated motor current/number of parallel units
p50110=... Actual armature resistance × number of p50110=... Same setting to be made as at master.
parallel units 3)
p50111=... Actual armature inductance × number of p50111=... Same setting to be made as at master.
parallel units 3)
1) At the two outermost units (= at the physical ends of the bus line)
2) At all other units
3) The optimization run for current controller and precontrol (p50051 = 25) sets the correct values for these parameters.

10.14.2.2 n+m mode

SW1.2 or higher
There are 2 versions of this operating mode.

n+m mode in armature circuit only

● Activating this version:
Set p50082 = 0 at the substitute master units.
● In this operating mode, only the armature firing pulses (along with the upstream closed-
loop control conditions [setpoint channel, closed-loop speed control, closed-loop
armature-current control]) are sent on to the substitute master if the master fails, but not
the field firing pulses (or the upstream closed-loop control conditions in this case [closed-
loop EMF control, closed-loop field current control]).
● Main application for this operating mode:
Supplying large inductances (e.g. field windings in synchronous generators) with the
SINAMICS DC MASTER armature converter

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 361
Descriptions of functions
10.14 Connecting the units in parallel

n+m mode in armature circuit and field circuit

● Activating this version:
Set p50082 > 0 at the substitute master units.
● In this operating mode, both the armature firing pulses (along with the upstream closed-
loop control conditions [setpoint channel, closed-loop speed control, closed-loop
armature-current control]) and the field firing pulses (along with the upstream closed-loop
control conditions in this case [closed-loop EMF control, closed-loop field current control])
are sent on to the substitute master if the master fails.
● Connection:
Outputs 3C and 3D (field DC voltage output) of the master and all substitute masters
must be connected to the motor field winding in parallel.
● Note on commissioning:
After taking optimization measures (by starting optimization runs, for example), all
parameters set by the optimization runs must be transferred to all substitute masters.
● Since the field supplies are connected in parallel, part of the overall motor-field current
flows through the freewheeling arm of the respective field power units with disabled field
firing pulses. In order to determine the overall motor-field current (displayed at parameter
r50035), therefore, the freewheeling current detected by the "partner" unit is automatically
added in the current master.
For this reason, this operating mode requires a sound parallel connection and sound
electronic power supply for the master and substitute master.
If this operating mode is present even in the event of the electronic power supply for the
master or substitute master failing, the actual value for the overall motor-field current
must be acquired externally. The value must be supplied to the master and substitute
master using p50612.
● Generally speaking, the "master function" is only transferred from the active master to the
substitute master via telegram and a sound parallel-connection interface. Even if the
master's electronic power supply fails, the master still has enough time to transmit a
telegram for the purpose of transferring the "master function".
● As soon as the parallel connection is interrupted (by disconnecting the parallel-
connection cable), it can no longer guaranteed that the master/slave assignment will be
correct. The electronic power supply must be switched off and back on again at all units.

Table 10- 20 Parallel connection: n+m mode

Master Substitute master Slaves

p51800=11 Master node p51800=13 Substitute master p51800=12 Slave node
(use master firing
pulses)
p51801 Any p51801 Any p51801 Any
p51803 = 1 "n+m mode" active p51803 = 1 "n+m mode" active p51803 = 1 "n+m mode" active
p51804[..] Any p51804[..] Any p51804[..] Any
p51805 = 1 Bus terminator 1) p51805 = 1 Bus terminator 1) p51805 = 1 Bus terminator 1)

p51805 = 0 No bus terminator 2) p51805 = 0 No bus terminator 2) p51805 = 0 No bus terminator 2)

p51806=... Unique station address p51806=... Unique station address p51806=... Unique station address
p51807 = Telegram failure does not p51807 = Telegram failure does p51807 = Telegram failure does
0.000 s. lead to fault 0.000 s. not lead to fault 0.000 s. not lead to fault
p50082 <> p50082 = 0 Internal field is not used p50082 = 0 Internal field is not used
0 or

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

362 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.14 Connecting the units in parallel

Master Substitute master Slaves

p50082 <>
0
p50076[..] = Reduction in rated unit DC current. Same setting to be made at all units.
p50078[..] = Rated value for supply voltage. Same setting to be made at all units.
p50100 = Rated motor current/number of parallel units
p50110 = Actual armature p50110 = Same setting to be made p50110 = Same setting to be
resistance × number of as at master. made as at master.
parallel units 3)
p50111 = Actual armature p50111 = Same setting to be made p50111 = Same setting to be
inductance × number of as at master. made as at master.
parallel units 3)
1) At the two outermost units (= at the physical ends of the bus line)
2) At all other units
3) The optimization run for current controller and precontrol (p50051 = 25) sets the correct values for these parameters.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 363
Descriptions of functions
10.15 Serial interface with peer-to-peer protocol

10.15 Serial interface with peer-to-peer protocol

General information
The peer-to-peer interface enables BICO interconnections across several SINAMICS DC
MASTER units, as well as allowing the peer-to-peer interface to establish signal connections
between converters in the SINAMICS DC MASTER range (MLFB = 6RA80...) and converters
in other ranges, such as SIMOREG DC-MASTER (MLFB = 6RA70...) and SIMOREG K
(MLFB = 6RA24...).

Properties
A "peer-to-peer connection" refers to "a connection between partners with equal status".
Unlike the classic master-slave bus systems (such as PROFIBUS or USS), peer-to-peer
connections enable the same converter to act as both a master (setpoint source) and a slave
(setpoint recipient).
Signals can be transferred via the peer-to-peer connection from one converter unit to
another in fully digital format.
● Velocity setpoints for creating a setpoint cascade, e.g. in paper making machines, film
manufacturing machines, and wire drawing machines, as well as fiber stretching plants
● Torque setpoints for load distribution control systems on drives that are coupled either
mechanically or by means of the material, e.g. horizontal-shaft drives on a printing
machine or S-roll drives
● Acceleration setpoints (dv/dt) for acceleration precontrol in multi-motor drives
● Control commands
The peer-to-peer interface uses the RS485 interface at connector X177 (terminals 37, 38,
39, and 40).

Function diagrams
Function diagram FP9300 shows the settings and BICO interconnection options for the
"peer-to-peer connection".

Diagnostics
Parameter r50799 receives information about the distribution of error-free telegrams and
telegrams with errors over time, as well as the type of any communications errors that occur.

Topologies
The peer-to-peer interface supports 2 topologies:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

364 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.15 Serial interface with peer-to-peer protocol

● Point-to-point connection (see the series connection example further down)

– 4-wire connection between 2 converters
– Data transmission in both directions
● Bus connection (see the bus connection example further down)
– 2-wire connection between multiple converters
– Data transmission in one direction only
– The active sender is selected by means of the "Send enable" signal selected using
p50817. The send enable may only be at the "High" level for one converter in each
case. Converters whose send enable is at the "Low" level switch their sender to high
resistance.

Parameter assignment

Table 10- 21 Parameter assignment for peer-to-peer interface

Function Parameter
Peer-to-peer protocol selection p50790 = 5
PZD number p50791 = 1 to 5 words
Baud rate p50793 = 1 to 13, corresponding to between 300 and 187,500
baud
Bus terminator p50795 = 0: Bus terminator OFF
p50795 = 1: Bus terminator ON
Error statistics r50799: Displays receive errors on the peer-to-peer interface

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 365
Descriptions of functions
10.15 Serial interface with peer-to-peer protocol

Examples of peer-to-peer connections

Series connection
Each drive receives its own individual setpoint from the previous drive (classic setpoint
cascade).

'ULYH 'ULYH 'ULYH 'ULYHQ

$FWLYDWHEXVWHUPLQDWRU %XVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG Q $Q\KLJKQXPEHU
ZKHQXVLQJGDWDIHHGEDFN EXVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG

6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6

'&0$67(5 '&0$67(5 '&0$67(5 '&0$67(5
5[ 7[ 5[ 7[ 5[ 7[ 5[ 7[



               
               

 

'DWDIHHGEDFN

1) The shields for the interface cables must be connected directly on the units (using a clamp, for example) to unit or
cabinet ground, with a low level of impedance.
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2×0.5 mm2; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding cable should be used to ensure
that the difference in ground potentials between the link partners remains below 7 V.
3) Optional data feedback, which drive 1 can use to monitor the functionality of the entire peer chain
Figure 10-33 "Series connection" peer connection type

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

366 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.15 Serial interface with peer-to-peer protocol

Parallel connection
Up to 31 drives receive the same setpoints from drive 1.

'ULYH 'ULYH 'ULYH 'ULYHQQ 

%XVWHUPLQDWRUGHDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUGHDFWLYDWHG EXVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG

6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6

'&0$67(5 '&0$67(5 '&0$67(5 '&0$67(5
5[ 7[ 5[ 7[ 5[ 7[ 5[ 7[



               
               

 

1) The shields for the interface cables must be connected directly on the units (using a clamp, for example) to unit or
cabinet ground, with a low level of impedance.
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2×0.5 mm2; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding cable should be used to ensure
that the difference in ground potentials between the link partners remains below 7 V.
Figure 10-34 "Parallel connection" peer connection type

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 367
Descriptions of functions
10.15 Serial interface with peer-to-peer protocol

Bus connection
Up to 31 drives receive the same setpoints from a drive. The drive that sends the setpoints
must be selected by setting "Enable send" to 1. For all other drives, "Enable send" must be
set to 0.

%XVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUGHDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUGHDFWLYDWHG %XVWHUPLQDWRUDFWLYDWHG

6,1$0,&6'&0$67(5 6,1$0,&6'&0$67(5 6,1$0,&6'&0$67(5 6,1$0,&6'&0$67(5

(QDEOHVHQG  (QDEOHVHQG  (QDEOHVHQG  (QDEOHVHQG 

5[ 6HQG 5[ 5[ 5[
GDWD

        

7[ 7[ 7[ 7[

               
               

 

1) The shields for the interface cables must be connected directly on the units (using a clamp, for example) to unit or
cabinet ground, with a low level of impedance.
2) Twisted cable, e.g. LIYCY 2×0.5 mm2; with longer cables, an equipotential bonding cable should be used to ensure
that the difference in ground potentials between the link partners remains below 7 V.
Figure 10-35 "Bus connection" peer connection type

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

368 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.16 Expanding the SINAMICS DCM to include a second CUD

10.16 Expanding the SINAMICS DCM to include a second CUD

General information
As an option, the SINAMICS DC MASTER can be equipped with a second CUD by inserting
it in the right-hand slot. This option is only available in conjunction with option G00
(advanced CUD in left-hand slot). See also the section titled "Ordering information for
options and accessories".

CAUTION
Installing or removing a module is only permitted when the SINAMICS DC MASTER is in
the voltage-free state.

Properties
The right-hand CUD is used for system-specific extension of the SINAMICS DC MASTER
functions.
It enables the following function extensions:
● Doubling the number of hardware inputs and outputs for applications requiring more
analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs, or digital outputs
● Additional computing capacity for free function blocks and, above all, for application-
specific function diagrams generated using DCC
Connection between the left-hand and right-hand CUD:
16 BICO connections can be established in each direction.
This involves using the parallel-connection interface. Function diagrams FP9350, FP9352,
and FP9355 show the settings and BICO interconnection options for the parallel-connection
interface.
The hardware connection for the two CUDs is established inside the unit; there is no need
for an external connection using connector X165 or X166. It is also possible to use the
parallel-connection interface for controlling a power unit-side configuration in which several
SINAMICS DC MASTER units are connected in parallel.

Parameter assignment
The parameters for the right-hand CUD are assigned using the AOP30 or STARTER PC
tool. The Basic Operator Panel BOP20 cannot be used for this purpose.
● Assigning parameters for the right-hand CUD using the AOP30:
The AOP30 must be connected to connector X178 (RS485 interface) or X179 (RS232
interface) on the right-hand CUD.
● Assigning parameters for the right-hand CUD using STARTER:
STARTER views the right-hand CUD as a separate PROFIBUS node. Either the unique
bus address must be set using the AOP30, or STARTER must first be connected as the
sole bus node in order to set the unique bus address.
The second CUD must be parameterized as an "independent node" for the parallel-
connection interface, meaning that it participates in BICO exchange between multiple CUDs.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 369
Descriptions of functions
10.16 Expanding the SINAMICS DCM to include a second CUD

Table 10- 22 Assigning parameters in cases where several SINAMICS DC MASTER units are not connected in parallel at
the power unit side

Left-hand CUD Right-hand CUD

p51800 = 1 Independent node p51800 = 1 Independent node
p51801 Establish required BICO connections p51801 Establish required BICO connections
p51802 = 2 Minimum number of stations p51802 = 2 Minimum number of stations
p51803 = 0 "n+m mode" not active p51803 = 0 "n+m mode" not active
p51804[..] Establish required BICO connections p51804[..] Establish required BICO connections
p51805 = 1 Bus terminator p51805 = 1 Bus terminator
p51806 = Unique station address p51806 = Unique station address

Table 10- 23 Assigning parameters in cases where several SINAMICS DC MASTER units are connected in parallel at the
power unit side

Left-hand CUD Right-hand CUD

p51800 Required as with parallel connection of p51800 = 1 Independent node
power units
p51801 Establish required BICO connections p51801 Establish required BICO connections
p51802 Required as with parallel connection of p51802 Required as with parallel connection of
power units power units
p51803 Required as with parallel connection of p51803 = 0 "n+m mode" not active
power units
p51804[..] Establish required BICO connections p51804[..] Establish required BICO connections
p51805 Required as with parallel connection of p51805 = 0 No bus terminator
power units
p51806 = Unique station address p51806 = Unique station address
Normally, on the CUD on the right-hand slot the closed-loop drive control (setpoint
processing, ramp-function generator, closed-loop speed control, armature-current control,
closed-loop EMF control, closed-loop field-current control) are not required.
For that reason it makes sense to deactivate the closed-loop drive control (with p50899[0..6]
= 0, see also function diagram 1721) in order to gain more CPU time for free function blocks
and, especially, for application-specific function diagrams created with DCC.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

370 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.17 Runtime (operating hours counter)

10.17 Runtime (operating hours counter)

Total system runtime

The total system runtime is displayed in p2114 (Control Unit).
● Index 0 = System runtime in ms.
After reaching 86400000 ms (24 h), the value is reset.
● Index 1 = System runtime in days.
The counter value is saved at switch off. After the drive unit is powered up, the counter
continues to run with the most recently saved value.

Note
Errors and alarms are stamped with this system runtime.
If a connected AOP30 is parameterized as the time-of-day master (see Chapter 9,
"Assigning parameters to AOP30 as the time-of-day master"), faults and alarms are
provided with a real-time stamp.

Relative system runtime

The relative system runtime since the last POWER ON is displayed in p0969 (Control Unit)
in ms. The counter runs over after 49 days.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 371
Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

10.18 Diagnostics

10.18.1 Diagnostic memory

To provide support for troubleshooting and remedying problems, the SINAMICS DC
MASTER records various types of data in a diagnostics file. SIEMENS specialists can use
the contents of this file to glean more in-depth information about the cause of inexplicable
faults or other problems such as blown fuses or defective thyristors.
When contacting SIEMENS with queries related to problems of this type, it is, therefore,
advisable that you both read out this file and e-mail a copy of it to SIEMENS experts.
Proceed as follows to read out the diagnostics file:
1. Insert the CompactFlash Card in the drive.
2. Set p50832 to 1:
This copies the diagnostics file to the CompactFlash Card, a process which takes
approximately 2 minutes. Copying is complete when p50832 takes on the value 0 again.
3. The diagnostics file is called DiagStor.spd, is around 600 kB in size, and can be found in
the \USER\SINAMICS\DATA\LOG directory on the CompactFlash Card.
For more details on the diagnostic memory, please refer to function diagram FP8052.

10.18.2 Trend recorder function

The SINAMICS DC MASTER enables data from 4 channels to be recorded over an
extended period, with a large memory depth. A file on the CompactFlash Card takes on the
role of a long-term storage facility. The signals to be recorded are updated periodically and
written cyclically to the file.
The file contains a line-by-line account of the operating hour and values for the 4 channels,
in the form of an ASCII string, and can be evaluated and visualized using standard PC tools
such as Notepad or Excel.
Recording must be started manually (by setting p51705 = 0/1/2). With a recording period of 1
second, the file grows by approximately 100 kB per hour.
When starting via p51705 = 1, the recording is automatically stopped at the number of
entries set on p51706. However p51705 remains at 1. To restart the recording, p51705 = 0
must be set first.
When starting via p51705 = 2, the oldest entries are overwritten after the number of entries
set on p51706. Recording must be stopped manually (with p51705 = 0).
The file is called Track.csv and can be found in the \USER\SINAMICS\DATA\LOG directory
on the CompactFlash Card.
For more details on the trend recorder function, please refer to function diagram FP8050.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

372 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

10.18.3 Description of the LEDs on the CUD

5'<
'3
237
02' &8'&$

Figure 10-36 Layout of the LEDs

The individual states during ramp-up are indicated by means of the LEDs on the CUD.
● The duration of the individual states varies.
● If an error occurs, the ramp-up procedure is aborted and the cause of the error is
indicated via the LEDs.
Remedy: Insert the appropriate CompactFlash card with the correct software and
parameters.
● Once the unit has successfully ramped up, all the LEDs are switched off briefly.
● Once the unit has ramped up, the LEDs are controlled via the loaded software.
The description of the LEDs after ramp-up applies.
Note: The LEDs can only be seen when the front cover of the SINAMICS DC MASTER is
opened.

CUD - Response of LEDs during a software update

Table 10- 24 Software update

LED State Comment

RDY DP1 OPT MOD
Red Off Off Off FW update process CompactFlash Card update
Red 2 Hz Red Off Off FW update error Firmware on the CompactFlash Card
is incomplete or defective
FW CRC error CRC invalid
Red 0.5 Hz Red 0.5 Hz Off Off FW update completed Wait for Power On
Red 2 Hz Red 2 Hz Off Off FW incompatible (to HW) Incompatible firmware or
incorrect CompactFlash Card
Orange 0.5 x x Off DRIVE-CLiQ component update in
Hz progress
Orange 2 x x Off DRIVE-CLiQ component update
Hz complete

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 373
Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

CUD - Response of LEDs during ramp-up (following Power On)

Table 10- 25 Ramp-up

LED State Comment

RDY DP1 OPT MOD
Red Red Off Off BIOS loaded -
Red 2 Hz Red Off Off BIOS error -
Red Off Off Off Firmware loaded -
Red 2 Hz Red 2 Hz Off Off File error CompactFlash Card not present or
Flash file system faulty
Off Red Off Off No CRC error Firmware checked
Red 0.5 Hz Red 0.5 Hz Off Off CRC error Firmware checked, CRC error
Orange Off Off Off Drive initialization -

Response of the LEDs after ramp-up

Table 10- 26 CUD - Description of the LEDs after ramp-up

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

RDY (READY) - Off Electronic power supply is missing or outside -
permissible tolerance range
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation. No errors -
are present.
0.5 Hz Commissioning/reset -
flashing
light
2 Hz Writing to CompactFlash Card or internal Flash -
flashing memory
light Notice!
The electronic power supply for the SINAMICS
DC MASTER must not be shut down during the
write process.
Switching off the electronic power supply can
lead to the loss of the parameter assignments.
Also refer to the "Operation" chapter,
"CompactFlash Card functions" section.
Red 2 Hz General errors -
flashing
light
Orange Continuous System ramp-up and DRIVE-CLiQ –
communication is being established.
Green/ 1 Hz Component detection via LED is activated -
orange or flashing (p0124[0]).
red/ light Note:
orange Both options depend on the LED state when
component detection is activated via
p0124[0] = 1.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

374 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

DP1 - Off Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place. -
PROFIdrive Note:
cyclic The PROFIdrive is ready to communicate when
operation the CUD is ready for operation (see LED RDY).
Green Continuous Cyclic communication is taking place. -
0.5 Hz Bus fault (dataEx, no operate) -
flashing Full cyclic communication is not yet taking place.
light
Possible cause:
The controller is not transferring any setpoints.
Red Continuous USS: No activity on bus
0.5 Hz USS: Activity on bus; no PZD received
flashing Bus fault (no dataEx)(config fault) -
light
2 Hz Bus fault (no more dataEx) -
flashing Bus fault (search baud rate)
light
No link established -
OPT - Off Electronic power supply is missing or outside -
(OPTION) permissible tolerance range,
component not ready for operation,
Option Board not installed,
no associated drive object has been created,
Green Continuous Option Board is ready for operation. -
0.5 Hz Depends on the Option Board used -
flashing
light
Red 2 Hz At least one fault is present in this component. Remedy and acknowledge
flashing Option board not ready (e.g. after switching on) fault
light
MOD - Off Reserved -

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 375
Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

10.18.4 Faults and alarms

10.18.4.1 General information

Description
The errors and states detected by the individual components of the drive unit are indicated
by messages.
The messages are categorized into faults and alarms.

Note
The individual faults and alarms are described in the section titled "Faults and alarms" in the
SINAMICS DCM List Manual. Here you can also find a section titled "Function diagrams" →
"Faults and alarms", which contains function diagrams for the fault buffer, alarm buffer, fault
trigger, and fault configuration.

Properties of faults and alarms

● Faults
– Are identified by Fxxxxx
– Can lead to a fault reaction
– Must be acknowledged once the cause has been remedied
– Status via Control Unit and LED RDY
– Status via PROFIBUS status signal ZSW1.3 (fault active)
– Entry in the fault buffer
● Alarms (code A56789)
– Are identified by Axxxxx
– Have no further effect on the drive unit
– The alarms are automatically reset once the cause has been remedied. No
acknowledgment is required.
– Status via PROFIBUS status signal ZSW1.7 (alarm active)
– Entry in the alarm buffer
● General properties of faults and alarms
– Can be configured (e.g. change fault to alarm, fault reaction)
– Triggering on selected messages possible
– Initiation of messages possible via an external signal

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

376 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

Acknowledging faults
The list of faults and alarms specifies how each fault is acknowledged after the cause has
been remedied.
1. Acknowledgment of faults with "POWER ON"
– Switch the drive unit on/off (POWER ON).
2. Acknowledgment of faults with "IMMEDIATE"
– Via PROFIBUS control signal
STW1.7 (reset fault memory): 0/1 edge
Set STW1.0 (ON/OFF1) = "0" and "1"
– Via external input signal
Binector input and interconnection with digital input
p2103 = "Requested signal source"
p2104 = "Requested signal source"
p2105 = "Requested signal source"
Across all of the drive objects (DO) of a Control Unit
p2102 = "Requested signal source"
3. Acknowledgment of faults with "PULSE INHIBIT"
– The fault can only be acknowledged with a pulse inhibit (r0899.11 = 0).
– The same options are available for acknowledging as described under
acknowledgment with IMMEDIATE.

Note
The drive cannot resume operation until all active faults have been acknowledged.

10.18.4.2 Buffer for faults and alarms

Note
A fault buffer and alarm buffer are provided for each drive. The drive and device-specific
messages are entered in these buffers.
The contents of the fault buffer are saved to the non-volatile memory when the Control Unit
is powered down, i.e. the fault buffer history is still available when the unit is powered up
again.

NOTICE
The entry in the fault/alarm buffer is made after a delay. For this reason, the fault/alarm
buffer should not be read until a change in the buffer is also recognized (r0944, r2121) after
"Fault active"/"Alarm active" is output.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 377
Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

Fault buffer
Faults which occur are entered in the fault buffer as follows:

)DXOWGULYH
)DXOWWLPH )DXOWWLPH REMHFWWULJJHULQJ
)DXOWFRGH )DXOWYDOXH UHFHLYHG UHVROYHG

r0949[0] [I32] r0948[0] [ms] r2109[0] [ ms]

)DXOW r0945[0] r3115[0]
r2133[0] [Float] r2130[0] [ d] r2136[0] [d]
r0949[1] [I32] r0948[1] [ms] r2109[1] [ ms]
)DXOW r0945[1] r3115[7]
r2133[1] [Float] r2130[1] [ d] r2136[1] [d]
&XUUHQWIDXOW
LQFLGHQW

r0949[7] [I32] r0948[7] [ms] r2109[7] [ ms]

)DXOW r0945[7]
r2133[7] [Float] r2130[7] [ d] r2136[7] [d]
r3115[7] <1>

r0949[8] [I32] r0948[8] [ms] r2109[8] [ ms]

)DXOW r0945[8] r3115[8]
r2133[8] [Float] r2130[8] [ d] r2136[8] [d]
r0949[9] [I32] r0948[9] [ms] r2109[9] [ ms]
)DXOW r0945[9]
r2133[9] [Float] r2130[9] [ d] r2136[9] [d]
r3115[9]
VWDFNQRZ
OHGJHGIDXOW
LQFLGHQW

r0949[15] [I32] r0948[15] [ms] r2109[15] [ms]

)DXOW r0945[15] r2133[15] [ Float] r2130[15] [d] r2136[15] [d]
r3115[15
]

r0949[56] [I32] r0948[56] [ms] r2109[56] [ms]

)DXOW r0945[56] r2133[56] [ Float] r2130[56] [d] r2136[56] [d]
r3115[56
]

)DXOW r0945[57] r0949[57] [I32] r0948[57] [ms] r2109[57] [ms]

r3115[57
]
WKDFNQRZ r2133[57] [ Float] r2130[57] [d] r2136[57] [d]
OHGJHGIDXOW
LQFLGHQW
>ROGHVW@
r0949[63] [I32] r0948[63] [ms] r2109[63] [ms]
)DXOW r0945[63] r2133[63] [ Float] r2130[63] [d] r2136[63] [d]
r3115[63
]

! 7KLVIDXOWLVRYHUZULWWHQZKHQQHZHUIDXOWVRFFXU

Figure 10-37 Structure of the fault buffer

Properties of the fault buffer:

● A new fault incident encompasses one or more faults and is entered in "Current fault
incident".
● The entries appear in the buffer according to the time at which they occurred.
● If a new fault incident occurs, the fault buffer is reorganized. The history is recorded in
"Acknowledged fault incident" 1 to 7.
● If the cause of at least one fault in "Current fault incident" is remedied and acknowledged,
the fault buffer is reorganized. Faults that have not been remedied remain in "Current
fault incident".
● If "Current fault incident" contains 8 faults and a new fault occurs, the fault in the
parameters in index 7 is overwritten by the new fault.
● r0944 is incremented each time the fault buffer changes.
● A fault value (r0949) can be output for a fault. The fault value is used to diagnose the fault
more accurately; please refer to the fault description for details of the meaning.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

378 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

Clearing the fault buffer

● The fault buffer is reset as follows: p0952 = 0

Alarm buffer, alarm history

The alarm buffer comprises the alarm code, the alarm value, and the alarm time (received,
resolved). The alarm history occupies the last indices ([8...63]) of the parameter.

$ODUPFRGH $ODUPYDOXH $ODUPWLPH $ODUPWLPH

&DPHLQ UHFWLILHG

$ODUP U>@>O@ U>@>PV@ U>@>PV@

U>@ U>@>)ORDW@ U>@>G@ U>@>G@
ROGHVW
U>@>O@ U>@>PV@ U>@>PV@
$ODUP U>@
U>@>)ORDW@ U>@>G@ U>@>G@

$ODUP U>@
U>@>O@ U>@>PV@ U>@>PV@
QHZHVW U>@>)ORDW@ U>@>G@ U>@>G@

$ODUPKLVWRU\
$ODUP U>@>O@ U>@>PV@ U>@>PV@
U>@
QHZHVW U>@>)ORDW@ U>@>G@ U>@>G@
U>@>O@ U>@>PV@ U>@>PV@
$ODUP U>@
U>@>)ORDW@ U>@>G@ U>@>G@

$ODUP U>@>O@ U>@>PV@ U>@>PV@

U>@
ROGHVW U>@>)ORDW@ U>@>G@ U>@>G@

Figure 10-38 Structure of alarm buffer

Alarms that occur are entered in the alarm buffer as follows:

A maximum of 64 alarms are displayed in the alarm buffer:
● Index 0 to 6: The first 7 alarms are displayed.
● Index 7: The most recent alarm is displayed.
A maximum of 56 alarms are displayed in the alarm history:
● Index 8: The most recent alarm is displayed.
● Index 9 to 63: The first 55 alarms are displayed.
Properties of the alarm buffer/alarm history:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 379
Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

● The alarms in the alarm buffer are arranged from 7 to 0 according to the time that they
occurred. In the alarm history, this is from 8 to 63.
● If 8 alarms have been entered in the alarm buffer, and a new alarm is received, the
alarms that have been resolved are transferred to the alarm history.
● r2121 is incremented each time the alarm buffer changes.
● An alarm value (r2124) can be output for an alarm. The alarm value is used to diagnose
the alarm more accurately; please refer to the alarm description for details of the
meaning.
Clearing the alarm buffer, index [0...7]:
● The alarm buffer index [0...7] is reset as follows: p2111 = 0

10.18.4.3 Configuring messages

The properties of the faults and alarms in the drive system are permanently defined.
The following configuration settings can be made for some of the messages within a
permanently defined framework for the drive system:

Change message type (example)

Select message Set message type
p2118[5] = 1001 p2119[5] = 1: Fault (F)
= 2: Alarm (A)
= 3: No message (N)
Change fault reaction (example)
Select message Set fault reaction
p2100[3] = 1002 p2101[3] = 0: None
= 1: OFF1
= 2: OFF2
= 3: OFF3
Change acknowledgment (example)
Select message Set acknowledgment
p2126[4] = 1003 p2127[4] = 1: POWER ON
= 2: IMMEDIATE
= 3: PULSE INHIBIT

Note
If BICO interconnections exist between drive objects, all interconnected objects must be
configured.
• Example:
The TM31 has BICO interconnections with the drive and F35207 is to be reconfigured as
an alarm.
– p2118[n] = 35207 and p2119[n] = 2
– This must be set for TM31 and the drive.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

380 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

Note
Only those messages which are listed in the indexed parameters can be changed as
desired. All other messages retain their factory settings or are reset to the factory settings.
Examples:
• In the case of messages listed via p2128[0...19], the message type can be changed. The
factory setting is set for all other messages.
• The fault response of fault F12345 has been changed via p2100[n]. The factory settings
are to be restored.
– p2100[n] = 0

Triggering on messages (example)

Select message Trigger signal

p2128[0] = 1001 BO: r2129.0
or
p2128[1] = 1002 BO: r2129.1

Note
The value from CO: r2129 can be used as a group trigger.
CO: r2129 = 0 No selected message has been output.
CO: r2129 > 0 Group trigger.
At least 1 selected message has been output.
The individual binector outputs BO: r2129 should be investigated.

Triggering messages externally

If the appropriate binector input is interconnected with an input signal, fault 1, 2, or 3 or alarm
1, 2, or 3 can be triggered via an external input signal.
Once an external fault (1 to 3) has been triggered on the Control Unit drive object, this fault
is also present on all associated drive objects. If one of these external faults is triggered on a
different drive object, it is only present on that particular drive object.

BI: p2106 → External fault 1 → F07860(A)

BI: p2107 → External fault 2 → F07861(A)
BI: p2108 → External fault 3 → F07862(A)
BI: p2112 → External alarm 1 → A07850(F)
BI: p2116 → External alarm 2 → A07851(F)
BI: p2117 → External alarm 3 → A07852(F)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 381
Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

Note
An external fault or alarm is triggered by a 1/0 signal.
An external fault and alarm do not usually mean that an internal drive message has been
generated. The cause of an external fault and warning should, therefore, be remedied
outside the drive unit.

10.18.4.4 Parameters and function diagrams for faults and alarms

Function diagrams (see the SINAMICS DCM List Manual)

● 1710 Overview diagram – monitoring functions, faults, alarms
● 8060 Faults and alarms – fault buffer
● 8065 Faults and alarms – alarm buffer
● 8070 Faults and alarms – fault/alarm trigger word r2129
● 8075 Faults and alarms – fault/alarm configuration

Overview of important parameters (refer to the SINAMICS DCM List Manual)

● r0944 Counter for fault buffer changes
...
● p0952 Fault incident counter
● p2100[0...19] Fault code for fault reaction selection
...
● r2139 Status word for faults

10.18.4.5 Forwarding of faults

Forwarding CU faults
When faults are triggered on the drive object of the CU, it is always assumed that central
functions of the drive unit are affected. For this reason, these faults are not only signaled on
the drive object of the CU, but may also be forwarded to all other drive objects (propagation).
The fault reaction affects the drive object of the CU and all other drive objects. This behavior
also applies to the faults set in a DCC chart on the CU with the aid of DCB STM.
A fault that is set on the drive object of the CU must be acknowledged on all drive objects to
which this fault was forwarded. In this way, the fault is then automatically acknowledged on
the drive object of the CU. Alternatively, all faults of all drive objects can also be
acknowledged on the CU.
Alarms are not forwarded to other drive objects by the CU.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

382 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.18 Diagnostics

Forwarding of faults due to BICO interconnections

If two or more drive objects are connected via BICO interconnections, faults of CU, TM31,
TM15, TM17, and TM15DIDO drive objects are forwarded to DC_CTRL-type drive objects.
Faults are not forwarded within these two groups of drive object types.
This behavior also applies to the faults set in a DCC chart on the above drive object types
with the aid of DCB STM.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 383
Descriptions of functions
10.19 CPU time load with SINAMICS DCM

10.19 CPU time load with SINAMICS DCM

The CPU time load of the SINAMICS DCM can be read out at p9976. Principally, the
following rules apply:
1. The cyclical DC closed loop control of the SINAMICS DCM generates a base load of
approx. 70 % (can be read on p9976).
2. The use of peripherals (AOP30, Starter, TM15, TM31, SCM30, CBE20,…), certain
settings in the closed loop control and/or use of the free function blocks along with the
DCC technology option increases this base load. The additional CPU time load through
the main components is summarized in the table below.
3. The CPU time load must not exceed a utilization of 100% at p9976.

WARNING
At a CPU time load of >100 % on p9976[1], the correct functioning of the drive is no
longer ensured.

Note
If the CUD is too heavily loaded (p9976 > 100 %), fault 1205 occurs (time slice overflow).
In such a case, the drive needs to be switched off and then back on again (POWER OFF
/ POWER ON).

The CPU time load must be taken into consideration when configuring and commissioning
the SINAMICS DCM.

Table 10- 27 Additional CPU time load through optional components

Component Additional CPU time load

AOP30 via PPI +4 %
1 TM31 +4 %
2 TM31 +5 %
3 TM31 +6 %
1 TM15 +1 %
2 TM15 +1.5 %
3 TM15 +2 %
1 SMC30 +2 %
1 CBE20 +1 %
Internal encoder (p50083=2) +2 %
Parallel-connection interface +4 %
Peer-to-peer +4 %
CompactFlash Card inserted +1 %
Free function blocks Depending on the number of free function blocks
being used and their runtime groups, see the
"Free function blocks" chapter
DCC Depending on the number of DCC blocks being
used and their runtime groups, see the "Drive
Control Chart (DCC)" chapter

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

384 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.19 CPU time load with SINAMICS DCM

Note
The additional CPU time load stated above for TM15 and TM31 apply to a sampling time of
4 ms (p4099 = 4000). Setting faster sampling rates in the TM modules increases the CPU
time load in the SINAMICS DCM to values considerably higher than those stated above.

Note
The stated computing rules are to be understood as support during configuring and
commissioning. The theoretical CPU time load computed from these rules can deviate from
the CPU time load actually measured on the p9976 by several percentage points.

10.19.1 Maximum configuration

The following configuration can be operated as the maximum on one CUD.

Table 10- 28 Maximum configuration with SINAMICS DCM

Number Component Note

3 TM15, TM31 Connection of any combination of TM15 and TM31
modules on DriveCLiQ. The connection of other TM
modules (TM17, TM41,..) and of more than 3 TM
modules is locked.
Sampling in 4 ms cycle (p4099=4000). Faster
sampling increases the CPU time load, and precludes
operation of this maximum configuration
1 SMC30 The connection of others (SMC10, SMC20,..) and of
more than 1 external encoder module is locked.
1 CBE20 The connection of other OMI modules (CBE10) is
locked.
1 Internal encoder p500083 = 2
1 AOP30 Connection via PPI or RS232
1 STARTER Online
1 Parallel-connection interface Active
1 Peer-to-peer Active

Note
The capacity of the SINAMICS DCM can be expanded by equipping the SINAMICS DCM
with a 2nd CUD (right-hand slot). See the "Expanding the SINAMICS DCM to include a
second CUD" chapter.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 385
Descriptions of functions
10.19 CPU time load with SINAMICS DCM

10.19.2 Computation examples

Example 1:
Project A is a single drive in a control cabinet. An AOP30 (PPI) is located in the control
cabinet door. The motor has an incremental encoder, which is connected through the
internal encoder input.

Base load 70 %
AOP30 via PPI +4 %
Internal encoder +2 %
Calculated CPU time load = 76 %
Approx. 24 % remain free for use by the free function blocks and/or DCC blocks.

Example 2:
Project B is a single drive connected to an S7 via ProfiNet. 3 TM31 modules are used for
terminal expansion. The sampling rates of the TM modules (p4099) are set to 4000 ms. In
addition, a configured DCC application in the drive is running, which comprises 50 blocks
and runs in the 6 ms time slice.

Base load 70 %
CBE20 +1 %
3 × TM31 with p4099[1,2,3] = 500 +6 %
DCC application: 50 blocks @ 1 ms +5 %
Calculated CPU time load = 82 %
The CUD is 82 % utilized.

Note
The available CPU time can be expanded by equipping the SINAMICS DCM with a 2nd CUD
(right-hand slot). See the "Expanding the SINAMICS DCM to include a second CUD"
chapter.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

386 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.20 Free function blocks

10.20 Free function blocks

A logic operation, which connects several states (e.g. access control, plant status) to a
control signal (e.g. ON command), is required for controlling the drive system in a wide
variety of applications.
Along with logic operations, a number of arithmetical operations and storing elements are
becoming increasingly important in drive systems. This functionality is available as a "Free
function blocks" function module (FBLOCKS) on the drive object type of the SINAMICS
DCM.

Notes
● Exact information on the scope of the blocks, about parameter assignment and about
commissioning the free function blocks is available in the "SINAMICS" Free function
blocks" manual. This chapter describes the special features of the free function blocks
with SINAMICS DCM.
● This additional functionality increases the CPU time load. That means the maximum
possible configuration with a Control Unit may be restricted.
● The free function blocks are restricted in their scope to 52 blocks per drive object (DO).
Furthermore, the unassigned function blocks as compared to DCC cause significantly
higher CPU time loading. If that does not suffice, the application can be implemented with
the DCC technology option. See the Drive Control Chart (DCC) chapter.
● In the SINAMICS DCM, simultaneous use of the free function blocks and the DCC
technology option are feasible.

CPU time load through free function blocks with the SINAMICS DCM
Processing free function blocks requires considerable computation time. If the CPU time
becomes meager, you have to check whether all the activated function modules are required
and whether all the function blocks used need to be computed within the same sampling
time.
The CPU time load can be reduced by either deactivating function modules or assigning
used function blocks to a runtime group with a longer sampling time.

Table 10- 29 CPU time load through free function blocks with the SINAMICS DCM

Time slice Number of free function blocks CPU time load

16 52 +30 %
8 23 +30 %
5 12 +30 %
4 6 +30 %
2 3 +30 %

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 387
Descriptions of functions
10.20 Free function blocks

Notes
● The current CPU time load of the CUD can be read out on p9976. Please refer to the
"CPU time load with the SINAMICS DCM" chapter for more information about the CPU
load with the SINAMICS DCM.
● To make own calculations, the above-illustrated CPU time loads can be taken as "linear".
This means that:
– half as many blocks in the same time slice generate half as much CPU time load, etc.
– the same number of blocks in time slices half as fast generate half as much CPU time
load, etc.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

388 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.21 Drive Control Chart (DCC)

10.21 Drive Control Chart (DCC)

For complex applications that cannot be implemented with the free function blocks, the DCC
technology option is available. With DCC, a function diagram can be graphically created,
which comprises elementary function blocks that are connected with each other, and which
can then be loaded into the SINAMICS DC MASTER.
The following steps are required to implement an executable DCC control with the
SINAMICS DCM:
1. Installation of STARTER and a DCC license on the PC
2. Loading the DCC technology option on to the memory (ROM) in the drive unit.
3. Configure a DCC diagram on the PC (DCC editor)
4. Compile the DCC diagram on the PC and load it into the drive

Notes
● Detailed information on the function blocks is contained in the "SINAMICS SIMOTION
Function Manual DCC Block Description" as well as in the "SINAMICS SIMOTION
Programming Manual DCC Editor". This chapter describes the special features of the
DCC technology option with SINAMICS DCM.
● Simultaneous use of the free function blocks and the DCC technology option are feasible.
● This additional functionality through DCC increases the CPU time load. That means the
maximum possible configuration with a Control Unit may be restricted.

10.21.1 Loading the DCC in the drive unit memory

Loading the DCC technology option into the drive unit is usually performed with STARTER
and with the SINAMICS DCM takes about 20 min. During this process, the entire DCB library
with a scope of approx. 2 MB data is transferred to the drive.
To accelerate this process, the SINAMICS DCM supports an alternative facility for
transferring the DCB library to the drive. With this method, the process is shortened to less
than 5 min:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 389
Descriptions of functions
10.21 Drive Control Chart (DCC)

● Step 1
In STARTER, open a project that contains a SINAMICS DCM. In the shortcut menu (right
mouse button), select "Load into file system".

Figure 10-39 Loading into the file system

● Step 2
A dialog, "Load into file system", opens. Choose "Select target" and select an empty
folder on a local hard drive.
● Step 3
After a folder has been selected, STARTER copies the DCB library into this local folder. 2
folders named "OEM" and "USER" are created.
● Step 4
Both folders including their contents are copied onto an empty CompactFlash Card.
● Step 5
Insert the CompactFlash Card into the switched-off drive and switch on (POWER ON).
The DCB library is copied into the non-volatile memory (ROM) in the drive during power-
up. The process is complete as soon as the power-up has ended (operating state 7.0
reached).

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

390 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.21 Drive Control Chart (DCC)

● Step 6
Switch device off/on (POWER OFF / POWER ON). After the new power-up, the DCC is
ready.
● Repeat steps 5 and 6 on additional SINAMICS DCM drives.

Note
If DCC is installed in the drive, the power-up time increases by approx. 10 s.

10.21.2 CPU time load through DCC

Calculating the DCC blocks requires CPU time. If the CPU time becomes meager, you have
to check whether all the activated blocks are required and whether all the function blocks
used need to be computed within the same sampling time.
The CPU time load can be reduced by either deactivating blocks or assigning used blocks to
a runtime group with a longer sampling time.
DCC was CPU-time optimized for SINAMICS DCM. The optimized blocks can be computed
about 5 times faster than non-optimized blocks, so they should be given preference as they
load the processor less. Non-optimized blocks can also be used, but their use, due to the
higher CPU time load in fast time slices (1 ms), is problematic.
Please refer to Appendix B for a list of all CPU-optimized DCC blocks on the SINAMICS
DCM.

Table 10- 30 CPU time load DCC blocks left-hand CUD.

Time slice Number of optimized Number of non- CPU time load

blocks 1) optimized blocks
1 ms 50 10 +30 %
2 ms 100 20 +30 %
4 ms 200 40 +30 %
6 ms 300 60 +30 %
8 ms 400 80 +30 %
16 ms 800 160 +30 %
1)This information applies to a left-hand CUD without additional options. These options increase the
basic load of the CUD and reduce the available CPU time for the DCC blocks. Please refer to the
"CPU time load with the SINAMICS DCM" chapter for more information about the CPU load.
In this information, an average complexity of the blocks being used is assumed. If only highly
complex or very simple blocks are computed, the stated limit shifts accordingly.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 391
Descriptions of functions
10.21 Drive Control Chart (DCC)

Notes
● The current CPU time load of the CUD can be read out on p9976. Please refer to the
"CPU time load with the SINAMICS DCM" chapter for more information about the CPU
load on the SINAMICS DCM.
● To make own calculations, the above-illustrated CPU time loads can be taken as "linear".
This means that:
– half as many blocks in the same time slice generate half as much CPU time load, etc.
– the same number of blocks in time slices half as fast generate half as much CPU time
load, etc.

Examples
1. In the 1 ms time slice, 50 blocks generate about 30 % additional CPU time load. For that
reason, 50 blocks in the 2 ms time slice generate about 30 % × 0.5 = 15 % additional
CPU time load.
2. In the 7 ms time slice, (300 + 400) / 2 = 350 blocks generate about 30 % additional CPU
time load. That means 250 blocks generate 250 / 350 × 30 % = 21.5 % additional CPU
time load.

10.21.3 Memory load through DCC

Along with the CPU time load, the memory load of the processor must also be considered
when designing a closed loop control with the DCC technology option. A higher number of
configured DCC blocks and @parameters also more highly loads the internal memory
(ROM) of the CUD.
For using DCC, on the SINAMICS DCM, as compared with the maximum possible
configurations documented in the "Maximum configuration" chapter, depending on the size
of the diagram, one must omit optional components. The number of blocks and the
@parameters are decisive.
For one CUD without additional options, the following rules apply:

Table 10- 31 Maximum number of DCC blocks and @parameters

Drive object Number of DCC blocks and @parameters

CU_DC 800
DC_CTRL 600
Note:
The specified maximum numbers for blocks and @parameters always apply for the entire
drive unit and should be regarded as guide values. The CUD is completely utilized with 800
DCC blocks and @parameters on the DO CU_DC or 600 DCC blocks and @parameters on
the DO DC_CTRL. Conserving @parameters has little effect on the quantity structure of the
blocks; the specified maximum numbers for the blocks should therefore not be exceeded.
On the DO DC_CTRL, due to the large number of drive parameters, fewer DCC blocks can
be computed than on the DO CU_DC.
In addition, the memory is loaded by optional components as follows:

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

392 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Descriptions of functions
10.21 Drive Control Chart (DCC)

Table 10- 32 Additional memory load through optional components

Component Additional memory load

(expressed in DCC blocks)
AOP30 - 200 blocks
TM31 - 150 blocks
TM15 - 150 blocks
SMC30 - 25 blocks
CBE20 - 25 blocks
The final limits are determined by the total memory available on the CUD. If the above-
mentioned recommended maximum limits are exceeded, this can result in errors during
upload or download (e.g. fault F1105: CU memory insufficient) and the drive can no longer
be switched on; power OFF/ON must be performed on the drive unit.

Sample calculation:
The SINAMICS DM is equipped with one AOP30 and 2 TM31 modules. The DCC diagram is
to be computed on the DO DC_CTRL.
→ 600 – 200 – 2×150 = 100 DCC blocks can be computed on the DO DC_CTRL.

Notes:
● If there is insufficient memory on the CUD for the configuration of the desired DCC
diagram, the scope of the blocks needs to be reduced or the SINAMICS DCM needs to
be equipped with a 2nd CUD on the right-hand slot.
● The computation rules stated above also apply to the CUD on the right-hand slot.
● In most cases, the CPU time load of the CUD becomes the limiting factor when designing
the DCC application and not the memory load.

10.21.4 Backing up the DCC diagrams

A DCC project comprises two parts.
1. Information about the type, time slices and interconnection of the DCB blocks
2. Information about the layout and graphics in the DCC diagrams
When loading the diagram into the drive (loading into the target system) only the information
about the type, time slices and interconnection of the DCB blocks (Point 1) are loaded into
the drive.
The information about layout and graphics in the DCC diagrams (Point 2) are only available
in the STARTER project. To be able to open the diagrams later in the editor, it is important to
back up the STARTER project related to a drive.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 393
Maintenance 11
WARNING
Dangerous voltages are inevitable in certain parts of these electrical units during operation.
Dangerous voltage levels may be present at the signaling relays at the customer's site.
Therefore, failure to handle the units properly can result in death or serious physical injury
as well as extensive property damage.
When performing maintenance on this unit, you should therefore observe all information
provided in this section as well as any notices attached to the product itself.
• Only qualified personnel who are familiar with all the safety instructions in this
description, as well as the installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, should
carry out maintenance work on this unit.
• Before carrying out visual inspections and maintenance work, it must be ensured that
the unit is disconnected from the AC power supply, disabled, and grounded. Before the
AC power supply is disconnected, the SINAMICS DCM Control Module, the power unit,
and the motor are subject to dangerous voltage levels; these may be present even when
the contactor of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module is open.
Only spare parts approved by the manufacturer may be used.

The SINAMICS DCM Control Module must be provided with extensive protection measures
against contamination in order to prevent voltage flashovers and, therefore, destruction. Dust
and foreign bodies must be thoroughly removed at given intervals depending on the level of
soiling and certainly at least once every 12 months. The unit must be blown out with dry
compressed air at a maximum of 1 bar, or cleaned using a vacuum cleaner.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 395
Maintenance
11.1 Software update procedure

11.1 Software update procedure

Notes
● Only CompactFlash Cards which have been prepared for these systems by Siemens will
be accepted. CompactFlash Cards for the SINAMICS DCM can be ordered as option
S01.
● If the CompactFlash Card is formatted, formatting must be performed with the FAT16
setting (not FAT32).
● To download the latest software version, visit: See preface
● When the system is first ramped up following a software update, the software performs
an internal processor update. If the CUD hangs in operating state 12.5 while doing this
(the operating state is pending for more than 60 seconds), the problem can be solved by
switching the electronic power supply off and on.
The software must be updated if extended functions are made available in a more recent
version and these functions are to be used.

Procedure
● Shut down the electronic power supply for the SINAMICS DC MASTER.
● Insert the CompactFlash Card with the software update in the CUD.
● Switch on the electronic power supply.
The software is transferred from the CompactFlash Card to the non-volatile memory
("ROM" memory) of the CUD. Any parameter data sets on the CompactFlash Card will
also be transferred. This process may take a around 13 minutes and is indicated by the
READY(RDY) LED on the CUD lighting up red continuously. Once all the updates have
been carried out, the READY (RDY) LED flashes red at 2 Hz.
● Switch the electronic power supply off and on again. This will cause the new software to
take effect.

NOTICE
The electronic power supply must not be interrupted during the update, otherwise the
update will need to be restarted.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

396 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Applications 12

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 397
Appendix A
A.1 Certifications and standards

Certifications

Development, production, sales:

ISO 9001:2008 Quality management
ISO 14001:2004 Environmental management
Units:
UL, cULus Available soon
Germanischer Lloyd Shipbuilding Available soon
Lloyd's Register Shipbuilding Available soon
American Bureau of Shipping Shipbuilding Available soon
Det Norske Veritas Shipbuilding Available soon

Basic standards

EN 50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations

EN 50274 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: Protection against
electric shock - Protection against unintentional direct contact with
hazardous live parts
EN 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters; General requirements and line-commutated
converters; specification of basic requirements
EN 61800-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - General requirements
- Rating specifications for low voltage adjustable speed DC power drive
systems
EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC product
standard including specific test methods
EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-1: Safety
requirements – Electrical, thermal, and energy
IEC 62103 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
identical to
DIN EN 50178
UBC 97 Uniform Building Code

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 399
Appendix
A.1 Certifications and standards

Reference standards

SN 29500-1 Component failure rates: Anticipated values, general

SN 36350-1 Environmentally compatible products, Part 1: Product design guidelines
SN 27095 Inspection and testing of switchgear and control equipment for marine
engineering
ISO 3740 Determination of sound power levels of noise sources: Guidelines for the
use of basic standards

Country-specific standards

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

UL 508 C Power Conversion Equipment
UL 840 Insulation Coordination
Including Clearances and Creepage Distances for Electrical Equipment
UL 94 Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

400 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

A.2 List of abbreviations

Note
The following list of abbreviations includes all abbreviations and their meanings used in the
entire SINAMICS user documentation.

Abbreviation Meaning, German Meaning, English

A
A... Warnung Alarm
AC Wechselstrom Alternating Current
ADC Analog-Digital-Konverter Analog Digital Converter
AI Analogeingang Analog Input
AIM Active Interface Module Active Interface Module
ALM Active Line Module Active Line Module
AO Analogausgang Analog Output
AOP Advanced Operator Panel Advanced Operator Panel
APC Advanced Positioning Control Advanced Positioning Control
ASC Ankerkurzschluss Armature Short-Circuit
ASCII Amerikanische Code-Norm für den American Standard Code for Information
Informationsaustausch Interchange
ASM Asynchronmotor Induction motor
B
BB Betriebsbedingung Operating condition
BERO Firmenname für einen Näherungsschalter Tradename for a type of proximity switch
BI Binektoreingang Binector Input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für German Institute for Occupational Safety
Arbeitssicherheit
BICO Binektor-Konnektor-Technologie Binector Connector Technology
BLM Basic Line Module Basic Line Module
BOP Basic Operator Panel Basic Operator Panel
C
C Kapazität Capacitance
C... Safety-Meldung Safety message
CAN Serielles Bussystem Controller Area Network
CBC Kommunikationsbaugruppe CAN Communication Board CAN
CD Compact Disc Compact Disc
CDS Befehlsdatensatz Command Data Set
CF CompactFlash CompactFlash
CI Konnektoreingang Connector Input
CNC Computerunterstützte numerische Steuerung Computer Numerical Control
CO Konnektorausgang Connector Output
CO/BO Konnektor-/Binektorausgang Connector Output/Binector Output

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 401
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning, German Meaning, English

COB-ID CAN Object-Identification CAN Object-Identification
COM Mittelkontakt eines Wechselkontaktes Common contact of a change-over relay
CP Kommunikationsprozessor Communications Processor
CPU Zentrale Recheneinheit Central Processing Unit
CRC Checksummenprüfung Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSM Control Supply Module Control Supply Module
CU Control Unit Control Unit
D
DAC Digital-Analog-Konverter Digital Analog Converter
DC Gleichstrom Direct Current
DCB Drive Control Block Drive Control Block
DCC Drive Control Chart Drive Control Chart
DCN Gleichstrom negativ Direct Current Negative
DCP Gleichstrom positiv Direct Current Positive
DDS Antriebsdatensatz Drive Data Set
DI Digitaleingang Digital Input
DI/DO Digitaleingang/-ausgang bidirektional Bidirectional Digital Input/Output
DMC DRIVE-CLiQ Module Cabinet (Hub) DRIVE-CLiQ Module Cabinet (Hub)
DO Digitalausgang Digital Output
DO Antriebsobjekt Drive Object
DP Dezentrale Peripherie Decentralized Peripherals (Distributed I/Os)
DPRAM Speicher mit beidseitigem Zugriff Dual-Port Random Access Memory
DRAM Dynamischer Speicher Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRIVE- Drive Component Link with IQ Drive Component Link with IQ
CLiQ
DSC Dynamic Servo Control Dynamic Servo Control
D
EASC Externer Ankerkurzschluss External Armature Short-Circuit
EDS Geberdatensatz Encoder Data Set
EGB Elektrostatisch gefährdete Baugruppen Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
ELP Erdschlussüberwachung Earth Leakage Protection
EMK Elektromagnetische Kraft Electromagnetic Force (EMF)
EMV Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
EN Europäische Norm European Standard
EnDat Geber-Schnittstelle Encoder-Data-Interface
EP Impulsfreigabe Enable Pulses
EPOS Einfachpositionierer Basic positioner
ES Engineering System Engineering System
ESB Ersatzschaltbild Equivalent circuit diagram
ESR Erweitertes Stillsetzen und Rückziehen Extended Stop and Retract
F
F... Störung Fault

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

402 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning, German Meaning, English

FAQ Häufig gestellte Fragen Frequently Asked Questions
FBL Freie Funktionsblöcke Free Blocks
FCC Function Control Chart Function Control Chart
FCC Flussstromregelung Flux Current Control
F-DI Fehlersicherer Digitaleingang Failsafe Digital Input
F-DO Fehlersicherer Digitalausgang Failsafe Digital Output
FEM Fremderregter Synchronmotor Separately excited synchronous motor
FEPROM Schreib- und Lesespeicher nichtflüchtig Flash-EPROM
FG Funktionsgenerator Function Generator
FI Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker (ELCB)
FP Funktionsplan Function diagram
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array Field Programmable Gate Array
FW Firmware Firmware
G
GB Gigabyte Gigabyte
GC Global-Control-Telegramm (Broadcast-Telegramm) Global Control Telegram (Broadcast Telegram)
GSD Gerätestammdatei: beschreibt die Merkmale eines Device master file: describes the features of a
PROFIBUS-Slaves PROFIBUS slave
GSV Gate Supply Voltage Gate Supply Voltage
GUID Globally Unique Identifier Globally Unique Identifier
H
HF Hochfrequenz High Frequency
HFD Hochfrequenzdrossel High frequency reactor
HLG Hochlaufgeber Ramp-function generator
HMI Mensch-Maschine-Schnittstelle Human Machine Interface
HTL Logik mit hoher Störschwelle High-Threshold Logic
HW Hardware Hardware
I
i. V. In Vorbereitung: diese Eigenschaft steht zur Zeit In preparation: this feature is currently not available
nicht zur Verfügung
I/O Eingang/Ausgang Input/Output
IASC Interner Ankerkurzschluss Internal Armature Short-Circuit
IBN Commissioning Commissioning
ID Identifizierung Identifier
IEC Internationale Norm in der Elektrotechnik International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Interface Interface
IGBT Bipolartransistor mit isolierter Steuerelektrode Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
IL Impulslöschung Pulse suppression
IPO Interpolatortakt Interpolator clock
IT Drehstromversorgungsnetz ungeerdet Insulated three-phase supply network
IVP Interner Spannungsschutz Internal Voltage Protection
J
JOG Tippen Jogging

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 403
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning, German Meaning, English

K
KDV Kreuzweiser Datenvergleich Data cross-checking
KIP Kinetische Pufferung Kinetic buffering
Kp Proportionalverstärkung Proportional gain
KTY Spezieller Temperatursensor Special temperature sensor
L
L Induktivität Inductance
LED Leuchtdiode Light Emitting Diode
LIN Linearmotor Linear motor
LR Lageregler Position controller
LSB Niederstwertiges Bit Least Significant Bit
LSS Netzschalter Line Side Switch
LU Längeneinheit Length Unit
LWL Lichtwellenleiter Fiber-optic cable
M
M Masse Reference potential, zero potential
MB Megabyte Megabyte
MCC Motion Control Chart Motion Control Chart
MDS Motordatensatz Motor Data Set
MLFB Maschinenlesbare Fabrikatebezeichnung Machine-readable product designation
MMC Mensch-Maschine-Kommunikation Man-Machine Communication
MSB Höchstwertiges Bit Most Significant Bit
MSCY_C1 Zyklische Kommunikation zwischen Master (Klasse Master Slave Cycle Class 1
1) und Slave
MSC Motorstromrichter Motor power converter
MT Messtaster Measuring probe
N
N. C. Nicht angeschlossen Not Connected
N... Keine Meldung oder Interne Meldung No Report
NAMUR Normenarbeitsgemeinschaft für Mess- und Standardization association for instrumentation and
Regeltechnik in der chemischen Industrie control in the chemical industry
NC Öffner Normally Closed (contact)
NC Numerische Steuerung Numerical Control
NEMA Normengremium in USA (United States of America) National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NM Nullmarke Zero Mark
NO Schließer Normally Open (contact)
NSR Netzstromrichter Line power converter
O
OA Open Architecture Open Architecture
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer Original Equipment Manufacturer
OLP Busstecker für Lichtleiter Optical Link Plug
OMI Option Module Interface Option Module Interface
P

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

404 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning, German Meaning, English

p... Einstellparameter Adjustable parameter
PB PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
PcCtrl Steuerungshoheit Master Control
PD PROFIdrive PROFIdrive
PDS Leistungsteildatensatz Power Unit Data Set
PE Schutzerde Protective Earth
PELV Schutzkleinspannung Protective Extra Low Voltage
PEM Permanenterregter Synchronmotor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
PG Programmiergerät Programming terminal
PI Proportional Integral Proportional Integral
PID Proportional Integral Differential Proportional Integral Differential
PLC Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung (SPS) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
PLL Phase Locked Loop Phase Locked Loop
PNO PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation PROFIBUS user organization
PPI Punkt zu Punkt Schnittstelle Point to Point Interface
PRBS Weißes Rauschen Pseudo Random Binary Signal
PROFIBUS Serieller Datenbus Process Field Bus
PS Stromversorgung Power Supply
PSA Power Stack Adapter Power Stack Adapter
PTC Positiver Temperaturkoeffizient Positive Temperature Coefficient
PTP Punkt zu Punkt Point-To-Point
PWM Pulsweitenmodulation Pulse Width Modulation
PZD PROFIBUS Prozessdaten PROFIBUS process data
R
r... Beobachtungsparameter (nur lesbar) Display parameter (read only)
RAM Speicher zum Lesen und Schreiben Random Access Memory
RCCB Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter Residual Current Circuit Breaker
RCD Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter Residual Current Device
RJ45 Norm. Beschreibt eine 8-polige Steckverbindung mit Standard. Describes an 8-pole plug connector with
Twisted-Pair Ethernet. twisted pair Ethernet.
RKA Rückkühlanlage Recooling system
RO Nur lesbar Read Only
RPDO Receive Process Data Object Receive Process Data Object
RS232 Serielle Schnittstelle Serial Interface
RS485 Norm. Beschreibt die Physik einer digitalen seriellen Standard. Describes the physical characteristics of a
Schnittstelle. digital serial interface.
RTC Echtzeituhr Real Time Clock
RZA Raumzeigerapproximation Space vector approximation (SVA)
S
S1 Dauerbetrieb Continuous operation
S3 Aussetzbetrieb Periodic duty
SBC Sichere Bremsenansteuerung Safe Brake Control
SBH Sicherer Betriebshalt Safe Operating Stop

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 405
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning, German Meaning, English

SBR Sichere Beschleunigungsüberwachung Safe Acceleration Monitor
SCA Sichere Nocke Safe Cam
SE Sicherer Software-Endschalter Safe software limit switch
SG Sicher reduzierte Geschwindigkeit Safely reduced speed
SGA Sicherheitsgerichteter Ausgang Safety-related output
SGE Sicherheitsgerichteter Eingang Safety-related input
SH Sicherer Halt Safety standstill
SI Safety Integrated Safety Integrated
SIL Sicherheitsintegritätsgrad Safety Integrity Level
SLM Smart Line Module Smart Line Module
SLP Sicher begrenzte Position Safely Limited Position
SLS Sicher begrenzte Geschwindigkeit Safely Limited Speed
SLVC Geberlose Vektorregelung Sensorless Vector Control
SM Sensor Module Sensor Module
SMC Sensor Module Cabinet Sensor Module Cabinet
SME Sensor Module External Sensor Module External
SN Sicherer Software-Nocken Safe software cam
SOS Sicherer Betriebshalt Safe Operating Stop
SPC Sollwertkanal Setpoint Channel
SPS Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
SS1 Sicherer Stop 1 Safe Stop 1
SS2 Sicherer Stop 2 Safe Stop 2
SSI Synchron Serielle Schnittstelle Synchronous Serial Interface
SSM Sichere Rückmeldung der Safe Speed Monitor
Geschwindigkeitsüberwachung (n < nx)
SSR Sichere Bremsrampe Safe Stop Ramp
STO Sicher abgeschaltetes Moment Safe Torque Off
STW PROFIBUS Steuerwort PROFIBUS control word
T
TB Terminal Board Terminal Board
TIA Totally Integrated Automation Totally Integrated Automation
TM Terminal Module Terminal Module
TN Drehstromversorgungsnetz geerdet Grounded three-phase supply network
Tn Nachstellzeit Integral time
TPDO Transmit Process Data Object Transmit Process Data Object
TT Drehstromversorgungsnetz geerdet Grounded three-phase supply network
TTL Transistor-Transistor-Logik Transistor-Transistor Logic
Tv Vorhaltezeit Derivative-action time
U
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
USV Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
V

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

406 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning, German Meaning, English

VC Vektorregelung Vector Control
Vdc Zwischenkreisspannung DC link voltage
VdcN Teilzwischenkreisspannung negativ Partial DC link voltage negative
VdcP Teilzwischenkreisspannung positiv Partial DC link voltage positive
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker Association of German Electrical Engineers
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure Association of German Engineers
Vpp Volt Spitze zu Spitze Volt peak to peak
VSM Voltage Sensing Module Voltage Sensing Module
W
WEA Wiedereinschaltautomatik Automatic restart
WZM Werkzeugmaschine Machine tool
X
XML Erweiterbare Auszeichnungssprache Extensible Markup Language
(Standardsprache für Web-Publishing und
Dokumentenmanagement)
Z
ZK Zwischenkreis DC Link
ZSW PROFIBUS Zustandswort PROFIBUS status word

Abbreviations, DC-specific terms

Abbreviation Meaning
2Q 2 quadrant
4Q 4 quadrant
IR Initial rounding
FR Final rounding
CUD Control Unit DC
RUT Rampup time
Ia Actual armature current value
IAlimit Current limit
If Actual field current value
ILG Current at critical conduction
In Rated current
Kp P gain
La Armature circuit inductance
Mlimit Torque limit
Mact Actual torque value
n Speed
nact Actual speed value
nmin Minimum speed
NN Normal zero
nsetp Speed setpoint

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 407
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
Ra Armature circuit resistance
RDT Ramp-down time
Tn Integral time
Tu Ambient temperature
Ua Armature voltage
Uf Field voltage
ULine Line voltage
USS Universal serial interface
SICROWBAR Overvoltage protection

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

408 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix
A.3 Environmental compatibility

A.3 Environmental compatibility

Environmental aspects during development

The use of highly-integrated components has enabled the number of parts to be kept to a
minimum, with energy being used as efficiently as possible during production as a result.
Particular emphasis has been placed on ensuring that the metal and plastic parts have a low
volume and low weight, and that the number of different types is kept to a minimum.

Front parts: PC + ABS Bayblend Bayer

Plastic parts in the unit: PC Lexan 915-R
Insulation materials: PC (FR) fl Makrolon or Lexan
Rating plate: Polyester film
Pollutant-free materials have been used for all significant parts. Insulation materials
containing silicone are not used. Materials containing halogens are only present to a slight
extent (cable insulation in the SINAMICS DCM Control Module).
All materials meet ROHS criteria.
Environmental compatibility was a key criterion in selecting supplier parts.

Environmental aspects during production

The packaging material can be recycled and consists mainly of cardboard.
With the exception of the enclosure, no surface coatings have been used.
The production processes do not produce any emissions.

Environmental aspects for disposal

The unit features screw-in and snap-in connections that can be easily released in order to
separate it into different mechanical components for recycling purposes.
The printed circuit boards may be used in recycling processes involving energy recovery.
The proportion of components containing hazardous substances is low.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 409
Appendix
A.4 Servicing

A.4 Servicing

Repairs
If you wish to have a part or unit repaired, please get in touch with your regional contact for
repairs.

Services
Qualified personnel can perform repair work on your units and offer services that ensure
their availability. This work can be carried out with charges that are scaled according to the
amount of time and work involved, or at a flat rate as part of a contract. Services whose
charges depend on the amount of time and work involved are performed within the normal
working hours for the region and with an appropriate response time.
You can get in touch with your regional contact if you wish to have any services carried out.

Note
We would be grateful if you could specify the following unit data when contacting them with
queries relating to this:
• Unit order number and serial number
• Software version
• Hardware version of electronics module CUD (printed on the component side)
• Hardware version and software version of additional modules (if used)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

410 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Appendix B B
B.1 CPU time-optimized blocks on the SINAMICS DCM
DCC was CPU-time optimized for SINAMICS DCM. The optimized blocks are computed
about 5 times faster than non-optimized blocks and should be given preference.
In the following table, the optimized and non-optimized DCC blocks are correspondingly
marked:

Table B- 1 DCC blocks on the SINAMICS DCM

Designation Function Optimized Non-optimized

ADD Adder (REAL type) x
ADD_D Adder (double integer type) x
ADD_l Adder (integer type) x
ADD_M Modulo adder for addition in correct axis x
cycle
AVA Absolute value generator with sign x
evaluation
AVA_D Absolute value generator (double integer) x
DIV Divider (REAL type) x
DIV_D Divider (double integer type) x
DIV_I Divider (integer type) x
MAS Maximum evaluator x
MIS Minimum evaluator x
MUL Multiplier x
MUL_D Multiplier (double integer type) x
MUL_I Multiplier (integer type) x
PLI20 Polyline, 20 break points x
SII Inverter x
SUB Subtractor x
SUB_D Subtractor (double integer type) x
SUB_I Subtractor (integer type) x
AND BOOL type x
BSW Binary change-over switch (BOOL type) x
CNM Controllable numeric memory (REAL type) x
CNM_D Controllable numeric memory (double x
integer type)
CNM_I Controllable numeric memory (integer type) x
CTR Counter (BOOL type) x
DFR Reset-dominant D-type flip-flop (BOOL type) x
DLB Delay element (REAL type) x
DX8 Demultiplexer, 8 outputs, (REAL type) x

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 411
Appendix B
B.1 CPU time-optimized blocks on the SINAMICS DCM

Designation Function Optimized Non-optimized

ETE Edge evaluator (BOOL type) x
LVM Double-sided limit monitor with hysteresis x
(BOOL type)
MFP Pulse generator (BOOL type) x
MUX8 Multiplexer, cascadable (BREAL type) x
NAND Block (BOOL type) x
NCM Numeric comparator (REAL type) x
NCM_D Numeric comparator (DOUBLE INTEGER x
type)
NCM_I Numeric comparator (INTEGER type) x
NOP1 Dummy block (REAL type) x
NOP1_B Dummy block (BOOL type) x
NOP1_D Dummy block (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x
NOP1_I Dummy block (INTEGER type) x
NOP8 Dummy blocks (REAL type) x
NOP8_B Dummy blocks (BOOL type) x
NOP8_D Dummy blocks (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x
NOP8_I Dummy blocks (INTEGER type) x
NOR Block (BOOL type) x
NOT Inverter (BOOL type) x
NSW Numeric change-over switch (REAL type) x
NSW_D Numeric change-over switch (DOUBLE x
INTEGER type)
NSW_I Numeric change-over switch (INTEGER x
type)
OR (BOOL type) x
PCL Pulse shortening device (BOOL type) x
PDE Closing delay device (BOOL type) x
PDF Breaking delay device (BOOL type) x
PST Pulse stretching device (BOOL type) x
RSR RS flip-flop, R-dominant (BOOL type) x
RSS RS flip-flop, S-dominant (BOOL type) x
SH_DW Shift block (DWORD type) x
TRK Tracking/memory element (REAL type) x
TRK_D Tracking/memory element (WORD type) x
XOR Block (BOOL type) x
BY_W Status byte to status word converter x
B_DW Converter 32 binary variables to status x
double word
B_W Converter 16 binary variables to status word x
DW_B Converter status double word to 32 binary x
variables
DW_R Accepting bit string as real value x
DW_W Status double word to status word converter x

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

412 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix B
B.1 CPU time-optimized blocks on the SINAMICS DCM

Designation Function Optimized Non-optimized

D_I DOUBLE INTEGER to INTEGER converter x
D_R DOUBLE INTEGER to REAL converter x
D_UI DOUBLE INTEGER to UNSIGNED x
INTEGER converter
D_US DOUBLE INTEGER to UNSIGNED SHORT x
INTEGER converter
I_D INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter x
I_R INTEGER to REAL converter x
I_UD INTEGER to UNSIGNED DOUBLE x
INTEGER converter
I_US INTEGER to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER x
converter
N2_R Converting 16-bit fixed-point format (N2) to x
REAL
N4_R Converting 32-bit fixed-point format (N4) to x
REAL
R_D REAL to DOUBLE INTEGER converter x
R_DW Bit string transfer as WORD x
R_I REAL to INTEGER converter x
R_N2 Converting REAL to 16-bit fixed-point format x
(N2)
R_N4 Converting REAL to 32-bit fixed-point format x
(N4)
R_UD REAL to UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER x
converter
R_UI REAL to UNSIGNED INTEGER converter x
R_US REAL to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER x
converter
UD_I INTEGER DOUBLE INTEGER to INTEGER x
converter
UD_R UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER to REAL x
converter
UI_D UNSIGNED INTEGER to DOUBLE x
INTEGER converter
UI_R UNSIGNED INTEGER to REAL converter x
US_D UNSIGNED-SHORT-INTEGER to DOUBLE x
INTEGER converter
US_I UNSIGNED-SHORT-INTEGER to INTEGER x
converter
US_R UNSIGNED-SHORT-INTEGER to REAL x
converter
W_B Converter, status word to 16 binary variables x
W_BY Status word to status byte converter x
W_DW Status word to status double word converter x
DCA Diameter calculator x
INCO Axial winder moment of inertia x

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 413
Appendix B
B.1 CPU time-optimized blocks on the SINAMICS DCM

Designation Function Optimized Non-optimized

TTCU Winding characteristic x
DEL Dead zone element x
DEZ Dead zone element x
DIF Derivative-action element x
DT1 Smoothing element x
INT Integrator x
LIM Limiter (REAL type) x
LIM_D Limiter (DOUBLE type) x
MVS Sliding-type mean value generator x
PC P controller x
PIC PI controller x
PT1 Delay element x
RGE Ramp-function generator x
SAV Value buffering (REAL type) x
SAV_BY Value buffering (BYTE type) x
SAV_D Value buffering (DOUBLE type) x
SAV_I Value buffering (INTEGER type) x
BF Flash function BOOL x
DX8_D Demultiplexer, 8 outputs, (DOUBLE x
INTEGER type)
DX8_I Demultiplexer, 8 outputs, (INTEGER type) x
MUX8_D Multiplexer, cascadable (DOUBLE INTEGER x
type)
MUX8_I Multiplexer, cascadable (INTEGER type) x
OCA Software cam group x
WBG Wobble generator x
RGJ Ramp-function generator with jerk limiting x
RDP Reading drive parameters (REAL type) x
RDP_D Reading drive parameters (DOUBLE type) x
RDP_I Reading drive parameters (INTEGER type) x
RDP_UD Reading drive parameters (UNSIGNED x
DOUBLE INTEGER type)
RDP_UI Reading drive parameters (UNSIGNED x
INTEGER type)
RDP_US Reading drive parameters (UNSIGNED x
SHORT INTEGER type)
SAH Sample and hold (REAL type) x
SAH_B Sample and hold (BOOL type) x
SAH_BY Sample and hold (BYTE type) x
SAH_D Sample and hold (DOUBLE type) x
SAH_I Sample and hold (INTEGER type) x
STM Fault/alarm trigger x
WRP Writing drive parameters (REAL type) x

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

414 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix B
B.1 CPU time-optimized blocks on the SINAMICS DCM

Designation Function Optimized Non-optimized

WRP_D Writing drive parameters (DOUBLE type) x
WRP_I Writing drive parameters (INTEGER type) x
WRP_UD Writing drive parameters (UNSIGNED x
DOUBLE INTEGER type)
WRP_UI Writing drive parameters (UNSIGNED x
INTEGER type)
WRP_US Writing drive parameters (UNSIGNED x
SHORT INTEGER type)

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 415
Appendix B
B.2 BOP20 status display during power-up

B.2 BOP20 status display during power-up

During power-up, the status of the power-up is briefly displayed on the BOP20.

Table B- 2 Display of the power-up on the BOP20

Displayed value Meaning

0 Operation
10 Ready
20 Wait for power-up
25 Wait for automatic firmware update of DRIVE-CLiQ components
31 Commissioning software download active
33 Remove/acknowledge topology error
34 End commissioning mode
35 Perform the first commissioning
70 Initialization
80 Reset active
99 Internal software error

Note
If fault 33 stops the SINAMICS DCM during power-up, the likely causes are as follows:
1. The actual topology has been changed.
– Remedy 1: Restore the correct connections for the actual topology → Power-up
continues
– Remedy 2: Adapt the set topology to the actual topology (see the section titled
"Changing the topology").
2. There is a CompactFlash Card in the drive. A SINAMICS DCM parameter set with
different MLFB was loaded to the drive during power-up (e.g. the data set of an 850 A
unit was loaded to a 30 A unit). This means the unit and motor settings may no longer be
correct. The user must confirm that this data should be accepted.
– Remedy: Set p9905=2 to continue powering up.

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

416 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Appendix B
B.3 Feedback

B.3 Feedback

:HKDYHPDGHHYHU\HIIRUWWRSURGXFHWKLVPDQXDOHUURUIUHH
,I\RXGLVFRYHUDQ\HUURUVZHZRXOGEHJUDWHIXOLI\RXZRXOGLQIRUPXV
3OHDVHDOVRJLYHXV\RXURSLQLRQRIWKLVPDQXDODQGRIRXUGHYLFH
3OHDVHVHQG\RXUVXJJHVWLRQVSUDLVHDQGFULWLFLVPWR\RXUQHDUHVW6LHPHQVUHJLRQDORIILFH
0DQ\WKDQNV
6LHPHQV$*$XVWULD6,0($

)URP 1DPH 'DWH

&RPSDQ\
&RQWDFW

7R 6LHPHQV5HJLRQDO2IILFH
$GGUHVV

)RUIRUZDUGLQJWR
6LHPHQV$*$XVWULD6,0($
6XEMHFW
0DQXDO
(GLWLRQ

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 417
Index
CBE20, 135, 240
CDS, (See "Data sets")
A Certifications, 399
Commissioning, 185
Access levels, 247
Optimization runs, 193, 203
Accessories, 24
Optional additional modules, 235
Acknowledging errors, 377
STARTER, 205
On the BOP20, 268
With AOP30, 199
Using AOP30, 285
CompactFlash Card, 120, 249
Acknowledging faults, 377
Components
Actual position value, 341
Communication Board CBE20, 136
Alarm buffer, 379
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30, 141
Alarm history, 379
Terminal Module TM15, 157
Alarm value, 379
Terminal Module TM31, 170
Alarms, 376
Connecting
Alarm buffer, 379
Current transformers, 87
Alarm history, 379
External power unit, 68
Configuring, 380
Firing pulse transformers, 94
Ambient temperature, 34
Fuse monitoring equipment, 97
Analog inputs, 113, 292
Voltage measurement equipment, 96
Analog outputs, 115, 293
Connecting power units in parallel, 98
AOP30
Connector, 256
Acknowledging errors, 285
Connector assignment, 111
as the time-of-day master, 289
Connectors
Faults and alarms, 287
Arrangement, 105
LOCAL mode, 282
Control via PROFIBUS, 296
Menu structure, 272
Control word, 299
Operation screen, 273
Control word for encoder, 344
Overview, 271
Copying RAM to ROM, 229
Automatic restart, 358
CPU time load, 384
Auxiliary circuits, 351
Creep, 337
CUD
LEDs, 373
B Second CUD, 369
BICO technology Current transformers, 87
Converters, 259
Fixed values, 259
Interconnecting signals, 256 D
What is it?, 255
Data sets
Binector, 255
Command data set (CDS), 252
Block diagram, 65
Drive data set (DDS), 253
BOP20
Encoder data set (EDS), 254
Control word, drive, 269
DDS, (See "Data sets")
Brake, 348
Diagnostics
Diagnostic memory, 372
Trend recorder function, 372
C using LEDs for CBE20, 138
Cable sets, 26 using LEDs on Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 148

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 419
Index

using LEDs on Terminal Module TM15, 163 Fuses, 103

using LEDs on Terminal Module TM31, 179
Digital inputs, 113
Digital outputs, 114 H
Dimension drawing, 39
Holding brake, 348
Dimensions, 39
Hot restart time, 358
Disconnection, 328
Disposal, 409
Dividing the unit, 41
Division options, 75
I
Drive object, 248 I2t monitoring, 352
DRIVE-CLiQ, 119, 135 Incremental encoder evaluation, 114, 115, 141, 340
Inputs, 113
Analog, 113, 292
E Digital, 113
Overview, 291
EDS, (See "Data sets")
Temperature sensor, 115
Electromagnetic compatibility, (See EMC)
Interconnecting signals using BICO technology, 256
Electronic power supply, 112
Interconnecting using BICO technology, 256
EMC, 54
Interfaces
Basic information, 54
DRIVE-CLiQ, 119
EMC-compliant installation, 57
Peer-to-peer, 114, 364
EN 61800-3, 54
USS, 324
Enable, 330
Encoder
Control word, 344
Status word, 346
J
Encoder evaluation, 340 Jog, 337
Environmental classes, 34
Environmental compatibility, 409
Environmental conditions, 34 L
E-STOP, 331
LEDs
for CBE20, 138
for Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 148
F for Terminal Module TM15, 163
Factory setting, 204 for Terminal Module TM31, 179
Fault buffer, 378 On the CUD, 373
Fault value, 378 PROFIBUS, 296
Faults, 376 Load resistances, 88
Acknowledging, 377
Configuring, 380
Fault buffer, 378 M
Faults and alarms
Maintenance, 395
BICO interconnections, 383
Manual optimization, 242
Faults and alarms, 287
Measurement
Field extra-low voltage, 101
Armature current, 86
Field supply, 100
Armature current, offset correction, 93
Firing pulse transformers, 94
Menu, (See AOP30)
Firing pulses
Messages, 376
Amplifying, 95
Configuring, 380
Connecting in parallel, 95
External triggering, 381
Fixed setpoint, 338

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

420 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
 Index

O IRT*, 318
RT and IRT, 311
OFF2, 328
Unit selection, 322
OFF3, 328
PROFINET variants, 322
Offset correction, 93
Online mode with STARTER, 304
Operation enable, 330
Operation screen, (See AOP30)
Q
Operational brake, 348 Quick stop, 328
Operator panel
AOP30, 199, 270
Optimization R
Manual, 242
Ramp-down time, 332
Optimization runs, 193, 203
Ramp-function generator, 332
Options, 24, 50
Ramp-function integrator, 335
Outputs, 113
Ramp-function-generator tracking, 336
Analog, 115, 293
Rampup time, 332
Digital, 114
Removing modules, 43
Overview, 291
Ribbon cables, 130
Overload protection, 352

S
P
Safety shutdown (E-STOP), 331
Parallel connection, 359
Second CUD, 369
Parameterization
Setpoint channel
Using BOP20, 260
Creep, 337
With AOP30, 273
Fixed setpoint, 338
Parameters
Jog, 337
Access levels, 247
Ramp-function generator, 332
Categories, 245
Shutdown, 326
Factory setting, 204
OFF2 (disconnection), 328
Resetting, 247
OFF3 (quick stop), 328
Saving, 246, 288
SMC30, 135, 237
Types, 245
Software update, 396
Peer-to-peer interface, 114, 364
Spare parts, 7
Process data, control words
Speed-dependent current limitation, 355
Gn_STW, 344
Standards, 399
Process data, status words
STARTER, 205
Gn_ZSW, 346
Commissioning, 206
PROFIBUS, 294
Configuring a drive unit, 214
Bus terminating resistor, 295
Connection through a serial interface, 229
Connection, 294
Creating the project, 207
Connector, 119, 294
Installation, 205
Connectors, 294
Online mode via PROFINET, 304
Diagnostics LED, 296
Project wizard, 208
Telegrams and process data, 297
Starting the drive project, 227
User-defined telegram selection, 297
User interface, 206
PROFINET cable, 138
Status word, 301
PROFINET interface, 314
Status word for encoder, 346
PROFINET IO, 310
Switch on, 326
Addresses, 312
Operation enable (enable), 330
IRT, 318

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619 421
Index

T
Technical data
Communication Board CBE20, 140
Environmental conditions, 34
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30, 153
Terminal Module TM15, 168
Terminal Module TM31, 184
Unit data, 35
Technical support, 6
Temperature sensor, 115
Terminal assignment, 111
Terminal Module TM15, 157, 235
Terminal Module TM31, 170, 235
Terminals
Arrangement, 105
Thermal overload protection, 352
Time-of-day master, 289
Timeout monitoring, 285
TM15, 135
TM31, 135
Trend recorder function, 372

U
Unit data, 35
USS interface, 324

SINAMICS DCM Control Modules

422 Operating Instructions, 11.2009, C98130-A7067-A1-01-7619
Siemens AG Subject to change
Industry Sector 6RX1800-0BD00
P.O. Box 48 48 © Siemens AG 2009
90026 NUREMBERG
GERMANY

www.siemens.com/automation